2022 BMW 2 Series Gran Coupe Owners Manual

LINK:
CONTENT & A-Z
The Ultimate
Driving Machine®
OWNER'S MANUAL.
BMW 2 SERIES GRAN COUPE.
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F24 - VI/21

WELCOME TO BMW.
Owner's Manual.
Thank you for choosing a BMW.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have on
the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW. Also use the
Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It contains important notes on ve‐
hicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features availa‐
ble in your BMW. The manual also contains information designed to enhance
operating reliability and traffic safety, and to contribute to maintaining the
value of your BMW.
At the time of production at the plant, the printed Owner's Manual is the most
current resource. After a vehicle software update – such as, a Remote Soft‐
ware Upgrade – the Integrated Owner's Manual for the vehicle will contain the
latest information.
You can find supplementary information in the additional brochures in the ve‐
hicle literature.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable ride.
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
After a vehicle software update – such as, a Remote Software Upgrade –

the Integrated Owner's Manual for the vehicle will contain the latest infor‐
mation.
NOTES
Information ......................................................................................................................... 6
Owner's Manual media ................................................................................................ 14
QUICK REFERENCE
Entering ............................................................................................................................ 16
Set-up and use ............................................................................................................... 20
On the road ...................................................................................................................... 24
CONTROLS
Dashboard ........................................................................................................................ 32
Sensors of the vehicle .................................................................................................. 37
Operating state of the vehicle .................................................................................... 40
iDrive .................................................................................................................................. 43
BMW Remote Software Upgrade ............................................................................. 58
General settings ............................................................................................................. 62
Personal settings ........................................................................................................... 66
Connections .................................................................................................................... 71
Opening and closing ..................................................................................................... 80
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel .......................................................................... 106
Transporting children safely ..................................................................................... 118
Driving ............................................................................................................................. 124
Displays .......................................................................................................................... 142
Lights .............................................................................................................................. 163
Safety .............................................................................................................................. 170
Driving stability control systems .............................................................................. 190
Driver assistance systems ........................................................................................ 194
Driving comfort ............................................................................................................. 223
Climate control ............................................................................................................. 224
4
Interior equipment ....................................................................................................... 238
Storage compartments .............................................................................................. 246
Cargo area ..................................................................................................................... 250
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving ......................................................................... 256
Saving fuel ..................................................................................................................... 261
MOBILITY
Refueling ........................................................................................................................ 268
Wheels and tires .......................................................................................................... 270
Engine compartment ................................................................................................. 299
Operating materials .................................................................................................... 302
Maintenance ................................................................................................................. 309
Replacing components .............................................................................................. 311
Breakdown Assistance .............................................................................................. 315
Vehicle Care .................................................................................................................. 323
REFERENCE
Technical data .............................................................................................................. 328
Appendix ........................................................................................................................ 330
Everything from A to Z ............................................................................................... 332
© 2021 Bayerische Motoren Werke

Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English ID7 VI/21, 07 21 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
5
NOTES Information
Information
Using this Owner's Manual Additional sources of
information
Orientation
The fastest way to find information on a particu‐ Service center
lar topic is by using the index.
A service center will be glad to answer questions
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in at any time.
the first chapter.
Internet
Validity of the Owner's Manual Vehicle information and general information on
BMW, for instance, on technology, are available
Production of the vehicle on the Internet: www.bmwusa.com.
At the time of production at the plant, the printed
Owner's Manual is the most current resource. Integrated Owner's Manual in the
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, differ‐
vehicle
ences may exist between the printed Owner's
Manual and the Integrated Owner's Manual in The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically de‐
the vehicle. scribes features and functions found in the vehi‐
cle. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐
Notes on updates can be found in the appendix
played on the Control Display.
of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
After a software update in the

BMW Driver’s Guide app
vehicle The BMW Driver's Guide app specifically de‐
scribes features and functions found in the vehi‐
After a vehicle software update, such as via Re‐
cle. The app can be displayed on smartphones
mote Software Upgrade, the Integrated Owner's
and tablets.
Manual for the vehicle will contain the latest in‐
formation.
BMW Driver’s Guide Web
Owner's Manual for Navigation, Driver’s Guide Web shows the most suitable in‐
formation for the selected vehicle. If possible,
Entertainment, Communication
only equipment and functions that are actually in‐
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain‐ stalled in the vehicle will be explained. Driver’s
ment, and Communication can be obtained as a Guide Web can be displayed in any current
printed book from the service center. browser.
The topics are also discussed in the Integrated
Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
6
Information NOTES
Symbols and displays Vehicle equipment and

options
Symbols in the Owner's Manual
This Owner's Manual describes all models and
Icon Meaning all standard, country-specific and optional equip‐
ment that is offered in the model series. There‐
Precautions that must be followed in
fore, this Owner's Manual also describes and il‐
order to avoid the possibility of injury to
lustrates features and functions that are not
yourself and to others as well as serious
available in a vehicle, for example because of the
damage to the vehicle.
selected optional equipment or the country-spe‐
Measures that can be taken to help cific version.
protect the environment. This also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
"..." Texts in vehicle used to select individual
functions. When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice served.
activation system.
For any options and equipment not described in
››...‹‹ Responses generated by the voice this Owner's Manual, refer to the Supplementary
activation system. Owner's Manuals.
Your BMW service center is happy to answer any
Action steps questions that you may have about the features
and options applicable to your vehicle.
Action steps to be carried out are presented as a
numbered list. The steps must be carried out in
the defined order.
Status of the Owner's
1. First action step. Manual
2. Second action step.
Basic information
Enumerations
The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a pol‐
Enumerations without mandatory order or alter‐
icy of constant development that is conceived to
native possibilities are presented as a list with
ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the
bullet points.
highest quality and safety standards. In rare
▷ First possibility. cases, therefore, the features described in this
▷ Second possibility. Owner's Manual may differ from those in your
vehicle.
Icons on vehicle components
This symbol on a vehicle component
Validity of the Owner's Manual
indicates that further information on the
component is available in the Owner's Manual. Production of the vehicle
At the time of production at the plant, the printed
Owner's Manual is the most current resource.
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, differ‐
ences may exist between the printed Owner's
7
NOTES Information
Manual and the Integrated Owner's Manual in tronics, requires suitable maintenance and repair
the vehicle. work.
Notes on updates can be found in the appendix The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle. that you entrust corresponding procedures to a
BMW center. If you choose to use another serv‐
After a software update in the ice facility, BMW recommends use of a facility
vehicle that performs work, e.g., maintenance and repair,
according to BMW specifications with properly
trained personnel, referred to in the Owner's
Manual as "another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop".
formation.
If work is performed improperly, for instance
maintenance and repair, there is a risk of subse‐
For Your Own Safety quent damage and related safety risks.
Improperly performed work on the vehicle paint‐
Intended use work can lead to a failure or fault of components,
e.g., the radar sensors, and thereby result in a
Heed the following when using the vehicle: safety risk.
▷ Owner's Manual.
▷ Information on the vehicle. Do not remove Parts and accessories
stickers. BMW recommends the use of parts and acces‐
▷ Technical vehicle data. sory products approved by BMW.
▷ The traffic, speed, and safety laws where the Approved parts and accessories, and advice on
vehicle is driven. their use and installation are available from a
▷ Vehicle documents and statutory documents. BMW center.
BMW parts and accessories have been tested by
Warranty BMW for their safety and suitability in BMW vehi‐
cles.
Your vehicle is technically configured for the op‐
erating conditions and registration requirements BMW warrants genuine BMW parts and acces‐
applying in the country of first delivery, also sories.
known as homologation. If your vehicle is to be BMW does not evaluate whether each individual
operated in a different country it might be neces‐ product from another manufacturer can be used
sary to adapt your vehicle to potentially differing with BMW vehicles without presenting a safety
operating conditions and registration require‐ hazard, even if a country-specific official approval
ments. Noncompliance with homologation re‐ was issued. BMW does not evaluate whether
quirements in a certain country may affect war‐ these products are suitable for BMW vehicles
ranty coverage. Please consult the New Vehicle under all usage conditions.
Limited Warranty Booklet for further information
on warranty matters. California Proposition 65
Warning
Maintenance and repairs
For vehicles sold in California, the law requires
Advanced technology, for instance the use of vehicle manufacturers to provide the following
modern materials and high-performance elec‐ warning:
8
Information NOTES
▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Warning ▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of Automo‐ ▷ Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty.
bile components and parts, including compo‐
▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐
cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the ▷ California Emission Control System Limited
State of California to cause cancer and birth Warranty.
defects and reproductive harm. In addition, cer‐ Detailed information about these warranties is
tain fluids contained in vehicles and certain listed in the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Book‐
products of component wear contain or emit let.
chemicals known to the State of California to Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐ designed to meet the particular operating condi‐
ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐ tions and homologation requirements in your
lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐ country and continental region in order to deliver
pounds. Batteries also contain other chemicals the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is oper‐
known to the State of California to cause can‐ ated under those conditions. If you wish to oper‐
cer. Wash your hands after handling. Used en‐ ate your vehicle in another country or region, you
gine oil contains chemicals that have caused may be required to adapt your vehicle to meet
cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect different prevailing operating conditions and ho‐
your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and mologation requirements. You should also be
water. For more information go to aware of any applicable warranty limitations or
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. exclusions for such country or region. In such
case, please contact Customer Relations for fur‐
ther information.
Warning
Operating, servicing and maintaining a passen‐ Maintenance
ger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the road
expose you to chemicals including engine ex‐ safety, operational reliability and the New Vehicle
haust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, Limited Warranty.
which are known to the State of California to
Specifications for maintenance measures:
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐
ductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid ▷ BMW Maintenance system.
breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine ex‐ ▷ Maintenance Booklet, available online and ac‐
cept as necessary, service your vehicle in a cessible via a QR code in the New Vehicle
well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash Limited Warranty Booklet.
your hands frequently when servicing your ve‐ ▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
hicle. For more information go to Canadian models.
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
If the vehicle is not maintained or is improperly
maintained, this could result in serious damage
to the vehicle.
Service and warranty
A failure to maintain your vehicle or improper
We recommend that you read this publication
maintenance may affect your warranty coverage.
thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the follow‐
Please consult the New Vehicle Limited War‐
ing warranties:
ranty Booklet for further information on warranty
matters.
9
NOTES Information
Refer to section on engine oil change regarding nical information. Information about the vehicle
recommended service intervals for oil changes. condition, component usage, maintenance rec‐
ommendations, events or faults can be stored
temporarily or permanently.
Data memory This information generally documents the state
of a component, a module, a system, or the sur‐
General information rounding area, for instance:
Electronic control devices are installed in the ve‐ ▷ Operating states of system components, for
hicle. Electronic control units process data they instance, fill levels, tire pressure, battery sta‐
receive from vehicle sensors, self-generate or tus.
exchange with each other. Some control units ▷ Malfunctions and faults in important system
are necessary for the vehicle to function safely or components, for instance lights and brakes.
provide assistance during driving, for instance ▷ Responses by the vehicle to special driving
driver assistance systems. Furthermore, control situations such as airbag deployment or en‐
units facilitate comfort or infotainment functions. gagement of the driving stability control sys‐
Information about stored or exchanged data can tems.
be requested from the manufacturer of the vehi‐ ▷ Information on vehicle-damaging events.
cle, in a separate booklet, for example.
The data is required to perform the control unit
functions. Furthermore, it also serves to detect
Personal reference and correct malfunctions, and helps the vehicle
Each vehicle is marked with a unique vehicle manufacturer to optimize vehicle functions.
identification number. Depending on the country,
The majority of this data is stored temporarily
the vehicle owner can be identified with the vehi‐
and is only processed within the vehicle itself. In
cle identification number, license plate and corre‐
some circumstances the vehicle may store some
sponding authorities. In addition, there are other
data for an additional but limited period of time.
options to track data collected in the vehicle to
the driver or vehicle owner, for instance, via the When servicing, for instance during repairs, serv‐
ConnectedDrive account that is used. ice processes, warranty cases, and quality assur‐
ance measures, this technical information can be
read out from the vehicle together with the vehi‐
Operating data in the vehicle
cle identification number.
Control units process data to operate the vehicle.
A dealer’s service center or another qualified
For example, this includes: service center or repair shop can read out the in‐
▷ Status messages for the vehicle and its indi‐ formation. The socket for OBD Onboard Diagno‐
vidual components, e.g., wheel rotational sis required by law in the vehicle is used to read
speed, wheel speed, deceleration, lateral ac‐ out the data.
celeration, engaged safety belt indicator. The data is collected, processed, and used by
▷ Ambient conditions, e.g., temperature, rain the relevant organizations in the service network.
sensor signals. The data documents technical conditions of the
The processed data is only processed in the ve‐ vehicle, which can be used to determine vehicle
hicle itself and generally volatile. The data is not maintenance status, and facilitate quality im‐
stored beyond the operating period. provement.
Electronic components, e.g. control units and ve‐ Fault and event memories in the vehicle can be
hicle keys, contain components for storing tech‐ reset when a dealer’s service center or another
10
Information NOTES
qualified service center or repair shop performs The sound and picture from the mobile device
repair or servicing work. can be played back and displayed through the
multimedia system. Certain information is trans‐
Data entry and data transmission ferred to the mobile device at the same time. De‐
into the vehicle pending on the type of incorporation, this in‐
cludes, for instance position data and other
general vehicle information. This optimizes the
General information
way in which selected apps, for instance naviga‐
Depending on the vehicle equipment, comfort tion or music playback, work.
and individual settings can be stored in the vehi‐
There is no further interaction between the mo‐
cle and modified or reset at any time.
bile device and the vehicle, such as active access
For example, this includes: to vehicle data.
▷ Settings for the seat and steering wheel posi‐ How the data will be processed further is deter‐
tions. mined by the provider of the particular app being
▷ Chassis and climate control settings. used. The extent of the possible settings de‐
If necessary, data can be transferred to the en‐ pends on the respective app and the operating
tertainment and communication system of the system of the mobile device.
vehicle, for instance via smartphone.
This includes the following depending on the re‐ Services
spective equipment:
General information
▷ Multimedia data such as music, films or pho‐
tos for playback in an integrated multimedia If the vehicle has a wireless network connection,
system. this enables data to be exchanged between the
vehicle and other systems. The wireless network
▷ Address book data for use in conjunction with
connection is realized via an in-vehicle transmit‐
an integrated hands-free system or an
ter and receiver unit or via personal mobile devi‐
integrated navigation system.
ces brought into the vehicle, for instance smart‐
▷ Entered navigation destinations. phones. This wireless network connection
▷ Data on the use of Internet services. enables 'online functions' to be used. These in‐
This data can be stored locally in the vehicle or is clude online services and apps supplied by the
found on a device that has been connected to vehicle manufacturer or by other providers.
the vehicle, e.g., a smartphone, USB stick or
MP3 player. If this data is stored in the vehicle, it Services from the vehicle
can be deleted at any time. manufacturer
This data is only transmitted to third parties upon Where online services from the vehicle manufac‐
personal request as part of the use of online turer are concerned, the corresponding functions
services. The transmission depends on the se‐ are described in the appropriate place, for in‐
lected settings for the use of the services. stance the Owner's Manual or manufacturer's
website. The relevant legal information pertaining
Incorporation of mobile devices to data protection may also be found on the
manufacturer’s website. Personal data may be
Depending on the vehicle equipment, mobile de‐
used to perform online services. Data is ex‐
vices connected to the vehicle, for instance
changed over a secure connection, for instance
smartphones, can be controlled via the vehicle
with the IT systems of the vehicle manufacturer
control elements.
intended for this purpose.
11
NOTES Information
Any collection, processing, and use of personal This data can help provide a better understand‐
data above and beyond that needed to provide ing of the circumstances in which crashes and
the services must always be based on a legal injuries occur.
permission, contractual arrangement or consent. EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a
It is also possible to activate or deactivate the nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data is re‐
data connection as a whole. That is, with the ex‐ corded by the EDR under normal driving condi‐
ception of functions and services required by law tions and no personal data, for instance name,
such as Assist systems. gender, age, and crash location, are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce‐
Services from other providers ment, could combine the EDR data with the type
When using online services from other providers, of personally identifying data routinely acquired
these services are the responsibility of the rele‐ during a crash investigation.
vant provider and subject to their data privacy
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip‐
conditions and terms of use. The vehicle manu‐
ment is required, and access to the vehicle or the
facturer has no influence on the content ex‐
EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manu‐
changed during this process. Information on the
facturer, other parties, such as law enforcement,
way in which personal data is collected and used
that have the special equipment, can read the in‐
in relation to services from third parties, the
formation if they have access to the vehicle or
scope of such data, and its purpose, can be ob‐
the EDR.
tained from the relevant service provider.
Event Data Recorder EDR Vehicle identification

number
This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐
corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to General information
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐
Depending on the national-market version, the
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
vehicle identification number is located in differ‐
road obstacle, data that will assist in understand‐
ent positions in the vehicle. This chapter de‐
ing how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
scribes all possible positions for the series.
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period
of time, typically 30 seconds or less. Engine compartment
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
▷ How various systems in your vehicle were op‐
erating.
▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were fastened.
▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal.
▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling. The engraved vehicle identification number can
be found in the engine compartment, on the
right-hand side of the vehicle.
12
Information NOTES
Right nameplate iDrive

It is also possible to display the vehicle identifica‐
tion number via iDrive.
Additional information:
Displaying the vehicle identification number and
software part number, refer to page 72.
Reporting safety defects

The vehicle identification number can be found
For US customers
on the nameplate, on the right-hand side of the
vehicle. The following only applies to vehicles owned and
operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
Left nameplate which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the Na‐
tional Highway Traffic Safety Administration
NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North
America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New
Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
The vehicle identification number can be found recall and remedy campaign.
on the nameplate, on the left-hand side of the However, NHTSA cannot become involved in in‐
vehicle. dividual problems between you, your dealer, or
BMW of North America, LLC.
Windshield To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle

Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New
Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other information about mo‐
tor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
For Canadian customers

Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-
related defect to Transport Canada, Defect In‐
The vehicle identification number can also be vestigations and Recalls, may call the toll-free
found behind the windshield. hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
13
NOTES Owner's Manual media
Owner's Manual media

Vehicle features and Manual for the vehicle will contain the latest in‐
formation.
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ Printed Owner's Manual
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
Concept
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This The printed Owner's Manual describes all stand‐
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ ard, country-specific, and optional features of‐
tems. When using these functions and systems, fered with the series.
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served. General information
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment, and Communication can be obtained as a
General information printed book from the service center.
Media at a glance Supplementary Owner's Manuals

You can use various media formats to call up the Also follow the Supplementary Owner's Manuals,
content in the Owner's Manual. The following which are included in addition to the onboard lit‐
Owner's Manual media formats are available: erature.
▷ Printed Owner's Manual.
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
Integrated Owner's Manual
Validity of the Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Production of the vehicle Principle
At the time of production at the plant, the printed The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically de‐
Owner's Manual is the most current resource. scribes features and functions found in the vehi‐
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, differ‐ cle.
ences may exist between the printed Owner's The Integrated Owner's Manual can be displayed
Manual and the Integrated Owner's Manual in on the Control Display.
the vehicle.
Notes on updates can be found in the appendix Selecting the Owner's Manual
of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
1. Press the button.
After a software update in the 2. "CAR"
vehicle
3. "Owner's Manual"
mote Software Upgrade, the Integrated Owner's 4. Select the desired method of accessing the
contents.
14
Owner's Manual media NOTES
Scrolling through the Owner's

Manual
Turn the Controller, until the next or previous
contents are displayed.
Context help
General information
The Integrated Owner's Manual can be ac‐
cessed from any menu. Depending on the se‐
lected function, either the associated description
or the main menu of the Integrated Owner's
Manual will be displayed.
Opening via iDrive

Change directly to the Options menu from the
function on the Control Display:

2. "Help"
Opening when a Check Control

message is displayed
Directly from the Check Control message on the
Control Display:
"Owner's Manual"
15
QUICK REFERENCE Entering
Entering
Opening and closing Buttons for the central locking
system
Buttons on the vehicle key
Overview
1 Unlocking
Buttons for the central locking system.
2 Locking
3 Opening the trunk lid
Locking
4 Panic mode, pathway lighting
Press the button with the front doors
closed.
Unlocking the vehicle
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
Press the button on the vehicle key.
Unlocking
Depending on the settings, either only the driv‐
er's door or all vehicle access points are un‐ Press the button.
locked.
If only the driver's door is unlocked, press the
button on the vehicle key again to unlock the
Panic mode
other vehicle access points. You can trigger the alarm system if you find your‐
self in a dangerous situation.
Press and hold the button on the vehi‐
cle key after unlocking. ▷ Press the button on the vehicle key
and hold for at least 3 seconds.
The windows and the glass sunroof are opened, ▷ Briefly press the button on the vehicle key
as long as the button on the vehicle key is three times in succession.
pressed.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Locking the vehicle
1. Close the driver's door.
2. Press the button on the vehicle key.

All vehicle access points are locked.
16
Entering QUICK REFERENCE
Comfort Access Opening the trunk lid with no-touch

activation
Principle
The vehicle can be accessed without operating Principle
the vehicle key. The trunk lid can be opened with no-touch acti‐
Carrying the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your vation using the vehicle key you are carrying.
pants pocket, is sufficient.
Performing the foot movement
The vehicle automatically detects the vehicle key
when it is in close proximity or in the car's inte‐ 1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle at ap‐
rior. prox. one arm's length away from the rear of
the vehicle.
Unlocking the vehicle 2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the driving
direction and immediately pull it back. With
this movement, the leg must pass through
the ranges of both sensors.
Grasp the handle of a vehicle door completely.
Locking the vehicle

Trunk lid
Opening
Touch the grooved surface on the handle of a

closed vehicle door with your finger for approx.
1 second without grasping the door handle.
▷ Unlock the vehicle and then press the button
on the outer side of the trunk lid.
▷ Press and hold the button on the ve‐

hicle key for approx. 1 second.
17
QUICK REFERENCE Entering
Depending on the setting, the doors may also Driver's door

be unlocked.
Closing
Close the trunk lid manually.
Displays, control elements

In the vicinity of the steering
wheel 1 Power windows, safety switch
2 Central locking system
3 Seats, comfort features
4 Exterior mirrors
5 opening the trunk lid
Switch console
1 Light switch element

2 Turn signal indicator, high beams
3 Instrument cluster
4 Wipers
Indicator/warning lights
The indicator/warning lights can light up in a vari‐ 1 Selector lever/gearshift lever
ety of combinations and colors. 2 Controller
Several of the lights are checked for proper func‐ 3 Parking brake, Automatic Hold
tioning and light up temporarily when drive-ready
4 Driving Dynamics Control
state is turned on.
5 Start/Stop button
6 Assistance systems
iDrive
Principle
iDrive is the operating concept of the infotain‐
ment system and includes a large number of
functions.
18
Entering QUICK REFERENCE
Buttons on the Controller
Button Function
Go to the main menu.
Go to Apps menu.
Go to the Media/Radio menu.
Go to the Communication menu.
Go to navigation map.
Go to destination input menu for navi‐

gation.
Go to the previous display.
Go to the Options menu.
Voice control
Activating the voice control system

Press the button on the steering wheel.
Say the command.
Ending voice control

Press the button on the steering wheel
or ›Cancel‹.
19
QUICK REFERENCE Set-up and use
Set-up and use

Seats, mirrors and steering Adjusting the distance: M Sport seat
The distance to the back of the head is adjusted
wheel via the backrest tilt.
Electrically adjustable seats Adjusting the exterior mirrors
1 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt 1 Adjusting

2 Backrest tilt 2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor
3 Backrest width 3 Folding in and out
4 Lumbar support
Adjusting the steering wheel

Adjusting the head restraint
Manual steering wheel adjustment
Adjusting the height
1. Fold the lever down.

▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push 2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
the head restraint down. height and angle to suit your seat position.
▷ To raise: push the head restraint up. 3. Fold the lever back up.
After setting the height, make sure that the head
restraint engages correctly.
For equipment specification with M sport seat:

The height of the head restraints cannot be set.
20
Set-up and use QUICK REFERENCE
Memory function Button Function
Press once: changes the sta‐

Principle
tion/track.
The following settings can be stored and, if nec‐ / Press and hold: fast forward/
essary, retrieved using the memory function:
rewind the track.
▷ Seat position.
▷ Exterior mirror position.
Programmable memory but‐
▷ Height of the Head-up Display.
tons.
/
Storing
1. Set the desired position.
2. Press the button. The writing on the Changeover of waveband/satel‐

button lights up. lite radio.
3. Press the desired button 1 or 2 at the door Menu Apps.
while the writing is lit. A signal sounds.
Calling up settings
Navigation destination input
Press the desired button 1 or 2.
Entering a destination via the search
Infotainment 1. Press the button on the Controller.
2. "Where to?"
Radio 3. Enter at least two letters or characters.
Buttons and functions Select point of interest categories from the

points of interest menu as needed.
Depending on the country and equipment ver‐
sion, the radio has the following buttons. The search term may be completed automat‐
ically in orange lettering.
Button Function Move the Controller up to accept the sug‐
Press: turns sound output on/ gested search term.
off. 4. Select the icon, if needed.
Turn: adjusts the volume. A list of the results is displayed.
5. If necessary, "Filter"
6. "Show results"
Change the entertainment
source. 7. Select the desired entry.
8. If necessary, "Start guidance"
21
QUICK REFERENCE Set-up and use
Connecting a mobile phone Dialing a number

1. "COM"
General information 2. If necessary, "Telephone"
After the mobile phone is connected once to the 3. "Dial number:"
vehicle, the mobile phone can be operated using
iDrive and the steering wheel buttons. 4. Enter the numbers.
5. Select the icon. The connection is estab‐
Connecting the mobile phone via lished via the mobile phone to which this
Bluetooth function has been assigned.
1. "COM" Establish the connection via the additional tele‐

phone:
2. "Mobile devices"
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
4. "New device"
2. "Call via"
5. "Phone calls and audio"
The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed on Apple CarPlay© preparation
the Control Display.
6. Compare the control number displayed on Principle
the Control Display with the control number CarPlay allows certain functions of a compatible
on the display of the mobile device, and con‐ Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice control
firm that the two match. and iDrive.
7. A Bluetooth connection is established.
The mobile device is connected to the vehicle Functional requirements
and displayed in the device list. ▷ Compatible iPhone, iPhone 5 or later with
iOS 7.1 or later.
Using the telephone ▷ Corresponding mobile contract.
▷ If necessary, the setting for mobile data must
Accepting a call be activated on the iPhone.
Depending on the equipment, incoming calls can ▷ Bluetooth, WLAN, and Siri voice control are
be answered in several ways. activated on the iPhone.
▷ Via iDrive: ▷ WLAN is activated on the vehicle.
"Accept"
Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay
▷ / 1. "COM"
Press the corresponding button on the steer‐ 2. "Mobile devices"
ing wheel.
3. "New device"
▷ Via the selection list in the instrument cluster:
Use the thumbwheel on the steering wheel to
select: "Accept" The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed on
▷ Via touchscreen: tap on the corresponding
entry on the Control Display. 5. On the mobile device, search for Bluetooth
devices in the vicinity and select the vehicle.
22
Set-up and use QUICK REFERENCE
A control number is displayed.

6. Compare the control number displayed on
the Control Display with the control number
on the display of the mobile device, and con‐
firm that the two match.
7. "Use Apple CarPlay"
The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and dis‐
played in the device list.
23
QUICK REFERENCE On the road
On the road
Driving Releasing
With drive-ready state switched on:
Drive readiness Steptronic transmission: press the switch
while the brake is pressed or selector lever posi‐
Turning on drive readiness tion P is set.
The LED and indicator light turn off.
The parking brake is released.
Steptronic transmission: parking

1. Depress the brake pedal. The parking brake is automatically set if the vehi‐
2. Press the Start/Stop button. cle is being held by Automatic Hold and the
drive-ready state is switched off or the vehicle is
exited.
Turning off drive-ready state
Steptronic transmission:
Steptronic transmission
1. Engage selector lever position P with the ve‐
hicle stopped. Engaging selector lever position D,
2. Press the Start/Stop button. N, R
The engine is switched off.
3. Set the parking brake.
Auto Start/Stop function

The Auto Start/Stop function switches the en‐
gine off automatically while stationary to save
fuel. The engine starts automatically under the
following preconditions:
▷ Gear position D.
▷ By releasing the brake pedal.
▷ Neutral N.
▷ When Automatic Hold is activated: step on
▷ R is reverse.
the accelerator pedal.
With the driver's safety belt fastened, briefly push
the selector lever in the desired direction, past a
Parking brake
resistance point, if needed. The selector lever re‐
turns to the center position in each case.
Setting
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you
Pull the switch. select a gear position or reverse, maintain pres‐
The LED on the switch and the indicator sure on the brake pedal until you are ready to
light in the instrument cluster are illuminated. start.
24
On the road QUICK REFERENCE
A selector lever lock prevents the inadvertent Steptronic transmission, Sport

shifting to selector lever position R or the inad‐ program and manual mode
vertent shifting from selector lever position P.
Engage selector lever position R only when the
vehicle is stationary.
Releasing the selector lever lock
Activate the Sport program/manual mode:

Press the selector lever to the left from selector
lever position D.
Manual mode:
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
Press the button. ward.
▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rearwards.
Engaging P
End the sport program/manual mode:
Engage selector lever position P only when the
vehicle is stationary. Press the selector lever to the right.
Turn signal, high beams,

headlight flasher
Turn signal
Press button P.
▷ Blinking: press the lever past the resistance

point.
▷ Triple turn signal activation: lightly tap the
lever up or down.
▷ Brief blinking: press the lever to the resist‐
ance point and hold it there for as long as you
want the turn signal to blink.
25
High beams, headlight flasher Icon Function
Right roadside parking light.
Left roadside parking light.
Window wiper system
Press the lever forward or pull it backward. Turn on window wiper system
▷ High beams on, arrow 1.
The high beams light up when the low beams
are switched on.
▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.
Lights and lighting
Light functions
Press the lever up until the desired position is
Icon Function reached.
Front fog lights. ▷ Resting position of the wipers: position 0.
▷ Rain sensor: position 1.
▷ Normal wiper speed: position 2.
Lights off.
▷ Fast wiper speed: position 3.
Daytime driving lights.
Parking lights. Turn off the window wiper system

and flick wipe
Automatic headlight control.
Adaptive light functions.
Low beams.
Instrument lighting.
Press the lever down.
26
▷ Turn off: press the lever down until it reaches Cleaning the windshield
the 0 position.
▷ Flick wipe: press the lever down from the 0
position.
Activate/deactivate rain sensor
Pull the lever.
Climate control
Activate: press the lever up once from its 0 posi‐ Automatic climate control
tion, arrow 1.
Deactivate: press the lever back into the 0 posi‐ Button Function
tion.
Temperature.
Adjusting the rain sensor sensitivity Air recirculation mode.
Maximum cooling.
AUTO program.
Air distribution, manual.
Switching off.
Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.
Defrost function.
Rear window defroster.
Seat heating.
Air conditioning.
Air flow, manual.
27
Automatic climate control with Intermediate stop

enhanced features
Refueling
Button Function
Temperature. Fuel cap

1. To open the fuel filler flap, press on the rear
Air recirculation mode. edge, arrow. The fuel filler flap opens.
Maximum cooling.
AUTO program.
Switching off.
Air flow, manual.

Intensity AUTO program. 2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
Air distribution, manual. 3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to
the fuel filler flap.
Defrost function.
Gasoline
For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should
Rear window defroster. be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content.
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐
Seat heating. taining metal must not be used.
Air conditioning. Wheels and tires

Opening the Climate menu.
For example, for the following Tire pressure specifications
settings: upper body tempera‐ The tire inflation pressure specifications can be
ture adjustment, pre-ventilation. found in the tire inflation pressure table in the
printed Owner's Manual.
After correcting the tire pressure

With runflat tires:
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
With Tire Pressure Monitor:
The corrected tire inflation pressures are applied
automatically. Make sure that the correct tire set‐
tings have been made.
28
With tires that cannot be found in the tire pres‐ Adding engine oil
sure values on the Control Display, reset the Tire
Pressure Monitor TPM.
Checking the tire pressure

Regularly check the tire inflation pressure and
correct it as needed:
▷ At least twice a month.
▷ Before embarking on an extended trip.
Cleaning the wheels Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐
The friction during hard braking may produce played in the instrument cluster.
brake dust and make the rims dirty. Brake dust Observe the quantity to be added in the mes‐
can be removed by cleaning the rims. BMW rec‐ sage.
ommends using vehicle care and cleaning prod‐
ucts from BMW. Take care not to add too much engine oil.
Observe recommended engine oil types.
Electronic oil measurement
Functional requirements Providing assistance

A current measured value is available after ap‐
prox. 30 minutes of normal driving. Hazard warning flashers
Displaying the engine oil level

1. "CAR"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
Different messages appear on the Control Dis‐
play depending on the engine oil level. Pay atten‐
tion to these messages.
The button is located in the center console.
Adding engine oil
General information Breakdown Assistance

Safely park the vehicle and switch off drive-ready
state before adding engine oil. BMW Roadside Assistance
1. "APPS"
2. "Installed apps"
3. "BMW Assist"
4. If necessary, "BMW Roadside Assistance"
A voice connection is established.
29
ConnectedDrive
Concierge service
The BMW Assist Concierge service offers infor‐
mation on events, filling stations or hotels, and
provides phone numbers and addresses. Many
hotels can be booked directly by the BMW Con‐
cierge service. The Concierge service is part of
the optional BMW Assist Response Center.
1. "COM"
2. "BMW Assist"
3. If necessary, select the entry for the Con‐
cierge Service.
A voice connection to the Concierge service is
established.
Teleservices
Teleservices are services that help to maintain
vehicle mobility.
Teleservices can comprise the following serv‐
ices:
▷ BMW Roadside Assistance.
▷ BMW Accident Assistance.
▷ Teleservice Call.
▷ Teleservice Report.
▷ Teleservice Battery Guard.
▷ Your dealer’s service center.
30
31
CONTROLS Dashboard
Dashboard
Vehicle features and not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
options also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
cific and optional features offered with the series. served.
In the vicinity of the steering wheel
1 Safety switch 102 Unlocking 91
2 Power windows 102 Locking 91
3 Exterior mirror adjustment button 113 5 Memory function 116

4 Central locking system
6 Lights
32
Dashboard CONTROLS
Front fog lights 168 Manual Speed Limiter 194
Light switch 163 Depending on the equipment:

Cruise control on/off 196
Lights off
Daytime driving lights 165
Parking lights 164 Depending on the equipment:
Active Cruise Control on/off 198
Automatic headlight control 163 Cruise control: to store the speed
Adaptive light functions 165 Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug‐
Automatic High Beam Assis‐ gested speed 205
tant 166 Pausing cruise control
Low beams 164
Continuing cruise control

Instrument lighting 168
Active Cruise Control: increase dis‐

Right roadside parking light 164 tance
Active Cruise Control: reduce dis‐

Left roadside parking light 164 tance
Cruise control rocker switch

7 Steering column stalk, left 10 Instrument cluster 142
Turn signal 132 11 Steering wheel buttons, right
Selection lists 157
High beams, headlight flasher 132
Volume, see Owner's Manual for

Automatic High Beam Assis‐ Navigation, Entertainment and
tant 166 Communication 6
Voice control 51
Instrument cluster with enhanced
features: widgets 143
Instrument cluster without en‐ Changing the station/track, see
hanced features: widgets 144 Owner's Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment, Communication 6
Trip data 158
Telephone, see Owner's Manual
8 Shift paddle 135 for Navigation, Entertainment and
9 Steering wheel buttons, left Communication 6
Thumbwheel for selection lists 157
33
CONTROLS Dashboard
12 Steering column stalk, right 14 Steering wheel heating 115

Wipers 133
15 Adjusting the steering wheel 115

Rain sensor 133 16 Unlocking the hood 300
Cleaning the windshield and head‐

17 Opening the trunk lid 96
lights 134
13 Horn, entire surface

18 Glove compartment 247
In the vicinity of the center console
1 Control Display 46 5 Automatic climate control 228

2 Hazard warning system 315 6 Radio/multimedia, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment, and Communica‐
tion 6
Intelligent Safety 174
7 Controller with buttons 47
3 Ventilation 232
4 Glove compartment 246
34
Dashboard CONTROLS
8 Parking brake 129 10 Turning drive readiness state on/

off 124
Automatic Hold 129 11 Auto Start/Stop function 124
9 Driving Dynamics Control 127 Parking assistance systems 206

SPORT driving mode
COMFORT driving mode DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 190
ECO PRO driving mode 12 Steptronic transmission: selector lever 135
In the vicinity of the headliner
1 Operating the electric glass sun‐ 3 Reading lights 168

roof 103
2 Indicator light, front passenger air‐ 4 Interior lighting 168

bag 173
35
CONTROLS Dashboard
5 Emergency Call, SOS 317
36
Sensors of the vehicle CONTROLS
Sensors of the vehicle

Vehicle features and Cameras
options
Cameras behind the windshield
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
served.
The cameras are located in the area of the inte‐

Overview rior mirror.
Depending on the equipment, the following cam‐ Rearview camera

eras and sensors are installed in the vehicle:
▷ Cameras behind the windshield.
▷ Rearview camera.
▷ Front radar sensor.
▷ Radar sensors, side, rear.
▷ Ultrasound sensors in the front/rear bumpers.
▷ Ultrasonic sensors, side.
Keep the vehicle cameras and sensors, as well
as surrounding areas, clean and unobstructed. The camera is located in the handle of the trunk
lid.
System limits of the cameras

The cameras may not be fully functional and may
provide incorrect information in the following sit‐
uations:
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ On steep hills, in steep depressions or in tight
curves.
▷ When the camera field of view is covered, for
instance by a fogged up windshield or labels.
37
CONTROLS Sensors of the vehicle
▷ If the camera lens is dirty or damaged. System limits of the radar

▷ When driving toward bright lights or strong sensors
reflections, e.g., because of a setting sun. The radar sensors may not be fully functional or
▷ When it is dark outside. may not be available in the following situations:
▷ Camera behind the windshield: if the camera ▷ If sensors are dirty, such as due to icing.
has overheated and been temporarily ▷ If sensors are covered, such as by labels,
switched off due to excessively high temper‐ films or a number plate baseplate.
atures.
▷ If the sensor is not aligned correctly, for in‐
▷ Camera behind the windshield: during cali‐ stance due to parking damage.
bration of the camera immediately after vehi‐
cle delivery. ▷ If the radiation range of the sensors is cov‐
ered, e.g., by protruding cargo.
If applicable, a Check Control message will be
displayed when the system limits are reached. ▷ When the field of view of the sensors is cov‐
ered, e.g., by garage walls, hedges, snow hills,
vehicles or trailers.
Radar sensors ▷ After improper paint work on the vehicle in
the area of the sensors.
Front radar sensor ▷ On steep hilltops or in sharp dips in the road.
If applicable, a Check Control message will be
displayed when the system limits are reached.
Ultrasound sensors
Ultrasound sensors in the front/
rear bumpers
The ultrasound sensors of the
The radar sensor is located in the front bumper. Park Distance Control PDC are lo‐
cated in the bumpers.
Radar sensors, side, rear
The radar sensors are located in the bumper.
38
Sensors of the vehicle CONTROLS
Ultrasonic sensors, side ▷ With objects with corners, edges, and

smooth surfaces.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
▷ With small and low objects, for instance
boxes.
▷ With soft obstacles or obstacles covered in
foam material.
▷ With plants and bushes.
The ultrasound sensors of the Automatic Parking
Assistant are located on the side of the vehicle. ▷ In automatic car washes.
▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed bumps.
▷ Due to heavy exhaust.
System limits of the ultrasonic
sensors ▷ Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter of
the vehicle is not taken into account by the
The detection of objects with ultrasonic meas‐ ultrasonic sensors.
urements can run into physical limits, e.g., in the
following situations: If applicable, a Check Control message will be
displayed when the system limits are reached.
▷ In case of dirty sensors.
▷ In case of covered sensors, such as due to la‐
bels.
▷ If the sensor is not aligned correctly, for in‐
stance due to parking damage.
▷ After improper paint work on the vehicle in
the area of the sensors.
▷ For small children and animals.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, for instance
jacket.
▷ In case of external interference of the ultra‐
sound, for instance from passing vehicles,
loud machines or other ultrasonic sources.
▷ Under certain weather conditions, e.g., high
relative atmospheric humidity, wet conditions,
snowfall, cold, extreme heat, or strong wind.
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
vehicles.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges.
39
CONTROLS Operating state of the vehicle
Operating state of the vehicle

Vehicle features and Safety information
options
Warning
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
cific and optional features offered with the series. possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
It also describes features and functions that are Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due ing.
to the selected options or country versions. This In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ against rolling away, follow the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
served. ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
General information ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
Depending on the situation, the vehicle is in one wheel chock.
of the three states:
▷ Idle state.
▷ Standby state. Warning
▷ Drive-ready state. Unattended children or animals in the vehicle

can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the
Idle state following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
Principle ▷ Releasing the parking brake.
When the vehicle is in idle state, it is switched ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
off. dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
General information ▷ Using vehicle equipment.
The vehicle is in idle state prior to opening from There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
the outside and after exiting and locking. leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐
ing and lock the vehicle.
Automatic idle state

For instance, the idle state is automatically es‐
tablished under the following conditions:
40
Operating state of the vehicle CONTROLS
▷ After several minutes, if no operation takes Display in the instrument cluster

place on the vehicle.
OFF is displayed in the instru‐
▷ If the charge state of the vehicle battery is ment cluster. The drivetrain is
low. switched off and standby state
▷ Depending on the setting via iDrive: when switched on.
one or both front doors are opened after driv‐
ing when exiting the vehicle.
In some situations, the idle state is not set auto‐
matically, for instance during a phone call or Drive readiness
when the low beams are switched on.
Principle
Establishing idle state when Turning on drive-ready state corresponds to
opening the front doors starting the engine.
After a trip, the sleep mode can be established
by opening the front doors. For this purpose, the General information
driver and front passenger must exit the vehicle. Some functions, such as DSC Dynamic Stability
1. "CAR" Control, can only be used with drive-ready state
switched on.
2. "Settings"
3. "Doors/ vehicle access"
Safety information
4. "Turn off vehicle after opening door"
DANGER
Manual idle state
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is in‐
To establish idle state in the vehicle after com‐
sufficient, harmful exhaust gases can enter into
pletion of trip:
the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollu‐
Press and hold the button on the tants which are colorless and odorless. In en‐
radio until the OFF indicator on closed areas, exhaust gases can also accumu‐
the instrument cluster goes out. late outside of the vehicle. There is danger to
life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure suf‐
ficient ventilation.
Standby state Warning

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
Principle possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
When standby state is switched on, most func‐ Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐
tions can be used while the vehicle is stationary. ing.
Desired settings can be adjusted. In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
General information
The vehicle is in the standby state after the front
doors are opened from the outside.
41
CONTROLS Operating state of the vehicle
▷ Set the parking brake. Additional information:

▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, Instrument cluster with enhanced features:
turn the front wheels in the direction of the Power gauge, refer to page 151.
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, Display in the instrument cluster
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
The activated drive readiness is indicated in the
wheel chock.
instrument cluster, depending on the equipment,
by the display of information required for driving
or the READY display.
NOTICE
Repeated attempts to start the vehicle or re‐ Turning off drive-ready state
peated starting of the vehicle in rapid succes‐
sion can cause the starter to overheat. This
also results in unburned or inadequately burned
fuel, and can cause the catalytic converter to 1. Engage selector lever position P with the ve‐
overheat. There is a risk of damage to property, hicle stopped.
among other potential damage. Avoid repeated 2. Press the Start/Stop button.
starting of the vehicle, particularly repeated The engine is switched off. The vehicle
starting in rapid succession. switches into standby state.
Turning on drive readiness
Principle
Drive-ready state is switched on
via the Start/Stop button.
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The ignition is activated automatically for a brief
time and is stopped as soon as the engine starts.
Most of the indicator/warning lights in the instru‐
ment cluster light up for a varied length of time.
Gasoline engine
Depending on the motorization, the full drive
power may not be available for approximately
30 seconds after starting the engine. In this case,
the vehicle will not accelerate as usual.
42
iDrive CONTROLS
iDrive
Vehicle features and systems and devices while the vehicle is sta‐
tionary.
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ Input and display
It also describes features and functions that are Main menu
to the selected options or country versions. This General information
The main menu is divided into two areas. The
left area contains menu items that can be used
to call up all the iDrive functions. The right area
served.
contains widgets that provide quick access to
certain functions.
Operating concept
Principle
iDrive is the operating concept of the infotain‐
ment system and includes a large number of
functions.
General information
These functions can be operated as follows:
Media/Radio
▷ Via the Controller.
All functions of the entertainment system,
▷ Via the touchscreen.
e.g., radio stations or connection with external
▷ Via the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant. devices.
▷ Depending on the equipment: with the ges‐
ture control. Communication
Phone and message functions, e-mail and
Safety information calendar, and also the connection and manage‐
ment of mobile devices, such as smartphones.
Warning
Navigation
Operating the integrated information systems
Access to the navigation system, destination
and communication devices while driving can
input and traffic bulletins. Configurable map
distract from traffic. It is possible to lose control
views and other functions, such as points of in‐
of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Only
terest and areas to be avoided.
use the systems or devices when the traffic sit‐
uation allows. As warranted, stop and use the
43
CONTROLS iDrive
My Car ▷ Only those letters and numbers are offered

Information about vehicle status and trips. during entry for which data is available.
Access to the Integrated Owner's Manual and ▷ Destination search: place names can be en‐
also administration of driver profiles and range of tered in all languages that are available in
adjustments for vehicle and iDrive. iDrive.
Apps Activating/deactivating the

Management of apps, access to apps and ve‐ functions
hicle functions. Additional apps and vehicle func‐ Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
tions can be purchased from the BMW Store. box. The checkbox indicates whether the func‐
tion is activated or deactivated. Selecting the
Widgets menu item activates or deactivates the function.
Widgets provide quick access to fre‐ Function is activated.
quently used functions. The configured widgets
Function is deactivated.
display dynamic contents such as the navigation
map, and serve as interfaces at the same time.
Status information
Letters and numbers General information
Letters and numbers can be selected when mak‐
The status field can be found in the upper area of
ing the destination input, for example.
the Control Display. Status information is dis‐
Letters and numbers can be entered using the played in the form of symbols.
Controller, the touchpad, touchscreen or voice
control. The keyboard's display changes auto‐ Radio symbols
matically.
Icon Function Icon Meaning
Change between capital and HD Radio station is being received.

lower-case letters. Satellite radio is switched on.
Enter a blank space.
Telephone symbols
Switching between languages.
Use voice control. Icon Meaning
Confirm entry. Incoming or outgoing call.
Slide the input area to the left or Missed call.

right.
Signal strength of mobile phone net‐
work.
Entry comparison
Network search.
When entering names and addresses, the choice
is narrowed down with every letter and number Mobile phone network is not available.
and added automatically as needed.
The critical charge state of the mobile
Entries are continuously compared with data phone has been reached.
stored in the vehicle.
44
iDrive CONTROLS
Icon Meaning Icon Meaning
Roaming is active. Stop.
Locating is active. Data protection.
SMS text message received. Destination guidance active.
Message received. Passengers on board.
Reminder. Do not disturb.
Sending not possible.

Programmable memory buttons
Entertainment symbols
General information
Icon Meaning The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
Bluetooth audio. rectly, for instance radio stations, navigation des‐
USB device. tinations, phone numbers and menu entries.
Connected Music. Overview

WLAN.
Apple CarPlay.
Android Auto.
Other symbols
Icon Meaning
Check Control message.

Programmable memory buttons
Sound output active.
Sound output deactivated.

Storing a function
Voice activation system active. A function can be stored on a programmable
Request for the current vehicle posi‐ memory button. A button with a stored function
tion. can be overwritten with another function.
Checking the current vehicle position. 1. Select function via iDrive, for instance radio
station.
Driver profile.
Notifications. 2. Press and hold the desired button

until the displayed bar on the Control Display
Service notifications. has loaded completely.
Information.
45
CONTROLS iDrive
Executing a function Control Display

Press the button.
Safety information
The function will work immediately. This means,
for instance that the number is dialed when a NOTICE
phone number is selected. Objects in the area in the front of the Control
Display can shift and damage the Control Dis‐
Displaying the key assignment play. There is a risk of damage to property,
Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear gloves or among other potential damage. Do not place
use objects. objects in the area in front of the Control Dis‐
The assignment of the buttons is displayed in play.
the upper area of the Control Display.
Switching on/off automatically

Deleting all button assignments
The Control Display is turned on automatically
All button assignments can be deleted.
when the vehicle is unlocked or as soon as the
1. Press and hold buttons 1 and 8 at the same control display is needed for operation.
time. In certain situations, the Control Display is
2. "OK" switched off automatically, for instance if no op‐
eration is performed on the vehicle for several
minutes.
Control Display and
Controller Switching on/off manually
The Control Display can also be switched off
manually.
Principle
The iDrive functions are displayed on the Control 1. Tip the Controller up.
Display. The Control Display can be operated us‐ 2. "Screen off"
ing the Controller, touchpad, and touchscreen. Press the Controller or any button on the Con‐
troller to switch it back on again.
Overview
System limits
In the case of very high temperatures on the
Control Display, for instance due to intense solar
radiation, the brightness may be reduced down
to complete deactivation. Once the temperature
is reduced, for instance through shade or air con‐
ditioning, the normal functions are restored.
1 Control Display with touchscreen

2 Controller with buttons and touchpad
46
iDrive CONTROLS
Controller Buttons on the Controller
General information Button Function

The buttons can be used to open the menus di‐ Go to the main menu.
rectly. The Controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the settings.
Go to Apps menu.
Some iDrive functions can be operated using the
touchpad on the Controller.
Go to the Media/Radio menu.
Operation
▷ Turn to switch between menu items, for ex‐ Go to the Communication menu.
ample.
Go to navigation map.
Go to destination input menu for navi‐

gation.
Go to the previous display.
Go to the Options menu.
▷ Press to select a menu item, for example.

Operating via the
Controller
Opening the main menu
Press the button.
▷ Tilt in four directions to switch between dis‐

plays, for example.
The main menu is displayed.
47
CONTROLS iDrive
Selecting a menu Adjusting contents

Depending on the equipment, the contents of
Selecting menu items menus "MEDIA", "COM" and "NAV" can be ad‐
1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu justed, for instance to remove the entries of
item is highlighted. functions that are not used from the menu.
2. Press the Controller. 1. Select the menu.
2. "Personalize menu"
Select a widget
3. Select the desired setting.
1. Move the Controller in the main menu to the
right.
Changing between displays
2. Turn the Controller until the desired widget is
After a menu item is selected, for instance
selected.
"Settings", a new display appears.
3. Press the Controller.
▷ Tilt the Controller to the left.
It is also possible to select widgets in the instru‐
The current display closes and the previous
ment cluster.
display is shown.
Adjusting the menu ▷ Press the button.

The previous display re-opens.
Adjusting widgets
▷ Tilt the Controller to the right.
The widgets can be adjusted in the main menu.
It is possible to create multiple pages with widg‐ The new display opens.
ets and switch between pages. The adjustments An arrow indicates that additional displays can be
can only be performed when the vehicle is sta‐ opened.
tionary.
1. Select the desired page in the main menu. Going to the Options menu
Only the currently selected page can be ad‐ Press the button.
justed.
2. Tip the Controller up. The "Options" menu is displayed.
3. "Adjust main menu" The menu consists of various areas, for instance:
4. Select the desired adjustment: ▷ "MEDIA": control options for the selected
▷ Symbol and select desired widget: add main menu.
new widget. ▷ "Help": help for the selected menu.
The requested widget will be inserted in ▷ "Control display off": system settings.
the relevant position. A maximum of four
widgets can be displayed per page. Entering letters and numbers
▷ Select icon: delete selected widget.
▷ Add new page: "Add page". Input
▷ Delete selected page: "Delete page". 1. Turn the Controller: select letter or number.
▷ Adjust the content of the widget: select 2. : confirm entry.
widget.
5. "Done"
48
iDrive CONTROLS
Deleting Entering special characters

Icon Function Input Operation
Press the Controller: delete letter or Delete a charac‐ Swipe to the left on the
number. ter. touchpad.
Hold the Controller down: delete all let‐ Enter a blank Swipe to the right in the
ters or numbers. space. center of the touchpad.
Enter a hyphen. Swipe to the right in the up‐

Using alphabetical lists per area of the touchpad.
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries,
Enter an under‐ Swipe to the right in the
the letters for which an entry exists can be dis‐
score. lower area of the touchpad.
played in a text box.
1. Turn the Controller to the left or right quickly.

Using the map
2. Select the first letter of the desired entry.
The map in the navigation system can be moved
The first entry of the selected letter is dis‐ via the touchpad.
played in the list.
Function Operation
Move map. Swipe in the appropriate di‐

Operation via touchpad rection.
Enlarge/shrink Drag in or out on the touch‐

General information map. pad with fingers.
Some iDrive functions can be operated using the
touchpad on the Controller. Display menu. Tap once.
Selecting functions Using alphabetical lists

1. "CAR" Alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries per‐
2. "Settings" mit a direct jump to letters for which an entry ex‐
ists.
3. "General settings"
Enter the first letter on the touchpad.
4. "Touchpad"
The first entry of the entered letter is displayed in
the list.
Entering letters and numbers

▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on the Operation via touchscreen
Control Display.
▷ Always enter associated characters, such as General information
accents or periods so that the letter can be
The Control Display is equipped with a touch‐
clearly recognized.
screen.
▷ The set language determines what input is
You can tap on menu items and widgets. Touch
possible. Where necessary, enter special
the touchscreen with your fingers. Do not use
characters via the Controller.
any objects.
49
CONTROLS iDrive
Opening the main menu ▷ To show the display bar, pull down the dis‐
play bar at the top edge of the screen.
Tap on the icon.
▷ To hide the display bar, pull up the display bar
at the top edge of the screen.
Changing between displays

After a menu item is selected, a new display
opens.
An arrow indicates that additional displays can be
opened.
▷ Swipe to the left.
The main menu is displayed. ▷ Tap arrow.
The new display opens.
Adjusting widgets
The widgets can be adjusted in the main menu. Entering letters and numbers
It is possible to create multiple pages with widg‐
ets and switch between pages. The adjustments Input
can only be performed when the vehicle is sta‐
tionary. 1. Depending on the equipment version, tap
the icon on the touchscreen or a key‐
1. Select the desired page in the main menu. board is displayed on the Control Display
Only the currently selected page can be ad‐ when the touchscreen is approached.
justed. 2. Enter desired letters and numbers.
2. Tap the icon in the main menu.
3. Select the desired adjustment: Deleting
▷ Tap icon and select desired widget:
add new widget. Icon Function
The requested widget will be inserted in Tapping the icon: deletes the letter or
the relevant position. A maximum of four number.
widgets can be displayed per page.
Tapping and holding the icon all letters:
▷ Tap icon: delete selected widget. deletes all letters or numbers.
▷ Add new page: tap "Add page".
▷ Delete selected page: tap "Delete page". Using the map
▷ Adjust content of the widget: tap center of The navigation map can be moved using the
widget. touchscreen.
4. Tap "Done".
Showing/hiding the display bar

In the upper area of the Control Display, it is pos‐
sible to show or hide a display bar with additional
functions.
50
iDrive CONTROLS
Function Operation Functional requirements

▷ A language that is supported by the Personal
Move map. Swipe in the appropriate di‐
Assistant must be set via iDrive.
rection.
Setting the system language, refer to
Enlarge/shrink Drag in or out with the fin‐ page 63.
map. gers.
▷ Always say commands in the configured sys‐
Display menu. Tap once. tem language.
Enter the following settings to access the full
Using alphabetical lists range of functions:
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries, ▷ "Online speech processing" is activated.
the letters for which an entry exists can be dis‐ ▷ All settings under "BMW ConnectedDrive"
played in a text box. activated.
1. Tap the letter in front of the list. ▷ Activation word is activated.
A letter box is displayed. ▷ The Driver profile is activated.
2. Tap the first letter of the desired entry. ▷ "Synchronize driver profile" under
"Personalization" is activated.
▷ Relevant ConnectedDrive Services pur‐
BMW Intelligent Personal chased from the ConnectedDrive Store.
Assistant
Activating the voice control
Principle system
The BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is a per‐
General information
sonal assistant that enables natural voice opera‐
tion of various vehicle functions. The Personal There are various methods for activating the
Assistant simplifies the operation of the vehicle voice control feature:
with the automation of processes and habits.
▷ Press the button on the steering
wheel.
General information
The microphone on the driver's side is active.
▷ BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is availa‐
ble depending on the national-market ver‐ ▷ Say the wake word ›Hello BMW‹ or a personal
sion. wake word.
▷ The system includes special microphones on The microphones on the driver's or front pas‐
the driver side and the front passenger side. senger's side are active with the following
voice control, depending on where the activa‐
▷ Say commands at a normal volume. Speaking
tion word was spoken.
directly into the microphone does not im‐
prove the speech recognition. Then say the command. The activation word and
the command can be spoken without pause in
▷ Say the commands and numbers fluently as
one sentence. No other commands may be avail‐
well as with normal volume, emphasis, and
able. In this case, operate the function via iDrive.
speed.
▷ ›...‹ identifies commands that can be spoken.
51
CONTROLS iDrive
Button on the steering wheel Activation word from third-party providers

Depending on the national-market version, some
1. Press the button on the steering third-party providers provide digital voice assis‐
wheel briefly. tants, e.g., Siri, Amazon Alexa or Google Assis‐
2. Say the command. tant.
Supported voice assistants can be used with a
Wake word connected smartphone in the vehicle. In addition
to the preset or personal activation word, the ac‐
General information tivation word from connected third-party provid‐
Speaking the wake word ›Hello BMW‹ or the per‐ ers can be used.
sonal wake word will start the system. 1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Preset wake word
The preset wake word ›Hello BMW‹ can be acti‐
vated and deactivated. 4. If necessary, "Personal assistant"
5. "Voice control"
1. "CAR"
6. "Third-party providers"
2. "Settings"
4. If necessary, "Personal assistant"
Ending voice control
5. "Voice control"
6. "Wake word" ▷ Press the button on the steering
7. "Wake word" wheel again.
▷ ›Cancel‹
Personal wake word ▷ Tilt the Controller to the right or left.
In addition to a preset activation word ›Hello ▷ Press the Controller.
BMW‹, a personal activation word can be set up
in the active driver profile. The personal activa‐
Possible commands
tion word can also be changed or deleted.
The activation word should consist of multiple General information
syllables to ensure good recognition. An addition,
Most contents on the Control Display can be
such as ›Hello‹ is not necessary.
spoken as commands, e.g. menu items or list en‐
1. "CAR" tries. Say list entries as shown.
2. "Settings" Instructions can be issued or questions can be
3. "General settings" asked where the Personal Assistant provides
support.
5. "Voice control"
6. "Wake word"
7. "Personal wake word"
8. "Set wake word"
52
iDrive CONTROLS
Function examples The voice control system and the feedback it

provides does not replace the printed or
Vehicle status and vehicle information Integrated Owner's Manual. The speech recog‐
▷ ›Is my tire pressure still OK?‹ nition and quality of the feedback may vary.
▷ ›Show me the sport displays.‹ ›How can the passenger airbag be deactivated‹
▷ ›Open Owner's Manual.‹ The Personal Assistant returns feedback. When

stationary, the section of the integrated Owner's
Navigation Manual is displayed on the Control Display.
▷ ›Drive me to 300 Chestnut Ridge Road, Menu items

Woodcliff Lake in New Jersey.‹
The commands of the menu items are spoken
▷ ›Take me home.‹ just as they are selected via the Controller.
▷ ›Are there any traffic messages?‹
1. Activating the voice control system.
Communication 2. ›MEDIA‹
For example, when a mobile phone is connected, 3. ›Presets‹
calls can be started or SMS can be sent. The stored stations are displayed on the Control
▷ ›Call John Doe on cell phone.‹ Display.
▷ ›Dial the number 1 8 0 0 8 3 1 1 1 1 7.‹
Help for voice control
▷ ›New text message to John Doe: I'll be right
there.‹ ▷ ›Voice commands‹: to have the available spo‐
ken commands announced.
Entertainment ▷ ›General information on voice control‹: have
▷ ›What song is this?‹ information on the operating principle of the
voice control announced.
▷ ›Play Blue Suede Shoes by Elvis Presley‹
▷ ›Help‹: have help for the current menu read
▷ ›Next title.‹ out loud.
Climate control
Settings
▷ ›Turn off the air conditioning.‹
▷ ›Activate fresh air.‹ Setting the voice control
▷ ›I'm cold.‹ You can set the system to use standard dialog or
a short version.
Windows and light The short version of the voice control plays back
▷ ›Open the windows automatically.‹ short messages in abbreviated form.
▷ ›Delete activation point for automatic power 1. "CAR"
window.‹
2. "Settings"
▷ ›Ambient lighting.‹
Owner's Manual via voice operation 4. If necessary, "Personal assistant"
You can ask simple questions about vehicle 5. "Voice control"
functions and the operation of the vehicle.
53
CONTROLS iDrive
6. "Response length" The device must be connected via Apple Car‐

7. Select the desired setting. Play or Android Auto.
Speaking during voice output 1. Press and hold the button on the
It is possible to answer during inquiries of the steering wheel for approx. 3 seconds.
voice activation system. The function can be de‐ The voice activation of the smartphone is ac‐
activated if inquiries are often undesirably inter‐ tivated.
rupted, for instance due to background noise or
conversations in the vehicle. 2. Release the button.
1. "CAR" If activation is successful, a confirmation ap‐
pears on the Control Display.
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings" Automating routines
5. "Voice control" General information
6. "Speaking during voice output" The Personal Assistant can automate routines,
for instance the automatic activation of the seat
Online speech processing heating from a specific outside temperature.
Rules are created for this purpose, which can be
Online voice processing improves the quality of
activated and deactivated at any time.
the speech recognition and search results for
points of interest. To use the functions, data is
transmitted to a service provider via an encrypted Activate/deactivate
connection and stored locally there. 1. "APPS"
1. "CAR" 2. "Installed apps"
2. "Settings" 3. "Personal assistant"
3. "General settings" 4. "Automate habits"
4. If necessary, "Personal assistant" 5. Select the desired setting.
5. "Voice control"
Caring Car
6. "Online speech processing"
Principle
Adjusting the volume
Different vehicle functions in the car's interior are
Turn the volume button during the voice guid‐ harmonized for the driver in a short-term pro‐
ance until the desired volume is set. gram.
The volume remains constant even if the volume
of other audio sources is changed. General information
By selecting a program, the interior lighting, cli‐
Using the voice activation of the mate control and music selection will be ad‐
smartphone justed. A program takes 3 minutes.
Depending on the device, a smartphone con‐
nected to the vehicle can be used via voice con‐
trol.
54
iDrive CONTROLS
Activate/deactivate Overview
1. "CAR"
2. "Caring Car"
3. Select the desired program.
The program can be stopped prematurely:
"End program"
Adjusting a program
1. "CAR"
2. "Caring Car" The camera in the headliner detects gestures
3. Select the desired program. that are carried out in the area of the center con‐
sole at the height of the Control Display.
4. "Music settings"
5. Select the desired setting. Activate/deactivate
1. "CAR"
System limits
2. "Settings"
▷ The Personal Assistant provides information
about vehicle functions that may not be in‐ 3. "General settings"
stalled in the vehicle. 4. "Gesture control"
This also applies to safety-related functions 5. "Gesture control"
and systems.
▷ Certain noises can be detected and may lead Settings
to problems. Keep the doors, windows, and 1. "CAR"
glass sunroof closed. 2. "Settings"
▷ Noises from the front passenger or the occu‐ 3. "General settings"
pants can impair the system. Avoid making
other noise in the vehicle while speaking. 4. "Gesture control"
▷ Major language dialects can cause problems 5. Select the desired setting.
with the speech recognition feature.
▷ A poor data connection influences the re‐
Carrying out gestures
sponse time of the Personal Assistant and ▷ Perform gestures underneath the interior mir‐
the Search. ror and next to the steering wheel.
▷ Execute gestures clearly.
▷ The gestures can also be executed from the
BMW Gesture Control front-passenger side.
Principle
Several iDrive functions can be operated by hand
motion using BMW Gesture Control.
55
CONTROLS iDrive
Possible gestures
Gesture Operation Function
Move index finger forward and backward in the direc‐ Accept call.
tion of the screen. Select a highlighted entry in a
list during voice control.
Confirm pop-up.
Move hand across the width of the Control Display in Reject call.
the direction of the front-passenger side. Close pop-up.
End voice control.
Slowly move hand clockwise in a circular pattern with Increase the volume.
the index finger stretched out forward.
Gesture is detected after one circular motion.
Slowly move forearm counterclockwise in a circular Reduce the volume.

pattern with the index finger stretched out forward.
Gesture is detected after one circular motion.
Move stretched out index and middle finger forward. Individually assignable ges‐
ture.
Move fist with thumb extended to the left back and Reverse Skip function.
forth. The previous title is played.
56
iDrive CONTROLS
Gesture Operation Function
Move fist with thumb extended to right left back and Forward Skip function.
forth. The next title is played.
Stretch out five fingers, form a fist and stretch five fin‐ Individually assignable ges‐
gers out again. ture.
Assigning gesture individually ▷ The gesture is executed outside of the de‐

tection range.
General information ▷ Wearing of gloves or jewelry.
Two gestures can be assigned individually and ▷ Smoking in the car's interior.
can be configured for certain functions, such as:
▷ Destination guidance to home address.
▷ Mute/Playback
▷ Control Display on/off
Select function
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
4. "Gesture control"
5. "Function assignment gesture 1" or
"Function assignment gesture 2"
System limits
Gesture recognition by the camera in the head‐
liner can be disturbed by the following circum‐
stances:
▷ The camera lens is covered.
▷ Objects are located on the interior mirror.
▷ The camera lens is dirty, clean camera lens.
Sensors and camera lenses, refer to
page 326.
57
CONTROLS BMW Remote Software Upgrade
BMW Remote Software Upgrade

Vehicle features and ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
options ▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
cific and optional features offered with the series. There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
It also describes features and functions that are leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐
to the selected options or country versions. This ing and lock the vehicle.
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ Functional requirement
served. ▷ Active ConnectedDrive contract.
▷ The integrated SIM card in the vehicle has
been activated.
BMW Remote Software
▷ Cellular network reception.
Upgrade ▷ A consent for the transmission of the corre‐
sponding data was given in the Data Protec‐
Principle tion menu.
Remote Software Upgrade can be used to up‐
date the entire software of the vehicle. This Search for an upgrade
makes new functions, functional enhancements Standby must be turned on to search for a soft‐
or quality improvements available. ware upgrade.
General information Automatic search

BMW recommends performing the Remote The vehicle regularly searches for updates in the
Software Upgrade as soon as it becomes availa‐ background.
ble.
Manual search
Safety information 1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Warning 3. "General settings"
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle 4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
5. "Search for upgrades"
following actions: 6. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
play.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
58
BMW Remote Software Upgrade CONTROLS
Download of an upgrade successfully, the information about the version

can be displayed on the Control Display.
Automatic download This information is also available in the Connec‐
The available data for Remote Software Upgrade tedDrive customer portal.
is automatically loaded into the vehicle. The
download does not require an approval. Displaying information
Display in the vehicle:
Via BMW app
1. "CAR"
If an upgrade is available, information about the
2. "Settings"
new software version is displayed in the BMW
app. 3. "General settings"
The data for the upgrade can then be down‐ 4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
loaded to a mobile device, for instance via an ex‐ 5. "Info about version"
isting WLAN connection. Display in the ConnectedDrive customer portal:
The data can then be transmitted from the mo‐ www.bmw-connecteddrive.com.
bile device to the vehicle.
This transmission method accelerates the down‐ Installing the upgrade
load of the data, for instance in areas with limited
mobile network availability. General information
1. Download the upgrade in the BMW app to ▷ The installation of the upgrade may result in a
the smartphone. deletion of software changes such as per‐
2. Follow the instructions in the BMW app. formance increases that have not been instal‐
led by the manufacturer of the vehicle.
3. Establish connection to the vehicle.
▷ The installation may take approx. 20 minutes.
▷ iOS: connect Bluetooth audio and WLAN.
▷ The installation cannot be terminated.
▷ Android: connect WLAN.
▷ The vehicle cannot be used during the instal‐
The data transfer of the upgrade from the
lation.
mobile device to the vehicle occurs in the
background only while driving. ▷ The vehicle can be exited during the installa‐
tion.
4. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
play. ▷ The installation does not occur until the con‐
sent was given.
Connecting mobile devices to the vehicle, refer Prerequisites for the installation
to page 71.
▷ The battery is sufficiently charged.
Information about the version ▷ The outside temperature is above
14 ℉/-10 ℃.
General information ▷ Vehicle is parked in a horizontal position.
The information about the version contains a de‐ ▷ Hazard warning system is switched off.
scription of the updates that are included in the ▷ Selector lever position P is engaged.
Remote Software Upgrade. During the download
and after the installation has been completed
59
CONTROLS BMW Remote Software Upgrade
▷ Engine is turned off and sufficiently cooled Functional limitations

down.
During the upgrade, the majority of functions is
▷ Automatic engine start for pre-conditioning is temporarily unavailable, for instance:
not activated via iDrive.
▷ Hazard warning system.
If applicable, follow the notes for further prerequi‐
▷ Central locking system and, if necessary,
sites on the control display.
Comfort Access.
If the prerequisites are not met, such as a suffi‐
▷ Parking lights.
cient vehicle battery charge state, the upgrade
will not be offered for installation. ▷ Horn.
Pay attention to an offer for installation, for in‐ ▷ Alarm system.

stance after extended driving. ▷ Emergency call.
▷ Power windows.
Preparing the vehicle ▷ Operation of the tailgate.
▷ Park the vehicle safely away from the public
▷ Glass sunroof.
road.
▷ Checking the fuel filler flap lock.
▷ Cellular network reception must be ensured
so that a fault message can be sent, for in‐ The driver's door can be locked and unlocked
stance if the installation is terminated. from the outside using the integrated key.
▷ Close the windows.

After successful upgrade
▷ Close the glass sunroof.
The vehicle can be used again immediately.
▷ Close the trunk lid.
Booked services, such as RTTI or Remote Serv‐
▷ Remove energy consuming devices, such as ices, will be reactivated automatically during the
a mobile phone. next trip.
▷ The vehicle key must be located in the vehi‐ After an extended stationary period, charge the
cle for the consent for installation. vehicle battery with an extended drive.
▷ Switch off the exterior lighting.
▷ Remove connected devices from the OBD Malfunction
socket. In the event of a malfunction, follow the instruc‐
tions on the control display or in the BMW app.
Starting installation If the malfunction cannot be remedied, contact a
The upgrade can be installed when all prerequi‐ dealer’s service center or another qualified serv‐
sites have been met. ice center or repair shop.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Validity of the Owner's Manual
3. "General settings" Production of the vehicle
4. "Remote Software Upgrade" At the time of production at the plant, the printed
5. "Start upgrade now" Owner's Manual is the most current resource.
Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
play.
60
BMW Remote Software Upgrade CONTROLS
After a software update in the

vehicle
formation.
61
CONTROLS General settings
General settings
Vehicle features and Setting the time format
options 1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ 3. "General settings"
cific and optional features offered with the series. 4. "Date and time"
5. "Time format:"
to the selected options or country versions. This 6. Select the desired setting.
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ Automatic time setting
served.
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
the time, date and, if needed, the time zone are
Time updated automatically.
1. "CAR"
Setting the time zone 2. "Settings"
1. "CAR" 3. "General settings"
2. "Settings" 4. "Date and time"
3. "General settings" 5. "Automatic time setting"
4. "Date and time"
5. "Time zone:"
Date
Setting the time Setting the date

1. "CAR" 1. "CAR"
2. "Settings" 2. "Settings"
3. "General settings" 3. "General settings"
4. "Date and time" 4. "Date and time"
5. "Time:" 5. "Date:"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired hours are 6. Turn the Controller until the desired day is
displayed. displayed.
7. Press the Controller. 7. Press the Controller.
8. Turn the Controller until the desired minutes 8. Make the settings for the month and year.
are displayed. 9. "OK"
9. "OK"
62
General settings CONTROLS
Setting the date format Resetting trip data

1. "CAR" 1. "CAR"
2. "Settings" 2. "Settings"
3. "General settings" 3. "General settings"
4. "Date and time" 4. "Reset trip data"
5. "Date format:" 5. Select the desired setting.
Speed warning
Language
Principle
Setting the system language The speed warning can be used to set a speed
1. "CAR" limit. A warning will be issued when this speed
limit is exceeded.
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings" General information
4. "Language" The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed ex‐
5. Select the desired setting. ceeds the set speed limit again, after it has drop‐
ped below it by 3 mph/5 km/h.
Setting the units of Adjusting

measurement 1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Depending on the country version, you can set
the units of measurement for some values, for in‐
stance consumption, distances, and tempera‐ 4. "Speed warning"
ture. 5. "Warning at:"
1. "CAR" 6. Turn the Controller until the desired speed is
displayed.
2. "Settings"
4. "Units"
Activate/deactivate
5. Select the desired menu item.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Trip data settings 4. "Speed warning"
5. "Speed warning"
Principle
The intervals in which the trip data will be reset
can be configured.
63
CONTROLS General settings
Accept current speed as the Reset vehicle data

speed warning
1. "CAR" All individual settings can be reset to the factory
settings when the drive-ready state is switched
2. "Settings"
off.
1. "CAR"
4. "Speed warning"
2. "Settings"
5. "Select current speed"
4. "Reset vehicle data"
Activating/deactivating 5. "Reset vehicle data"
pop-ups When the stored settings in a driver profile are
synchronized with the ConnectedDrive account,
For some functions, pop-ups are displayed auto‐ these settings will remain in the ConnectedDrive
matically on the Control Display. Some of these account.
pop-ups can be activated or deactivated.
1. "CAR"
Notifications
2. "Settings"
Principle
4. "Pop-ups"
The menu centrally displays all notifications arriv‐
5. Select the desired setting. ing in the vehicle in form of a list.
General information
Control Display
The following notifications can be displayed:
▷ Traffic messages.
Brightness
▷ Check Control messages.
1. "CAR"
▷ Messages on service notifications.
2. "Settings"
▷ Communication messages, for example e-
3. "Displays"
mails, SMS text messages or reminders.
4. "Control display"
▷ Messages, for instance from the BMW app.
5. "Brightness at night"
▷ Messages from the manufacturer of the vehi‐
6. Press the Controller. cle, for instance technical information or im‐
7. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐ portant customer information.
ness is set. The number of notifications is additionally dis‐
8. Press the Controller. played in the status field.
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐
ness settings may not be clearly visible. Go to notifications
1. Tip the Controller up.
2. "Notifications"
3. Select desired notification.
64
General settings CONTROLS
Delete notifications Condition Description

All notifications, except Check Control messages
"Do not Incoming calls and non-critical
or messages from the vehicle manufacturer, can
disturb" notifications are not displayed.
be deleted from the list.
Icon is shown in the status
Check Control messages or messages from the
information with the number of
vehicle manufacturer are displayed as long as
messages.
they are relevant.
"Passenger Private contents, such as mes‐
on board" sages, will not be displayed di‐
2. "Notifications" rectly.
3. Select desired notifications. Icon is shown in the status
information with the number of
4. Press the button. messages.
Activate/deactivate
Settings 1. Tip the Controller up.
It is possible to set which notifications are per‐ 2. "Notifications"
mitted and which notifications will be displayed at
the start of the trip and at the completion of the
trip. 4. "Notification display"
2. "Notifications"
4. "Settings"
Display, notifications
General information
The BMW Intelligent Personal Assistants allows
the configuration of the range of messages that
will be displayed. Depending on the situation, the
desired condition can be activated.
65
CONTROLS Personal settings
Personal settings
Vehicle features and Deleting personal data in the
vehicle
options
Principle
cific and optional features offered with the series. Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores per‐
It also describes features and functions that are sonal data, such as stored radio stations. This
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due personal data can be permanently deleted using
to the selected options or country versions. This iDrive.
tems. When using these functions and systems, General information
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ Depending on the equipment, the following data
served. is deleted:
▷ Driver profile settings.
Data protection ▷ Stored radio stations.
▷ Stored programmable memory buttons.
Data transmission ▷ Travel and trip computer information.
▷ Navigation, for instance stored destinations.
Principle ▷ Phone book.
The vehicle offers different services, whose use ▷ Online data, for instance Favorites, cookies.
requires a data transfer to BMW or a service pro‐
▷ Office data, for instance voice memos.
vider. The data transmission can be deactivated
for some services. ▷ Login accounts.
▷ Linking vehicle and ConnectedDrive account.
General information Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up
When the data transmission is deactivated, the to 15 minutes.
respective service cannot be used.
Only make these settings while stationary. Functional requirement
Data can only be deleted while stationary.
Settings
The data transfer can be configured in different Deleting data
stages or individually for separate services. The personal data in the vehicle will be deleted
when the vehicle is reset to the factory settings.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Reset vehicle data, refer to page 64.
4. "Data privacy"
66
Personal settings CONTROLS
Driver profiles This option is offered in new vehicle for a lim‐

ited period of time.
As soon as the engine is started or any button is
Principle pressed, the Welcome screen will be hidden.
Driver profiles can be created to store personal
vehicle settings. If the vehicle is used by multiple Setup assistant
drivers, each driver can create his personal driver
The setup assistant is offered in new vehicles for
profile. When a driver profile is selected, the vehi‐
a limited period of time on the Welcome screen
cle will automatically apply the stored settings in
to configure the most important settings for the
the driver profile.
vehicle.
General information "Getting started" Select to start the set-up assis‐

tant.
Three personal driver profiles can be created.
The set-up assistant can be started via iDrive at
In addition, a guest profile is available that can be any time.
selected by any driver. The guest profile is active
when a personal driver profile has not been se‐ 1. "CAR"
lected. 2. "Settings"
Changes to the vehicle settings are automatically 3. "General settings"
stored in the active driver profile or in the guest
4. "Getting started"
profile.
The driver is guided step by step through the fol‐
The vehicle can already adjust to the driver when
lowing functions:
it is unlocked. For this purpose, the recognition
via a vehicle key or a digital key must be as‐ ▷ Setting the system language.
signed to a driver profile. ▷ ConnectedDrive countries:
ConnectedDrive countries: The settings stored If the set-up assistant was opened in the
in the driver's profile can be synchronized with guest profile: create driver profile.
the personal BMW ConnectedDrive account. It is ▷ Pairing mobile devices with the vehicle.
thereby possible to use these settings in other
▷ If the set-up assistant was opened from an al‐
BMW vehicles as well.
ready defined driver profile: set up personal
assistant.
Functional requirements
▷ Depending on whether the set-up assistant
When a driver profile is created, switched or de‐ was opened from an already defined driver
leted, the vehicle must move at a maximum of profile or a guest profile: set up services or
walking speed. confirm the explanation for the transmission
of vehicle related data.
Welcome screen ▷ Set up other methods for use.
After the Control Display is switched on, the Wel‐
The selected settings are stored in the active
come screen will be displayed.
driver's profile.
The following actions can be carried out on the
Welcome screen: Guest profile
▷ Switching the driver profile. The guest profile can be activated by any driver.
▷ Starting the set-up assistant. Vehicle settings that are entered when the guest
profile is active will be stored in the guest profile.
67
In the following cases the guest profile is auto‐ Scanning the displayed QR code will accept
matically active: the access data for the ConnectedDrive ac‐
▷ A driver profile has not been created yet. count from the BMW app.
▷ No driver profile has been assigned to the ve‐ ▷ "Log in"

hicle key that was used to unlock the vehicle. The access data must be entered via iDrive.
▷ No driver profile has been assigned to the ▷ "New registration"
digital key that was used to unlock the vehi‐ Scan the displayed QR code and follow the
cle. instructions on the smartphone.
The following limitations apply:
▷ The guest profile cannot be renamed. Selecting recognition
▷ It is not possible to assign the recognition to 1. "CAR"
the guest profile. 2. "Driver profiles"
▷ It is not possible to assign a PIN to the guest 3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
profile.
As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile
▷ ConnectedDrive countries: It is not possible image can be tapped in the top status bar.
to synchronize with a ConnectedDrive ac‐
4. "Driver recognition"
count.
5. Select the desired setting:
The guest profile is selected on the Welcome
screen or via iDrive: ▷ "with vehicle key"
The vehicle key that is recognized in the
1. "CAR"
car's interior is assigned to the driver pro‐
2. "Driver profiles" file. If multiple vehicle keys are detected,
As an alternative for Steps 1 and 2, the profile the unintended vehicle keys must be re‐
image can be tapped in the top status bar. moved from the car’s interior.
3. "Guest" ▷ "With Digital Key"
4. "OK" The digital key that is recognized in the
car's interior is assigned to the driver pro‐
Creating a driver profile file. If multiple digital keys are detected,
the unintended digital keys must be re‐
1. "CAR"
moved from the car’s interior.
2. "Driver profiles"
6. "Activate linkage"
As soon as the vehicle detects the vehicle key or
As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile the digital key, the corresponding driver profile
image can be tapped in the top status bar. will be activated. If the vehicle key or the smart‐
4. "Add driver profile" phone with the digital key is not carried with you
Non-ConnectedDrive countries: A name must be or not recognized, the driver profile can only be
entered for the driver profile. selected on the Welcome screen when a PIN has
been set up.
ConnectedDrive countries: An existing Connec‐
tedDrive account must be assigned to a driver
profile. The following options are available for this
Setting up a PIN
purpose: A driver profile with recognition cannot be acti‐
vated without vehicle key and without digital key.
▷ "Via My BMW app"
68
Personal settings CONTROLS
In this case, a PIN can be set up to activate the The handed over vehicle key can then no longer
driver profile. be used to access the personal driver profile.
Countries in which ConnectedDrive is not availa‐
ble: If a PIN was not set up or the PIN is not Selecting a driver profile
known, the driver profile cannot be activated. Depending on the recognition setting, the driver
Countries in which ConnectedDrive is available: If profile will be selected automatically.
a PIN was not set up or the PIN is not known, the If the guest profile is active, the driver profile will
driver's profile can be activated with the access be selected on the Welcome screen or via iDrive.
data of the corresponding ConnectedDrive ac‐ A PIN may have to be entered.
count.
1. "CAR"
1. "CAR"
As an alternative for Steps 1 and 2, the profile
3. Tilt the Controller to the right. image can be tapped in the top status bar.
As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile 3. Select driver profile.
image can be tapped in the top status bar.
4. "OK"
4. "Driver recognition"
All settings stored in the selected driver profile
5. "using PIN" are automatically applied.
Changing/canceling the Switching synchronization with

recognition function the ConnectedDrive account
When another vehicle key or another digital key on/off
is assigned to a driver profile, the current assign‐ The settings stored in the driver's profile are
ment must be canceled first. synchronized with the personal ConnectedDrive
1. "CAR" account. This means that it is possible to use the
personal settings in other BMW vehicles with
ConnectedDrive access as well, if this function is
3. Tilt the Controller to the right. supported.
As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile The synchronization with the ConnectedDrive
image can be tapped in the top status bar. account is enabled when a driver profile is cre‐
4. "Driver recognition" ated or via iDrive:
5. Select the desired setting: 1. "CAR"
▷ "with vehicle key" 2. "Driver profiles"
▷ "With Digital Key" 3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
6. "Activate linkage" As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile
When the vehicle and vehicle key will be handed image can be tapped in the top status bar.
over, such as for maintenance, carry out the fol‐ 4. "Settings"
lowing steps first:
5. "Synchronize driver profile"
▷ Setting up PIN.
6. "Synchronize driver profile"
▷ Canceling recognition using the vehicle key.
▷ Switching to the guest profile.
69
Renaming a driver profile ConnectedDrive countries: If the driver profile

was synchronized with a ConnectedDrive ac‐
Non-ConnectedDrive countries:
count, the stored data in the ConnectedDrive ac‐
1. "CAR" count will be retained.
As an alternative for Steps 1 and 2, the profile System limits
image can be tapped in the top status bar. A clear detection of the desired vehicle key may
3. Select driver profile. not be possible in the following cases, e.g.:
4. "Settings" ▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle via Comfort

Access.
5. Enter a profile name.
▷ The driver changes, but the vehicle is not
6. Select the icon. locked and unlocked.
ConnectedDrive countries: ▷ When multiple vehicle keys are located in the
The name of the driver profile is transferred from outer area on the driver's side of the vehicle.
the ConnectedDrive account. Changes for the ConnectedDrive countries:
profile name must be made in the Connected‐
Drive account. A driver profile can only be created and
synchronized with the ConnectedDrive account
when the vehicle has cellular network reception.
Selecting a profile picture
The use of personal settings that are stored in
1. "CAR"
the ConnectedDrive account in other vehicles is
2. "Driver profiles" subject to technical limitations. For example, set‐
3. Tilt the Controller to the right. tings may be stored for a system that is not avail‐
As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile able, or available in a non-compatible version, in
image can be tapped in the top status bar. other vehicles.
4. "Avatar"
5. Select the desired profile picture.
ConnectedDrive countries:
The profile image is transferred from the Con‐
nectedDrive customer portal or the BMW app.
Deleting the driver profile

1. "CAR"
As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile
image can be tapped in the top status bar.
4. "Settings"
5. "Remove driver profile"
6. Select the desired driver profile.
7. "Delete now"
70
Connections CONTROLS
Connections
Connecting mobile devices to the vehicle

Principle General information
Various connection types are available for using The following overview shows possible functions
mobile devices in the vehicle. The connection and the suitable connection types for them. The
type to select depends on the mobile device and scope of functions depends on the mobile de‐
the desired function. vice.
Function Connection type Symbol in the

device list
Making calls via the hands-free sys‐ Bluetooth.

tem.
Using phone functions via iDrive or
touchscreen.
Other functions, e.g. Contacts or SMS.
Playing music from the smartphone or Bluetooth audio.

the audio player.
WLAN in the vehicle: WLAN.

Using apps in the vehicle.
Wi-Fi hotspot: WLAN.

Using the vehicle Internet access.
Screen Mirroring: WLAN.

Showing the smartphone display on
USB port: USB.

Playing music or videos from a USB
device.
71
CONTROLS Connections
Function Connection type Symbol in the

device list
Apple CarPlay: Bluetooth and WLAN.

Using apps via iDrive and via voice op‐
eration.
Android Auto: Bluetooth and WLAN.

Using apps via iDrive and via voice op‐
eration.
The following connection types require one-time Displaying the vehicle identification
pairing with the vehicle: number and software part number
▷ Bluetooth. When looking for compatible devices, you may
▷ WLAN. have to state the vehicle identification number
Paired devices are automatically recognized later and the software part number. These numbers
on and connected to the vehicle. can be displayed in the vehicle.
1. "COM"
Safety information 2. "Mobile devices"
Warning 4. "Settings"
Operating the integrated information systems 5. "Bluetooth® info"
and communication devices while driving can
6. "System information"
distract from traffic. It is possible to lose control
of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Only
use the systems or devices when the traffic sit‐
uation allows. As warranted, stop and use the
Managing mobile devices
systems and devices while the vehicle is sta‐
tionary. General information
▷ After one-time pairing, the devices are auto‐
matically recognized and reconnected when
Compatible devices standby state is switched on.
▷ After stored content on the SIM card or the
General information
mobile phone, such as contacts, has been
Information on mobile devices compatible with detected, the data is transmitted to the vehi‐
the vehicle can be found at www.bmwusa.com/ cle and can be used via iDrive.
bluetooth.
▷ For some devices, certain settings are neces‐
Malfunctions may occur with devices not listed sary, for instance authorization; see the oper‐
or deviating software versions. ating instructions of the device.
Displaying the device list

All devices paired with or connected to the vehi‐
cle are displayed in the device list.
72
A maximum of four devices can be connected to functions may be deactivated on a device

the vehicle via Bluetooth, and a maximum of ten already connected.
devices can be connected to the vehicle via ▷ "Disconnect device"
WLAN. A maximum of 20 devices will be de‐
The device remains paired and can be
tected.
connected again.
1. "COM" ▷ "Delete device"
2. "Mobile devices" The device is disconnected and removed
An icon to the right of the device name indicates, from the device list.
for which function the device is used. ▷ "Connection mode"
When the icon is displayed in white, this function Select a connection mode, for instance
is actively connected to the vehicle. The icon is Apple CarPlay.
displayed in gray when the function of the device
▷ "Telephone"
is inactive.
Set telephone.
Icon Meaning
▷ "Bluetooth® audio"
Telephone. Playback of music files on external devi‐
Bluetooth audio. ces such as audio devices or mobile
phones via Bluetooth®.
WLAN in the vehicle, Wi-Fi hotspot. ▷ "Apps"
Apps. With the installed BMW app, apps from
the smartphone can be displayed in the
Screen Mirroring.
vehicle.
Apple CarPlay. ▷ "Wi-Fi®"
Android Auto. Connects the device with the WLAN in
the vehicle.
Configuring the device
Priority of the phones
Functions can be activated or deactivated for
paired and connected devices. When multiple mobile phones are connected to
the vehicle, you can specify the priority of the
The scope of functions depends on the mobile mobile phones for reconnection.
device.
Follow the information on the Control Display. 1. "COM"
2. "Mobile devices"
1. "COM"
2. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
3. Select the desired device.
5. "Priorities for telephones"
6. Select the desired device.
▷ "Connect device"
7. Select the desired priority by sliding.
The functions that were assigned to the
device before disconnecting are assigned
to the device when it is reconnected. The
73
Bluetooth connection Frequently Asked Questions

All requirements are met and all required steps
were completed in the specified order. Despite
that, the mobile device does not function as ex‐
▷ Compatible device with Bluetooth interface. pected.
Compatible devices, refer to page 72. In this case, the following explanations can help:
▷ The vehicle key is in the vehicle. Why could the mobile phone not be paired or
▷ The device is ready for operation. connected?
▷ Bluetooth is switched on in the vehicle and ▷ There are too many Bluetooth devices con‐
on the device. nected to the mobile phone or vehicle.
▷ The pairing readiness is displayed on the In the vehicle, delete Bluetooth connections
Control Display. with other devices.
▷ Bluetooth presettings, such as visibility, may Delete the Bluetooth connection from the de‐
be required on the device; refer to the operat‐ vice list on the mobile phone and start a new
ing instructions of the device. device search.
Too many Bluetooth devices with the same
Activate Bluetooth function are paired.
1. "COM" ▷ The mobile phone is in power-save mode or
2. "Mobile devices" has only a limited remaining battery life.
3. Tilt the Controller to the right. Charge the mobile phone and deactivate the
power-save mode where required.
4. "Settings"
Why does the mobile phone no longer react?
5. "Bluetooth®"
▷ The applications on the mobile phone do not
6. Select setting.
function anymore.
Connecting the device Switch the mobile phone off and on again.
1. "COM" ▷ Too high or too low ambient temperature for

mobile phone operation.
2. "Mobile devices"
Do not subject the mobile phone to extreme
3. Tilt the Controller to the right. ambient temperatures.
4. "New device" Why can telephone functions not be used via
5. "Phone calls and audio" iDrive?
The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed on ▷ Phone functions are not configured for the
the Control Display. mobile phone.
6. Compare the control number displayed on Connect the mobile phone with the tele‐
the Control Display with the control number phone function.
on the display of the mobile device, and con‐ Why are no or not all telephone book entries dis‐
firm that the two match. played or why are they incomplete?
7. A Bluetooth connection is established.
The mobile device is connected to the vehicle
and displayed in the device list.
74
▷ Transmission of the telephone book entries is

not yet complete.
WLAN connection
▷ It is possible that only the telephone book en‐
tries of the mobile phone or the SIM card are
General information
transmitted. For certain applications, such as apps, the data
▷ It may not be possible to display telephone exchange between smartphone and vehicle oc‐
book entries with special characters. curs via WLAN.
▷ It may not be possible to transmit contacts

from social networks.
▷ Standby state is switched on.
▷ The number of phone book entries to be
transmitted is too high. ▷ Compatible device with activated WLAN in‐
terface.
▷ Data volume of the contact too large, for in‐
stance due to stored information such as
memos. Activate WLAN in the vehicle
Reduce the data volume of the contact. 1. "COM"
▷ A mobile phone can only be connected as 2. "Mobile devices"

audio source or as telephone. 3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
Configure the mobile phone and connect it 4. "Settings"
with the telephone function. 5. "Wi-Fi®"
▷ Contact was created in the contact list of the
phone after the last synchronization.
Synchronize contacts again: "Reload Wi-Fi hotspot
contacts"
How can the telephone connection quality be Principle
improved? Compatible devices with WLAN interface can
▷ Adjust the strength of the Bluetooth signal on use the Internet connection of the vehicle via the
the mobile phone, depending on the mobile Wi-Fi hotspot.
phone.
▷ Insert the mobile phone into the wireless General information
charging tray. Up to ten devices can be connected to the Wi-
▷ Adjust the volume of the microphone sepa‐ Fi hotspot simultaneously.
rately in the sound settings.
If all points in this list have been checked and the Functional requirements
required function is still not available, contact ▷ Compatible device with activated WLAN in‐
Customer Relations, a dealer’s service center or terface.
another qualified service center or repair shop. Compatible devices, refer to page 72.
▷ WLAN is activated on the vehicle.
▷ Internet use is activated for the vehicle.
▷ Registration and data contract with a service
provider where required.
75
Connecting a device to the 3. Tilt the Controller to the right.

Internet via the Wi-Fi hotspot 4. "Settings"
Using the Internet for the first time via the Wi- 5. "Internet connection"
Fi hotspot requires registration and possibly a 6. Select the desired setting.
data volume purchase from a service provider.
Depending on the country version, data volume
can be purchased via the connected mobile de‐ Screen Mirroring
vice or from the ConnectedDrive Store.
1. "COM" General information

2. "Mobile devices" Screen Mirroring enables mirroring (outputting)
of the smartphone display on the Control Dis‐
play.
4. "New device"
5. "Internet, apps" Functional requirements
Hotspot name and hotspot code are dis‐ ▷ Compatible smartphone with Screen Mirror‐
played on the Control Display. ing interface.
6. Activate Internet usage via WLAN if neces‐ Compatible devices, refer to page 72.
sary.
▷ Screen Mirroring is activated on the smart‐
"Open settings" phone.
7. Activate Internet usage. ▷ WLAN is activated on the vehicle.
"Internet connection"
8. Tilt the Controller to the left. Pairing a smartphone with
9. Search for WLAN networks on the mobile de‐ Screen Mirroring
vice. Select network name on the device. 1. "COM"
10. Enter hotspot code on the device and con‐ 2. "Mobile devices"
nect. 3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
The device is displayed in the device list. 4. "New device"
Additionally, a QR code will be displayed on the 5. "Screen Mirroring"
Control Display. Alternatively, this QR code can
The WLAN name of the vehicle is displayed
be used to pair the mobile device with the hot‐
on the Control Display.
spot.
6. Search for WLAN devices in the surrounding
All devices connected via the hotspot use this
area of the smartphone.
data volume.
The WLAN name of the vehicle appears on
Deactivating Internet usage via the device display. Select the WLAN name of
the vehicle.
the Wi-Fi hotspot
7. Confirm the connection via iDrive.
Internet usage may be deactivated if the data
volume is used up, for instance. The device is connected and displayed in the
device list.
1. "COM"
2. "Mobile devices"
76
Apple CarPlay© Operation

preparation For more information, refer to the Integrated
Owner's Manual or the Owner's Manual for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, Communication.
Principle
CarPlay allows certain functions of a compatible Frequently Asked Questions
Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice control All requirements are met and all required steps
and iDrive. were completed in the specified order. Despite
that, the mobile device does not function as ex‐
Functional requirements pected.
▷ Compatible iPhone, iPhone 5 or later with In this case, the following explanations can help:
iOS 7.1 or later. The iPhone has already been paired with Apple
Compatible devices, refer to page 72. CarPlay. When a new connection is set up, Car‐
▷ Corresponding mobile contract. Play can no longer be selected.
▷ Bluetooth, WLAN, and Siri voice control are ▷ Delete the iPhone concerned from the device
activated on the iPhone. list.
▷ If necessary, the setting for mobile data must ▷ On the iPhone, delete the vehicle concerned
be activated on the iPhone. from the list of stored connections under
Bluetooth and under WLAN.
▷ Booking the ConnectedDrive service: smart‐
phone integration. ▷ Pair the iPhone as a new device.
▷ WLAN and Bluetooth are enabled in the vehi‐ If the steps listed have been carried out and the
cle. required function is still not available: contact
Customer Relations, a dealer's service center or
Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay another qualified service center or repair shop.
1. "COM"
2. "Mobile devices" Android Auto© preparation
4. "New device" Principle
5. "Phone calls and audio" Android Auto allows the operation of certain
The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed on functions of a compatible smartphone via voice
the Control Display. control and iDrive.
6. On the mobile device, search for Bluetooth
devices in the vicinity and select the vehicle. General information
A control number is displayed. The range of services offered depends on the
country.
7. Compare the control number displayed on
the Control Display with the control number
on the display of the mobile device, and con‐
firm that the two match. ▷ Compatible Android smartphone: Samsung
or Google smartphone with Android 10 or an
8. "Use Apple CarPlay"
The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and dis‐
played in the device list.
77
Android smartphone with Android 11, regard‐ Frequently Asked Questions

less of the manufacturer.
All requirements are met and all required steps
▷ Compatible devices, refer to page 72. were completed in the specified order. Despite
▷ Corresponding mobile contract. that, the mobile device does not function as ex‐
▷ Bluetooth and WLAN are enabled on the pected.
smartphone. In this case, the following explanations can help:
▷ The smartphone must support a 5 Ghz WiFi The smartphone has already been paired with
connection. Android Auto. When a new connection is set up,
▷ If necessary, the setting for mobile data must Android Auto can no longer be selected.
be activated on the smartphone. ▷ Delete the smartphone concerned from the
▷ WLAN and Bluetooth are enabled in the vehi‐ device list.
cle. ▷ On the smartphone, delete the vehicle con‐
cerned from the list of stored connections
Pairing a smartphone with under Bluetooth and under WLAN.
Android Auto ▷ Pair the smartphone as a new device.
1. "COM" If the steps listed have been carried out and the
required function is still not available: contact
2. "Mobile devices"
Customer Relations, a dealer's service center or
3. Tilt the Controller to the right. another qualified service center or repair shop.
4. "New device"
The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed on
USB connection
6. On the mobile device, search for Bluetooth
General information
devices in the vicinity and select the vehicle. The following mobile devices can be connected
A control number is displayed. to the USB port:
7. Compare the control number displayed on ▷ Mobile phones.

the Control Display with the control number ▷ Audio devices such as MP3 players.
on the display of the mobile device, and con‐ ▷ USB storage devices.
firm that the two match.
Common file systems are supported. FAT32 and
8. "Use Android Auto" exFAT are the recommended formats.
9. If necessary, finish the setup on the mobile A connected USB device will be supplied with
device. charge current via the USB port if the device
The smartphone is connected to the vehicle and supports this. Follow the maximum charge cur‐
displayed in the device list. rent of the USB port.
The following uses are possible on USB ports
Operation with data transmission:
For more information, refer to the Integrated ▷ Playing music files.
Owner's Manual or the Owner's Manual for Navi‐ ▷ Playing videos.
gation, Entertainment, Communication.
Follow the following when connecting:
78
▷ Do not use force when plugging the connec‐ Additional information:

tor into the USB port. USB port, refer to page 243.
▷ Use a flexible adapter cable.
▷ Protect the USB device against mechanical
damage.
▷ Due to the large number of USB devices
available on the market, it cannot be guaran‐
teed that every device is operable on the ve‐
hicle.
▷ Do not expose USB devices to extreme envi‐
ronmental conditions, such as very high tem‐
peratures; refer to the operating instructions
of the device.
▷ Due to the many different compression tech‐
niques, proper playback of the media stored
on the USB device cannot be guaranteed in
all cases.
▷ To ensure proper transmission of the stored
data, do not charge a USB device via the on‐
board socket, when it is connected to the
USB port.
▷ Depending on how the USB device is being
used, settings may be required on the USB
storage device, refer to the operating instruc‐
tions of the device.
Not compatible USB devices:
▷ USB hard drives.
▷ USB hubs.
▷ USB memory card readers with multiple slots.
▷ HFS-formatted USB devices.
▷ Devices such as fans or lamps.
Functional requirement
Compatible device with USB port.
Compatible devices, refer to page 72.
Connecting the device

Connect the USB device using a suitable adapter
cable to a USB port.
The USB device is displayed in the device list.
79
CONTROLS Opening and closing
Opening and closing

Vehicle features and burns. There is an injury hazard or danger to
life. Keep the vehicle key and batteries out of
options reach for children. Immediately seek medical
help if there is any suspicion that a battery or
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ button cell has been swallowed or is located in
cific and optional features offered with the series. any part of the body.
Warning
tems. When using these functions and systems, People or animals in the vehicle can lock the
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ doors from the inside and lock themselves in. In
served. this case, the vehicle cannot be opened from
the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the
vehicle key with you so that the vehicle can be
Vehicle key opened from the outside.
General information
Warning
The vehicle is supplied with two vehicle keys
For some country versions, unlocking from the
with integrated key.
inside is only possible with special knowledge.
Each vehicle key contains a replaceable battery.
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐
Depending on the equipment and country ver‐ cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐
sion, various settings can be configured for the tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock
button functions. the vehicle from the outside when there are
A driver profile with personal settings can be as‐ people in it.
signed to a vehicle key.
To provide information on maintenance recom‐
mendations, the service data is stored in the ve‐ Warning
hicle key. Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
To prevent possible locking in of the vehicle key, can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
take the vehicle key with you when exiting the themselves and traffic, for instance due to the
vehicle. following actions:
Safety information ▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
Warning dows.
The vehicle key has a button cell battery. Bat‐ ▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
teries or button cells can be swallowed and
lead to serious or fatal injuries within two hours,
for example, due to internal burns or chemical
80
Opening and closing CONTROLS
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not If, due to the settings, only the driver's door and
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ fuel filler flap were unlocked, press the button on
hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐ the vehicle key again to unlock the other vehicle
ing and lock the vehicle. access points.
In addition, the following functions are executed:
▷ If a driver profile was assigned to the vehicle
Overview
key, this driver profile will be activated and the
settings that are stored in it will be applied.
▷ The interior lights are switched on, unless
they were manually switched off.
▷ Folded in exterior mirrors are folded out.
If the exterior mirrors were folded in via the
button in the car's interior, they will not be
folded out when unlocking.
▷ With alarm system: The alarm system will be
1 Unlocking switched off.
2 Locking After opening one of the front doors, the vehicle
is ready for operation.
Stationary climate control through Remote
Engine Start 235 The light functions may depend on the ambient
brightness.
3 Opening the trunk lid
4 Panic mode, pathway lighting
Convenient opening
Unlocking cle key after unlocking.
General information The windows and the glass sunroof with sun
The behavior of the vehicle during unlocking us‐ protection are opened, as long as the button on
ing the vehicle key depends on the following set‐ the vehicle key is pressed.
tings:
▷ If only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap
Locking
or all access to the vehicle will be unlocked
when the button is pressed for the first time. General information
▷ If the unlocking of the vehicle is confirmed The behavior of the vehicle during locking using
with a light signal or a sound signal. the vehicle key depends on the following set‐
tings:
▷ If the welcome light is switched on when the
vehicle is being unlocked. ▷ If the locking of the vehicle is confirmed with
a light signal or a sound signal.
Welcome lights, refer to page 165.
▷ If the exterior mirrors are automatically folded
in when the vehicle is locked. The exterior
mirrors are not folded in when the hazard
Press the button on the vehicle key. warning flashers are switched on.
▷ If pathway lighting is activated during locking.
81
Locking the vehicle Switching on the interior and

1. Close the driver's door. exterior lighting
Press the button on the vehicle key with
2. Press the button on the vehicle key.
the vehicle locked.
The following functions are executed:
The function is not available for the first 10 sec‐
▷ All doors, the trunk lid, and the fuel filler flap
onds after locking.
are locked.
▷ The interior lights are switched on, unless
switched on.
Interior lights, refer to page 168.
If the drive-ready state is still switched on when
you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn honks ▷ Depending on the settings, parts of the exte‐
twice. In this case, the drive-ready state must be rior lighting will be switched on.
switched off by means of the Start/Stop button. The light functions may depend on the ambient
brightness.
With Comfort Access:
convenient closing Trunk lid
Safety information General information

To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle,
Warning do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.
With convenient closing, body parts can be Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐
jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure try version, it is possible to specify whether the
that the area of movement of the doors is clear trunk lid can be unlocked with the vehicle key
during convenient closing. and how the vehicle doors will respond to this.
With automatic transmission: selector lever posi‐
tion P must be engaged to open the trunk lid
Closing with the vehicle key.
Press and hold the button on the vehicle
key in the area close to the vehicle after Safety information
locking.
Warning
The windows and the glass sunroof with sun
protection are closed, as long as the button on Body parts can be jammed when operating the
the vehicle key is pressed. trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
the area of movement of the trunk lid is clear
The exterior mirrors are folded in unless they
during opening and closing.
were folded in during locking. The exterior mir‐
rors are not folded in when the hazard warning
flashers are switched on.
82
cover with a lever movement of the

NOTICE integrated key, arrow 2.
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and
up. There is a risk of damage to property,
among other potential damage. Make sure that
Opening
cle key for approx. 1 second. 3. Push battery in arrow direction using a
pointed object and lift it out.
Switching pathway lighting on
cle key for approx. 1 second.
It is possible to adjust the duration of the path‐

way lighting feature.
Pathway lighting, refer to page 165.
4. Insert a type CR 2032 3V battery with the

Replacing the battery positive side facing up.
5. Press the cover closed.
NOTICE
6. Push the integrated key into the vehicle key
Improper batteries in the vehicle key can dam‐ until the integrated key engages.
age the vehicle key. There is a risk of damage
to property, among other potential damage. Al‐ Have old batteries disposed of by a deal‐
ways replace the discharged battery with a bat‐ er’s service center or another qualified
tery with the same voltage, the same size and service center or repair shop or take
the same specification. them to a collection point.
1. Remove the integrated key from the vehicle Additional vehicle keys
key.
Additional vehicle keys are available from a serv‐
Integrated key, refer to page 89. ice center or another qualified service center or
2. Place the integrated key underneath the bat‐ repair shop.
tery compartment cover, arrow 1, and lift the
Loss of vehicle keys
A lost vehicle key can be disabled and replaced
by a dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
83
If the lost vehicle key has an assigned driver pro‐ Switching the drive-ready state on
file, the connection to this vehicle key must be via emergency detection of the
deleted. A new vehicle key can then be assigned vehicle key
to the driver profile.
Malfunction
General information
A Check Control message is displayed.
Vehicle key detection by the vehicle may mal‐
function under the following circumstances:
▷ The battery of the vehicle key is discharged.
▷ Fault of the radio link from transmission tow‐ It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready
ers or other equipment with high transmitting state if the vehicle key has not been detected.
power. Proceed as follows in this case:
▷ Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal ob‐ 1. Hold the rear of the vehicle key against the
jects. marked area on the steering column. Pay at‐
Do not transport the vehicle key together with tention to the display in the instrument clus‐
metal objects. ter.
▷ Fault of the radio link from mobile phones or 2. If the vehicle key is detected:
other electronic devices in direct proximity to Turn on drive-ready state within 10 seconds.
the vehicle key.
If the vehicle key is not recognized, slightly
Do not carry the vehicle key in close proximity change the position of the vehicle key and repeat
to other electronic devices. the procedure.
▷ Fault of radio transmission by a charging
process of mobile devices, for instance Frequently Asked Questions
charging of a mobile phone.
What precautions can be taken to be able to
▷ The vehicle key is located in direct proximity open a vehicle with an accidentally locked in ve‐
of the tray for wireless charging tray. hicle key?
Place the vehicle key in a different location. ▷ The options provided by the Remote Serv‐
In the case of interference, the vehicle can also ices of the BMW app include the ability to
be unlocked and locked from the outside with lock and unlock a vehicle.
the integrated key. This requires an active BMW Connected‐
Additional information: Drive contract and the BMW app must be in‐
Integrated key, refer to page 89. stalled on a smartphone.
▷ Unlocking the vehicle can be requested via
the BMW ConnectedDrive Call Center.
An active BMW ConnectedDrive contract is
required.
84
Key Card
Warning
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
Principle can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
The Key Card allows the vehicle to be unlocked themselves and traffic, for instance due to the
and locked, as well as started. following actions:
General information
The Key Card is available with Comfort Access.
dows.
Key Card may not be available.
A digital key that has already been paired with
the vehicle is installed on the Key Card. The digi‐ ▷ Using vehicle equipment.
tal key must be activated via iDrive. There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
Before leaving the vehicle, deactivate the Key leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
Card or take the Key Card with you because the hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐
active Key Card can be used to start the vehicle. ing and lock the vehicle.
Always take the vehicle key with you to a service
appointment.
Connection to the vehicle
Safety information The communication between the vehicle and the
Key Card uses near field communication, NFC.
Warning
Activating/deactivating Key Card
People or animals in the vehicle can lock the
in the vehicle
doors from the inside and lock themselves in. In
this case, the vehicle cannot be opened from
General information
vehicle key with you so that the vehicle can be The Key Card must be located in the smart‐
opened from the outside. phone tray and a vehicle key must be located in
the vehicle to activate the Key Card.
A vehicle key must be located in the vehicle to
Warning deactivate the Key Card.
For some country versions, unlocking from the When BMW Digital Key is activated for the vehi‐
inside is only possible with special knowledge. cle, a digital key can be used instead of the vehi‐
cle key.
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐ A deactivated Key Card remains in the list of
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock paired digital keys.
the vehicle from the outside when there are
people in it.
85
Activate Key Card Starting the engine
Place Key Card centered into the tray and slide Place activated Key Card centered into the tray
down behind the holding clasp. and slide down behind the holding clasp.
Follow the instructions on the Control Display to Press the Start/Stop button to start the engine.
activate the Key Card. With wireless charging tray: After starting the en‐
gine, take the Key Card out of the tray to make
Deactivate Key Card tray available for charging compatible smart‐
1. "CAR" phones.
2. "Settings"
3. "Doors/ vehicle access" Malfunction
4. "Digital Key" The detection of the Key Card by the vehicle
may be disrupted by objects between the sen‐
5. Select Key Card. sors and the Key Card, for instance a wallet.
6. "Key active"
A deactivated Key Card remains in the list of
paired digital keys. BMW Digital Key
Unlocking and locking the Principle
vehicle BMW Digital Key allows the vehicle to be un‐
locked and locked, as well as started, with a
compatible smartphone.
General information
The availability of the BMW Digital Key depends
on the equipment and national-market version.
BMW Digital Key can be used with a compatible
smartphone or other compatible mobile termi‐
nals, such as a Smartwatch.
Hold activated Key Card directly and centered on To unlock and start a vehicle with a compatible
the external door handle of the driver's door. smartphone, this function must be offered by the
If the Key Card is not detected, slightly change smartphone manufacturer. The BMW app pro‐
the position of the Key Card and repeat the pro‐ vides a check to determine if the smartphone
cedure. and the vehicle are compatible.
86
A driver profile with individual settings can be as‐ ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
signed to a digital key. ▷ Releasing the parking brake.
Additional information: ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
Driver profiles, refer to page 67. dows.
When using a smartphone as a digital key, al‐ ▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
ways carry a vehicle key or the activated Key ▷ Using vehicle equipment.
Card with you. This ensures access to the vehi‐
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
cle, even in the event of a smartphone failure. It
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
is also useful to carry the vehicle key or the Key
Card with you if the vehicle has to be handed
ing and lock the vehicle.
over to another person. You can then hand over
the vehicle key or the Key Card, instead of your
smartphone. Always take the vehicle key with
you to a service appointment.
Connection to the vehicle
The communication between the vehicle and the
smartphone uses near field communication,
Safety information
NFC.
Warning Functional requirements

People or animals in the vehicle can lock the ▷ The smartphone is compatible with BMW
doors from the inside and lock themselves in. In Digital Key
this case, the vehicle cannot be opened from
▷ The vehicle is linked with the Connected‐
Drive account of the vehicle owner.
vehicle key with you so that the vehicle can be
opened from the outside. ▷ The rechargeable battery of the smartphone
has a sufficient charge. The necessary mini‐
mum charge of the rechargeable battery de‐
pends on the smartphone.
Warning
For some country versions, unlocking from the Enable the digital remote control
key
Vehicle owner's smartphone is enabled as a digi‐
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐
tal remote control key in the vehicle. The vehicle
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock
owner must prove his authorization for the vehi‐
cle for this purpose.
people in it.
The proof of authorization can be started via the
BMW app or via the activation code in the corre‐
sponding smartphone function, for instance the
Warning
Wallet app. Both vehicle keys must be located in
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle the vehicle to be enabled.
Follow the instructions in the Digital Key menu in
the BMW app or on the Control Display.
following actions:
87
The valid service period of the digital key may be Deleting a shared key
limited. The expiration date of the validity can be
checked in the BMW app. General information
After a digital key has expired, it can still be used Shared keys can be deleted via the smartphone
to move the vehicle until the vehicle is used with with the digital remote control key, the smart‐
a different vehicle key or digital key. phone with a shared key or via iDrive.
The deletion via the smartphone with the digital
Sharing digital keys remote control key will not be performed until
the vehicle is used with a key other than the key
General information to be deleted.
Digital key allows the sharing of digital keys with The deletion via the smartphone with a shared
other people. This option is available via the key or via iDrive is executed immediately.
smartphone that is enabled as digital remote
Deleted digital keys will be removed from the list
control key.
of enabled digital keys.
Forwarding authorization Deleted digital keys cannot be restored.
To share the digital key, select the correspond‐

ing function on the smartphone, for instance in
Deletion via iDrive
the Wallet app. To be able to delete a digital key via iDrive, an
authorized vehicle key must be located in the ve‐
As soon as a digital key is shared with another
hicle or the remote control key must be located
person, the person will receive an invitation.
in the smartphone tray.
When the invitation is accepted, the digital key
on the recipient's smartphone will be activated. 1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Limiting the range of functions
Certain functions of the digital key can be limited
4. "Digital Key"
before handing it over. For example, if the digital
key is handed over to a novice driver, the switch- 5. If necessary, select the digital key.
off of driving stability control system can be ex‐ 6. "Delete key"
cluded. For more information, refer to the Con‐
nectedDrive portal and the BMW app. Reset the function
To reset the BMW Digital Key function, an au‐
Authentication thorized vehicle key must be located in the vehi‐
Depending on the recipient’s smartphone model, cle.
an authentication may be required for security
When resetting the BMW Digital Key function, all
and safety reasons.
digital keys including the digital remote control
An authorized vehicle key, the digital remote key will be deleted.
control key or another method may be used for
After the reset, the vehicle can no longer be un‐
authentication. Follow the corresponding instruc‐
locked, locked or started with a digital key.
tions on the smartphone or the Control Display.
88
The digital remote control key must be enabled 1. Place the smartphone centered into the tray
again to be able to use BMW Digital Key again. and slide down behind the holding clasp.
1. "CAR" 2. Press the Start/Stop button to start the en‐
2. "Settings" gine.

Sale of the smartphone
4. "Digital Key"
Delete all digital keys on the smartphone prior to
5. "Reset function" selling the smartphone. This ensures that that
the smartphone can no longer be used for the
Unlocking and locking the vehicle.
vehicle
Sale of the vehicle
Prior to selling a vehicle, reset the Digital Key
function or remove the vehicle from the Connec‐
tedDrive account of the current vehicle owner.
When the vehicle is removed from the Connec‐
tedDrive account, all digital keys for the vehicle
will be deleted.
Malfunction
Hold the near field communication antenna of Digital key recognition by the vehicle may mal‐
the smartphone directly and centered on the ex‐ function under the following circumstances:
ternal door handle of the driver's door.
▷ The smartphone is shielded from the sensors
The position of the near field communication an‐ in the vehicle by a smartphone cover that is
tenna depends on the smartphone model. not suitable.
When locking the vehicle with the smartphone, ▷ Objects such as a chip card or the Key Card
make sure that all doors including the trunk lid are located between the smartphone and the
are closed. smartphone cover.
Starting the engine

Integrated key
General information
The driver's door can be locked and unlocked
without the vehicle key using the integrated key.
integrated key also fits the glove compartment.
89
Safety information Locking/unlocking via the door

lock
Warning 1. Pull and hold the door handle outward with
For some country versions, unlocking from the one hand.
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock
people in it.
NOTICE
2. Guide one finger of your other hand from the
The door lock is permanently joined with the
back under the cover and push the cover out.
door. The door handle can be moved. When
pulling the door handle with the integrated key Use the thumb for counter support to prevent
inserted, paint or the integrated key can be the cover from falling out of the door handle.
damaged. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty, among other potential damage. Remove
the integrated key before pulling the external
door handle.
Removing
3. Remove the cover.

4. Unlock or lock the door lock using the
integrated key.
Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the

integrated key, arrow 2.
The other doors must be unlocked or locked

from the inside.
90
Alarm system Opening

The activated alarm system is triggered when ▷ Press the button to unlock all the
the door is opened, if the vehicle has been un‐ doors.
locked via the door lock. Pull the door opener above the armrest.
The alarm system is not switched on if the vehi‐ ▷ Front doors: pull the door handle on the door
cle is locked with the integrated key. to open the door. The other doors remain
locked.
Buttons for the central ▷ Back doors: pull twice on the door handle on
the door to be opened; the first time unlocks
locking system the door, the second time opens it. The other
doors remain locked.
General information
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is Comfort Access
automatically unlocked. The hazard warning sys‐
tem and interior lights come on.
Principle
Overview The vehicle can be accessed without operating
the vehicle key.
Carrying the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your
pants pocket, is sufficient.
The vehicle automatically detects the vehicle key
when it is in close proximity or in the car's inte‐
rior.
General information
Comfort Access supports the following func‐
Buttons for the central locking system. tions:
▷ Unlocking and locking the vehicle from the
Locking door handle.
▷ Convenient closing.
Press the button with the front doors
closed. ▷ Touchless unlocking and locking of the vehi‐
cle.
▷ The fuel filler flap remains unlocked. ▷ Unlocking and locking the vehicle using the
▷ The vehicle is not secured against theft when BMW Digital Key.
locking. ▷ Opening trunk lid.
▷ Open trunk lid with no-touch activation.
Unlocking
Press the button.
91
Functional requirements Locking

▷ To lock the vehicle, the vehicle key must be
outside of the vehicle near the doors. General information
▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not The behavior of the vehicle during locking via the
possible until after approx. 2 seconds. Comfort Access depends on the following set‐
tings:
Unlocking ▷ If the locking of the vehicle is confirmed with
a light signal or a sound signal.
General information ▷ If the exterior mirrors are automatically folded
The behavior of the vehicle during unlocking via in when the vehicle is locked. The exterior
the Comfort Access depends on the following mirrors are not folded in when the hazard
settings: warning flashers are switched on.
▷ If the unlocking of the vehicle is confirmed ▷ If pathway lighting is activated during locking.
with a light signal or a sound signal.
▷ If the welcome light is switched on when the Locking the vehicle
vehicle is being unlocked. Close the driver's door.

closed vehicle door with your finger for approx.
Grasp the handle of a vehicle door completely. 1 second without grasping the door handle.
In addition, the following functions are executed: The following functions are executed:
▷ If a driver profile was assigned to the vehicle ▷ All doors, the trunk lid, and the fuel filler flap
key, this driver profile will be activated and the are locked.
settings that are stored in it will be applied. ▷ With alarm system: The alarm system will be
▷ The interior lights are switched on, unless switched on.
▷ Folded in exterior mirrors are folded out.
If the exterior mirrors were folded in via the
button in the car's interior, they will not be
folded out when unlocking.
switched off.
92
Convenient closing Safety information
Safety information Warning

Body parts can be jammed when operating the
Warning trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
With convenient closing, body parts can be the area of movement of the trunk lid is clear
jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure during opening and closing.
that the area of movement of the doors is clear
during convenient closing.
NOTICE
Closing
up. There is a risk of damage to property,
Opening

closed vehicle door with your finger and hold it
there without grasping the door handle.
In addition to locking, the windows and glass

sunroof with sun protection will be closed.
The exterior mirrors are folded in unless they
Press the button on the outer side of the trunk
were folded in during locking. The exterior mir‐
lid.
rors are not folded in when the hazard warning
flashers are switched on.
Opening the trunk lid with no-
Opening the trunk lid touch activation
General information Principle

If you open the trunk lid via Comfort Access, The trunk lid can be opened with no-touch acti‐
locked doors will not be unlocked. vation using the vehicle key you are carrying.
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle, Two sensors detect a forward-directed foot mo‐
do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area. tion in the center of the area at the rear of the ve‐
hicle and the trunk lid is opened.
General information
do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.
93
With automatic transmission: selector lever posi‐ Settings

tion P must be engaged for touchless opening of 1. "CAR"
the trunk lid.
2. "Settings"
If the vehicle key is in the sensor area, the trunk
lid may open inadvertently if you unintentionally 3. "Doors/ vehicle access"
move your foot or if a foot movement is de‐ 4. "Tailgate"
tected. 5. "Open with foot movement"
The sensor has an approximate range of Contactless opening of the tailgate is
5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear of the vehi‐ switched on or off.
cle.
If you open the trunk lid with no-touch activation, Performing the foot movement
locked doors will not be unlocked. 1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle at ap‐
Contactless opening of the trunk lid must be ac‐ prox. one arm's length away from the rear
tivated in the settings. end.
2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the driving
Safety information direction and immediately pull it back. With
this movement, the leg must pass through
Warning the ranges of both sensors.
During no-touch activation, vehicle parts may

be touched, such as the hot exhaust gas sys‐
tem. There is a risk of injury. When moving your
foot, make sure you have a firm stance and do
not touch the vehicle.
Warning
trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
Opening
during opening and closing. Perform the foot movement described earlier.
Before the trunk lid opens, the hazard warning
system flashes.
NOTICE
System limits
up. There is a risk of damage to property, The detection of the foot movement may be lim‐
among other potential damage. Make sure that ited due to the following external conditions:
the area of movement of the trunk lid is clear ▷ Ice, snow or slush on the rear of the vehicle.
during opening and closing. ▷ Dirt or road salt on the rear of the vehicle.
Movement in the range of the sensors may
cause unintended opening or closing of the
cargo area, for instance due to water running
own when cleaning the vehicle or with heavy
rainfall. To prevent such unintended opening or
94
closing of the cargo area in such cases, keep the locked when the driver approaches the vehi‐
vehicle key at a sufficient distance from the rear cle on the driver's side.
of the vehicle. All vehicle entry points: the vehicle will be un‐
locked regardless of the side on which the
Touchless unlocking and locking driver approaches the vehicle.
of the vehicle ▷ If the unlocking and locking of the vehicle is
confirmed with a light signal or a sound sig‐
Principle nal.
The vehicle will be unlocked when the driver ap‐ ▷ If the welcome light is switched on when the
proaches the locked vehicle with the vehicle key. vehicle is being unlocked.
When the driver walks away from the unlocked ▷ If pathway lighting is activated during locking.
vehicle with the vehicle key, the vehicle will be ▷ If the exterior mirrors are automatically folded
locked. out and in when the vehicle is unlocked and
locked.
General information
The vehicle will be unlocked when an authorized Functional requirements
vehicle key is detected in the unlocking zone. ▷ The drive-ready state must be turned off.
The unlocking zone is located within a radius of ▷ Unlocking: when entering the unlocking zone,
approx. 3 ft/1 m around the door handles. the doors and trunk lid must be closed.
The vehicle will be locked when the vehicle key ▷ Locking: when leaving the locking zone, the
leaves the locking zone. doors and trunk lid must be closed.
The locking zone is located within a radius of ap‐ ▷ For touchless locking of the vehicle, no sec‐
prox. 7 ft/2 m around the door handles. ond vehicle key can be located in a radius of
If the vehicle key is located in the unlocking zone six meters around the vehicle.
for an extended period of time without move‐ ▷ If the vehicle has been in the idle state for
ment, the vehicle will be locked automatically. several days, touchless unlocking/locking is
If a passenger is detected in the front passenger not possible until after the vehicle has been
seat during locking and the safety belt of the driven.
front passenger is engaged in the safety belt
buckle during locking: Malfunction
▷ The vehicle will be locked but not secured Vehicle key detection by the vehicle may mal‐
against theft. function under the following circumstances:
▷ The fuel filler flap remains unlocked. ▷ The battery of the vehicle key is discharged.
The behavior of the vehicle during touchless un‐ For replacing the battery, refer to page 83.
locking/locking depends on the following set‐
▷ Fault of the radio link from transmission tow‐
tings:
ers or other equipment with high transmitting
▷ If the automatic unlocking is active. power.
▷ If the automatic locking is active. ▷ Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal ob‐
▷ If only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap jects.
or all access to the vehicle will be unlocked.
Only driver's door and fuel filler flap: the driv‐
er's door and fuel filler flap will only be un‐
95
Do not transport the vehicle key together with

metal objects. NOTICE
▷ Fault of the radio link from mobile phones or During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and
other electronic devices in direct proximity to up. There is a risk of damage to property,
the vehicle key. among other potential damage. Make sure that
Do not carry the vehicle key in close proximity the area of movement of the trunk lid is clear
to other electronic devices. during opening and closing.
Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the locking
request detection on the door handles.
Opening and Closing
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock the
vehicle using the buttons of the vehicle key or Opening from the outside
use the integrated key.
Integrated key, refer to page 89.
Trunk lid
General information
do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area. ▷ Unlock the vehicle and then press the button
Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐ on the outer side of the trunk lid.
try version, it is possible to specify whether the ▷ With Comfort Access: carry the vehicle key
trunk lid can be unlocked with the vehicle key with you and press the button on the outer
and how the vehicle doors will respond to this. side of the trunk lid.
With automatic transmission: selector lever posi‐ ▷ Press and hold the button on the ve‐
tion P must be engaged to open the trunk lid hicle key for approx. 1 second.
with the vehicle key.
When unlocking with the vehicle key, the
It may not be possible to open the trunk lid when doors may also be unlocked.
the vehicle is in valet parking mode.
Additional information: Open from inside
Valet parking mode, refer to page 97. Press the button in the storage compart‐
ment of the driver's door.
Safety information
Warning
trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
96
Closing ▷ The volume of the audio system is limited.

▷ The integrated Universal Remote Control is
deactivated.
▷ DSC cannot be switched off.
▷ Depending on the vehicle, the trunk lid can
be locked and disconnected from the central
locking system.
▷ At least one driver profile has been created.
Grasp the recess grips and pull the trunk lid
down. ▷ A driver profile or the guest profile is active.
▷ At least one driver profile has an assigned
ConnectedDrive account.
Trunk emergency unlocking
Accessing the menu for the valet
parking mode
Via the switch-off screen

After switching off drive-ready state the switch-
off screen will be displayed. Select the entry for
the valet parking mode on the switch-off screen.
Via the display bar at the upper edge

Pull the handle inside the cargo area. of the Control Display
The trunk lid unlocks. 1. Tip the Controller up.
2. "Valet parking mode"
Valet parking mode Via the vehicle settings

1. "CAR"
Principle 2. "Settings"
In the valet parking mode, the Control Display is 3. "General settings"
disabled. The operation via iDrive is no longer
possible. 4. "Valet parking mode"
E.g., this mode can be used when the vehicle is

handed over for valet parking.
Activating the valet parking
mode
General information
General information
In the valet parking mode, it is not possible to
change vehicle settings via iDrive. Personal pro‐ Before activating the valet parking mode, a PIN
files cannot be changed. Personal data cannot must be set up to be able to deactivate the valet
be displayed. parking mode at a future time.
Additionally, the following actions are carried out:
97
The procedure for entering the PIN varies de‐ The deactivation of the valet parking mode de‐
pending on the active driver profile. pends on which driver profile is selected on the
lock screen.
Driver profile with PIN
A PIN has been stored for the active driver pro‐ Driver profile with PIN
file. Regardless of which driver activated the valet
It is not necessary to enter another PIN. parking mode, a driver can deactivate the valet
parking mode by entering his/her PIN.
1. "Lock tailgate as well"
1. Select driver profile.
The trunk lid will be locked and disconnected
from the central locking system. 2. Enter the assigned PIN for the driver profile.
2. "Activate now" If you forgot the PIN, the valet parking mode
must be deactivated by entering the assigned
Driver profile without PIN ConnectedDrive access data.
A PIN must be assigned to the driver profile.

Driver profile without PIN
1. "PIN" The valet parking mode was activated by another
2. Enter PIN. person. To deactivate the valet parking mode, a
3. "Lock tailgate as well" driver without a PIN has to enter the access data
for his ConnectedDrive account.
4. "Activate linkage"
5. "Activate now" 1. Select driver profile.
2. Enter the ConnectedDrive access data as‐
Guest profile signed to the driver profile.
The guest profile is the active driver profile.
Guest profile
A PIN must be entered.
In the guest profile, the valet parking mode can
1. "PIN" only be deactivated if the valet parking mode was
2. Enter PIN. activated in the guest profile.
3. "Lock tailgate as well" 1. Select guest profile.
The trunk lid will be locked and disconnected 2. Enter the PIN that was specified during acti‐
from the central locking system. vation.
4. "Activate now" If the PIN has been forgotten, the valet parking
This PIN can be used once to deactivate the mode must be deactivated via a personal driver
valet parking mode for the active guest pro‐ profile.
file.
Deactivating valet parking mode Settings

General information General information
The lock screen of the valet parking mode is dis‐ Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐
played on the Control Display. try version, various settings for opening and clos‐
ing are possible.
98
These settings are stored for the driver profile Automatic unlocking
currently used. 1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Unlocking and locking
Doors 4. Select the desired setting:
1. "CAR" 5. ▷ "Unlock doors when in Park"
2. "Settings" ▷ "Unlock at end of trip"
3. "Key button settings" After drive-ready state is switched off by
4. Select the icon. pressing the Start/Stop button, the locked
vehicle is automatically unlocked.
▷ "Driver's door only" Automatic locking
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler 1. "CAR"
flap are unlocked. Pressing again unlocks
2. "Settings"
the entire vehicle.
▷ "All doors"
4. "Lock in a few minutes"
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
The vehicle locks automatically after a while if
Confirmation signals from the no door is opened after unlocking.
vehicle
Trunk lid
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings" Trunk lid and doors
3. "Doors/ vehicle access" You can set up if only the trunk lid will be un‐
4. Deactivate or activate the desired confirma‐ locked or if the doors will also be unlocked when
tion signals: the trunk lid is unlocked
▷ "Flash when locking/unlocking" Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐
Unlocking is signaled by blinking twice, try version, this setting may not be offered.
locking by blinking once. 1. "CAR"
▷ With alarm system: 2. "Settings"
"Sound when locking/unlocking" 3. "Key button settings"
Unlocking is confirmed with two sound 4. Select the icon.
signals, locking is confirmed with one
The text next to the icon indicates the current
sound signal.
setting.
Folding mirrors in automatically 5. Select the desired setting:
1. "CAR" ▷ "Tailgate"
2. "Settings" Depending on the equipment, the trunk
lid will be unlocked or opened.
▷ "Tailgate and door(s)"
4. "Fold mirrors in when locked"
99
Depending on the equipment, the trunk ▷ Disconnected battery voltage.

lid will be unlocked or opened and the ▷ Improper use of the socket for OBD Onboard
doors are unlocked. Diagnosis.
▷ "Tailgate opens only when vehicle is ▷ Locking the vehicle while a device is con‐
unlocked." nected to the socket for the OBD Onboard-
The vehicle must be unlocked before the Diagnosis.
trunk lid can be used with the vehicle key. The alarm system signals these changes visually
▷ "Lock tailgate button" and acoustically:
The operation of the trunk lid via the vehi‐ ▷ Acoustic alarm:
cle key is disabled. Depending on local regulations, the acoustic
alarm may be suppressed.
Comfort Access ▷ Visual alarm:
By flashing of the hazard warning system and
Touchless locking and unlocking
headlights, where required.
Contactless locking and unlocking can be
Do not modify the system to ensure function of
switched on or off.
the alarm system.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings" Turning on/off
3. "Doors/ vehicle access" The alarm system is switched on or off as soon
4. "Comfort access" as the vehicle is locked with the vehicle key or
unlocked or locked via Comfort Access.
Establishing idle state after
Opening the doors with the alarm
opening the front doors
system switched on
1. "CAR"
The alarm system is triggered when a door is
2. "Settings" opened if the door was unlocked using the
3. "Doors/ vehicle access" integrated key in the door lock.
4. "Turn off vehicle after opening door"
Idle state, refer to page 40. Opening the trunk lid with the
alarm system switched on
The trunk lid can be opened even when the
Alarm system alarm system is switched on.
After the trunk lid is closed, it is locked and moni‐
General information tored again provided the doors are locked. The
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm hazard warning system flashes once.
system reacts to the following changes:
▷ Opening a door, the hood or the trunk lid. Panic mode
▷ Movements in the car's interior. You can trigger the alarm system if you find your‐
self in a dangerous situation.
▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, for instance, dur‐
ing attempts at stealing a wheel or when tow‐
ing the vehicle.
100
▷ Press the button on the vehicle key Interior motion sensor

and hold for at least 3 seconds.
The windows and the glass sunroof must be
▷ Briefly press the button on the vehicle key closed for the system to function properly.
three times in succession.
To switch off the alarm: press any button. Avoiding unintentional alarms
Indicator light on the interior General information

mirror The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
can trigger an alarm, although no unauthorized
action occurred.
Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:
▷ In automatic car washes.
▷ In duplex garages.
▷ During transport on trains carrying vehicles, at
sea or on a trailer.
▷ With animals in the vehicle.
▷ When the vehicle is locked after start of fuel‐
▷ The indicator light flashes briefly every 2 sec‐
ing.
onds:
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion sen‐
The alarm system is switched on.
sor can be switched off in such situations.
▷ Indicator light flashes for approx. 10 seconds,
then it flashes briefly every 2 seconds: Switching off the tilt alarm sensor
Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
are not active, as doors, hood, or trunk lid are
Press the button on the vehicle key within
not correctly closed. Correctly closed access
10 seconds as soon as the vehicle is
points are secured.
locked.
When the still open access points are closed,
The indicator light lights up for approx. 2 sec‐
the interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sen‐
onds and then continues to flash.
sor will be switched on.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
▷ The indicator light goes out after unlocking:
are switched off until the vehicle is locked again.
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
▷ The indicator light flashes after unlocking un‐
til drive-ready state is switched on, but no
Ending the alarm
longer than approx. 5 minutes: ▷ Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key.
An alarm has been triggered. ▷ Unlock the vehicle with the integrated key
and activate the drive-ready state via emer‐
gency detection of the vehicle key.
Tilt alarm sensor
Malfunction, refer to page 84.
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
▷ With Comfort Access: when carrying the ve‐
The alarm system responds in situations such as hicle key, grasp the driver's door or front pas‐
attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehicle is senger door handle completely.
towed.
101
Power windows Functional requirements

The windows can be operated under the follow‐
ing conditions.
General information
The windows can be opened with the vehicle
key from the outside as well as closed with Com‐ ▷ Drive readiness is switched on.
fort Access. The vehicle key must be in the car's interior.
With Comfort Access: The windows can be
closed from the outside via Comfort Access. Opening
When a window is often opened in the same po‐ ▷ Press the switch to the resistance
sition, this task can be performed by the BMW point.
Intelligent Personal Assistant. For instance when The window opens while the switch is being
the same parking garage is frequently used. held.
Additional information: ▷ Press the switch beyond the resist‐
▷ Vehicle key, refer to page 80. ance point.
▷ BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, refer to The window opens automatically. Pressing
page 51. the switch again stops the motion.
Safety information Closing

▷ Pull the switch to the resistance
Warning point.
When operating the windows, body parts and The window closes while the switch is being
objects can be jammed. There is a risk of injury held.
or risk of damage to property. Make sure that ▷ Pull the switch beyond the resist‐
the area of movement of the windows is clear ance point.
during opening and closing. The window closes automatically if the door
is closed. Pulling again stops the motion.
Overview
Jam protection system
Principle
The jam protection prevents objects or body
parts becoming jammed between the door frame
and window while a window is being closed.
General information
If resistance or a blockage is detected while a
window is being closed, the closing action is in‐
Power windows terrupted.
Safety switch
102
Safety information Glass sunroof

Warning General information
Accessories on the windows such as antennas The glass sunroof and the sun protection are op‐
can impact jam protection. There is a risk of in‐ erated using the same switch.
jury. Do not install accessories in the area of
The glass sunroof can be opened from the out‐
movement of the windows.
side with the vehicle key and also closed with
Comfort Access.
Closing without the jam protection With Comfort Access: The glass sunroof can be
system closed from the outside via Comfort Access.
In case of danger from the outside or if ice might
prevent normal closing, proceed as follows: Safety information
1. Pull the switch past the resistance Warning

point and hold it there. Body parts can be jammed when operating the
The window closes with limited jam protec‐ glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury. Make
tion. If the closing force exceeds a specific sure that the area of movement of the glass
threshold, closing is interrupted. sunroof is clear during opening and closing.
2. Pull the switch past the resistance

point again within approx. 4 seconds and hold Overview
it there.
The window closes without jam protection.
Safety switch
Principle
The safety switch can be used to prevent chil‐
dren, for instance from opening and closing the
rear windows using the switches in the rear.
If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the Opening/closing the glass sun‐
safety function is switched off automatically. roof.
Turning on/off
Press the button.
The LED lights up if the safety function Functional requirements
is switched on.
The glass sunroof and the sun protection can be
operated under the following conditions.
▷ Drive readiness is switched on.
103
The vehicle key must be in the car's interior. Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
Lifting/closing glass sunroof Opening/closing the glass

Push switch briefly upward. sunroof and sun protection
▷ The closed glass sunroof tilts together
and the sun protection opens
▷ Briefly press out the switch
slightly.
twice in succession toward
▷ The opened glass sunroof the rear past the resistance
closes until it is in the tilted point.
position. The sun protection
The glass sunroof and sun
does not move.
protection are opening to‐
▷ The tilted glass sunroof closes. gether.
Pressing the switch again
Opening/closing the glass stops the motion.
sunroof and sun protection ▷ Briefly press out the switch twice in succes‐
separately sion toward the front past the resistance
point.
▷ Slide switch back to the resist‐
ance point and hold. The glass sunroof and sun protection are
closing together.
Holding down the switch
opens the sun protection. If Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
the sun protection is already
fully open, the glass sunroof Comfort position
opens.
In some models, the wind noises in the car's in‐
▷ Slide switch forward to the resistance point terior are lowest when the glass sunroof is not
and hold. fully open. In these models, the automatic func‐
The glass sunroof closes while the switch is tion initially only opens the glass sunroof up to
being held. If the glass sunroof is already this comfort position.
closed or in the tilted position, the sun pro‐ Pressing the switch again opens the glass sun‐
tection closes. roof fully.
▷ Slide the switch back past the resistance
point. Jam protection system
The sun protection opens automatically. If the
sun protection is already fully open, the glass Concept
sunroof opens automatically. The jam protection prevents objects or body
Pressing the switch again stops the motion. parts from becoming jammed between the roof
▷ Push the switch forward past the resistance and glass sunroof while the glass sunroof is clos‐
point. ing.
The glass sunroof closes automatically. If the
glass sunroof is already closed or in the tilted
General information
position, the sun protection closes automati‐ If a resistance or blockage is detected while the
cally. glass sunroof is closing, the closing operation is
104
interrupted once the roof reaches the half-open Initializing after a power
position, or it is stopped when closing from the interruption
tilted position.
General information
Closing from the open position
After a power interruption during the opening or
without jam protection
closing process, the glass sunroof can only be
In case of danger from the outside or if icing operated to a limited extent. Initializing the sys‐
might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol‐ tem can help in this case.
lows:
The system can be initialized under the following
conditions:
▷ The vehicle is parked in a horizontal position.
▷ The vehicle will not be moved until the initiali‐
zation is completed.
1. Close all doors. ▷ The drive-ready state is established.
2. Push the switch forward past the resistance ▷ The outside temperature is above 41 ℉/5 ℃.
point and hold. During initialization, the glass sunroof closes
The glass sunroof closes with limited jam without jam protection.
protection. If the closing force exceeds a spe‐ Make sure that the closing path is clear.
cific threshold, closing is interrupted.
3. Push the switch forward again past the resist‐ Initializing the system
ance point and hold until the glass sunroof
Press the switch up and hold it
closes without jam protection. Make sure that
until the initialization is complete:
the closing path is clear.
Closing from the lifted position

without jam protection Initialization begins within 15 seconds.
In case of danger from the outside or if icing
▷ If the glass sunroof is closed, it opens then
might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol‐
closes again.
lows:
▷ If the glass sunroof is open, it first closes,
then opens and closes again.
Initialization is complete once the glass sunroof
and sun protection have opened then closed
again.
1. Close all doors.
2. Push the switch forward past the resistance
point and hold.
105
CONTROLS Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

Vehicle features and Seats
options
Safety information
Warning
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due Seat setting while driving can lead to unex‐
to the selected options or country versions. This pected movements of the seat. Vehicle control
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ could be lost. There is a risk of accident. Only
tems. When using these functions and systems, adjust the seat on the driver's side when the
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ vehicle is stationary.
served.
Warning
Sitting safely With a backrest inclined too far to the rear, the
protective effect of the safety belt can no lon‐
An ideal seat position that meets the needs of ger be ensured. There is a risk of sliding under
the occupants can make a vital contribution to the safety belt in an accident. There is a risk of
relaxed, fatigue-free driving. injury or danger to life. Adjust the seat prior to
In the event of an accident, the correct seat posi‐ starting the trip. Adjust the backrest so that it is
tion plays an important role. Follow the informa‐ in the most upright position as possible and do
tion in the following chapters. not adjust again while driving.
▷ Seats, refer to page 106.
Warning
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 108.
There is a risk of jamming when moving the
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 110.
seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
▷ Airbags, refer to page 170. to property. Make sure that the area of move‐
ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐
ment.
Electrically adjustable seats
General information
The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored for
the driver profile currently used. When a driver
profile is selected, the stored position is called up
automatically.
106
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel CONTROLS
The current seat position can be stored using Seat tilt

the memory function.
Overview
Tilt switch up or down.
Backrest tilt
1 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt
2 Backrest tilt
3 Backrest width
4 Lumbar support
Longitudinal direction
Tilt switch forward or backward.
Thigh support
Sport seat
Press switch forward or backward.
Height
Pull the lever at the front of the seat and push

the thigh support forward or back.
Press switch up or down.
107
Lumbar support Safety belts

Principle
General information
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar region The vehicle is fitted with five safety belts to en‐
of the spine. The lower back and the spine are sure occupant safety. However, they can only
supported for upright sitting position. unfold their protective effect when adjusted cor‐
rectly.
Adjusting Always make sure that safety belts are being
worn by the occupants before driving off. The
▷ Press the front/rear section of airbags supplement the safety belts as an addi‐
the button: tional safety device. The airbags do not replace
The curvature is increased/ safety belts.
decreased. All belt fastening points are designed to achieve
▷ Press the upper/lower section the best possible protective effect of the safety
of the button: belts with proper use of the safety belts and cor‐
The curvature is shifted up/ rect seat setting. Notes on sitting safely, refer to
down. page 106.
The two outer safety belt buckles of the rear
seats are intended for the persons sitting on the
Backrest width left and right.
The center safety belt buckle of the rear seats is
Principle
intended for the person sitting in the middle.
Adjusting the backrest width may improve lateral
support when taking corners.
Safety information
General information
The backrest width is changed by adjusting the Warning
side sections of the backrest. Use of a safety belt to buckle more than one
person will potentially defeat the ability of the
Adjusting safety belt to serve its protective function.
There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Do not
▷ Press the front section of the
allow more than one person to wear a single
button:
safety belt. Infants and children are not allowed
The backrest width de‐ on an occupant's lap, but must be transported
creases. and secured in designated child restraint sys‐
▷ Press the rear section of the tems.
button:
The backrest width increases.
Warning
The protective effect of safety gear, including
safety belts, can be limited or lost when safety
belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly
fastened safety belt can cause additional inju‐
ries, for instance in the event of an accident,
108
braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of ▷ Avoid thick clothing.

injury or danger to life. Make sure that all occu‐ ▷ Re-tighten the safety belt frequently upward
pants are wearing safety belts correctly. around your upper body.
Buckling the safety belt

Warning
1. Guide the safety belt slowly over shoulder
With a rear backrest that is not locked, the pro‐ and hip to put it on.
tective effect of the middle safety belt is not
2. Insert the tongue plate into the safety belt
guaranteed. There is a risk of injury or danger
buckle. The safety belt buckle must engage
to life. If you are using the middle safety belt,
audibly.
lock the wider rear seat backrest.
Warning
The protective effect of safety gear, including
safety belts, may not be fully functional or fail in
the following situations:
▷ The safety belts or safety belt buckles are
damaged, soiled, or changed in any other
way.
▷ Seat belt tensioners or belt retractors Unbuckling the safety belt
were modified. 1. Hold the safety belt firmly.
Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged in 2. Press the red button in the safety belt buckle.
the event of an accident. There is a risk of injury
3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll-up
or danger to life. Do not modify safety belts,
mechanism.
safety belt buckles, seat belt tensioners, belt
retractors or belt anchors and keep them clean.
Have the safety belts checked after an accident Middle safety belt in the rear
at the dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop. Buckling the safety belt
Correct use of safety belts

▷ Wear the safety belt twist-free and tight to
your body over your lap and shoulders.
▷ Wear the safety belt deep on your hips over
your lap. The safety belt may not press on
your stomach.
▷ Do not rub the safety belt against sharp
edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard or 1. Release the buckle tongue from the fixture on
fragile objects. the rear shelf.
2. Pull the upper latch plate out of the gap of the
strap outlet.
109
3. Insert the lower buckle tongue in the belt Safety belt reminder for rear
lock, arrow 1. seats
4. Insert the upper buckle tongue in the seat
belt buckle, arrow 2. General information
The seat belt buckles must engage audibly. The safety belt reminder is automatically acti‐
vated each time the engine starts.
Unbuckling the safety belt The safety belt reminder is also activated when a
1. Hold the safety belt firmly. passenger unbuckles a rear seat safety belt dur‐
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle. ing the trip.
3. Open the belt lock, arrow 2, with the buckle
tongue, arrow 1. Display in the instrument cluster
The indicator light in the instrument cluster illu‐
minates after the engine is started.
The displays may vary depending on the equip‐
ment version and country variant.
Icon Description
Green: the safety belt is buckled

on the corresponding rear seat.
4. Guide the safety belt to the fixture on the rear

shelf.
Red: the safety belt is not buck‐
Safety belt reminder for driver's led on the corresponding rear
seat and front passenger seat seat.
General information
The safety belt reminder is issued when the driv‐
er's safety belt is not buckled.
The safety belt reminder is also active when the Front head restraints
front passenger seat belt is not buckled or ob‐
jects are on the front passenger seat.
Safety information
The safety belt reminder is also activated when a
passenger unbuckles a safety belt during the trip.
Warning
Display in the instrument cluster Removal or incorrect adjustment of head re‐
straints can cause injuries in the head and neck
The indicator light lights up and a signal
area. There is a risk of injury.
sounds. Make sure that the safety belts
are positioned correctly. The safety belt
reminder can also be activated if objects are
placed on the front passenger seat.
110
▷ Before driving, install the removed head Adjusting the height

restraints on the occupied seats.
▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center sup‐
ports the back of the head at as close to
eye level as possible.
▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐
straint is as close as possible to the back
of the head. Adjust the distance via the
backrest tilt as needed.
▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push

Warning
the head restraint down.
Body parts can be jammed when moving the
▷ To raise: push the head restraint up.
head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement is clear when After setting the height, make sure that the head
moving the head restraint. restraint engages correctly.
Adjusting the height: M sport

Warning seat
Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro‐ The height of the head restraints cannot be set.
tective effect in the head and neck area. There
is a risk of injury. Adjusting the distance: M Sport
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers. seat
▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes The distance to the back of the head is adjusted
hangers, directly on the head restraint. via the backrest tilt.
▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐ Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is
termined to be safe for attachment to a as close as possible to the back of the head.
head restraint.
▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance Removing
pillows, while driving.
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
111
1. Raise the head restraint up against the resist‐

ance. Warning
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro‐
restraint out completely. tective effect in the head and neck area. There
is a risk of injury.
Removing: M Sport seat ▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
The head restraints cannot be removed. ▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes
hangers, directly on the head restraint.
Installing ▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐
Proceed in the reverse order to install the head termined to be safe for attachment to a
restraint. head restraint.
▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance
pillows, while driving.
Rear head restraints
Folding down the head restraints
Safety information
To improve the view to the rear, the head re‐
straints can be folded back. Only fold the head
Warning restraint back if no one will be sitting in the corre‐
Removal or incorrect adjustment of head re‐ sponding seat.
straints can cause injuries in the head and neck
area. There is a risk of injury.
▷ Before driving, install the removed head
restraints on the occupied seats.
▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center sup‐
ports the back of the head at as close to
eye level as possible.
▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐
straint is as close as possible to the back
of the head. Adjust the distance via the ▷ To the rear: press the button, arrow 1, and
backrest tilt as needed. fold the head restraint backward.
▷ Forward: fold the head restraint toward the
front as far as it will go. Make sure that the
Warning head restraint engages correctly.
Body parts can be jammed when moving the
head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement is clear when
moving the head restraint.
112
Adjusting the height After the installation, make sure that the head re‐
straint engages correctly.
Exterior mirrors
General information
The mirror on the front passenger side is more
curved than the driver's side mirror.
The mirror setting is stored for the driver profile
The height of the outer head restraints can be currently in use. When a driver profile is selected,
adjusted. the stored position is called up automatically.
▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push The current exterior mirror position can be stored
the head restraint down. using the memory function.
▷ To raise: push the head restraint up.
After setting the height, make sure that the head
Safety information
restraint engages correctly.
Warning
Removing Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than
they appear. The distance to the road users be‐
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
hind could be incorrectly estimated, for in‐
sitting in the seat in question.
stance while changing lanes. There is a risk of
1. Fold down the rear seat backrest in question. accident. Estimate the distance to the traffic
Enlarging the cargo area, refer to page 252. behind by looking over your shoulder.
2. Raise the head restraint up against the resist‐

ance.
Overview
3. Press the buttons, arrow 1, and pull the head
restraint out completely.
1 Adjusting
2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor
Installing 3 Folding in and out
For mounting, insert the head restraints in the
mounts and slide down until you feel the resist‐
ance.
113
Adjusting electrically Automatic dimming feature

Press the button. The exterior mirror on the driver's side is auto‐
matically dimmed. Photocells in the interior mir‐
The selected mirror moves along with the
ror are used to control this.
button movement.
Automatic Curb Monitor

Selecting a mirror
To change over to the other mirror: Principle
Slide the switch. If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on
the front passenger side is tilted downward. This
improves your view of the curb and other low-ly‐
Malfunction ing obstacles when parking, for instance.
In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the
mirror by pressing the edges of the mirror glass. Activating
Folding in and out 1. slide the switch to the driver's side

mirror position.
2. Engage selector lever position R.
NOTICE
Depending on the vehicle width, the vehicle Deactivating
can be damaged in car washes. There is a risk
Slide the switch to the front passenger's side
of damage to property, among other potential
mirror position.
damage. Before washing, fold in the mirrors by
hand or with the button.
Interior mirror, manually

Press the button.
dimmable
Folding is only possible up to a speed of approx.
15 mph/20 km/h.
Folding the mirrors in and out is helpful in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ In car washes.
▷ On narrow roads.
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐
matically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
Automatic heating To reduce the blinding effect of the interior mir‐

ror, flip the lever forward.
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated as
needed and when the drive-ready state is
switched on.
114
Interior mirror, automatic Manual steering wheel

adjustment
dimming feature
General information
The interior mirror is dimmed automatically.
Photocells are used for control:
▷ In the mirror glass.
▷ On the rear of the mirror.
Overview
1. Fold the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seat position.
3. Fold the lever back up.
Steering wheel heating
Overview
▷ Keep the photocells clean.
▷ Do not cover the area between the interior
mirror and the windshield.
Steering wheel
Button for steering wheel heating
Safety information
Turning on/off
Warning Press the button.
Steering wheel adjustments while driving can A Check Control message is displayed.
lead to unexpected steering wheel movements.
Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of If the trip is resumed within approx. 15 minutes
accident. Adjust the steering wheel while the after an intermediate stop, the steering wheel
vehicle is stationary only. heating turns on automatically if the function was
turned on at the completion of the last trip.
115
Memory function Overview
Principle
The following settings can be stored and, if nec‐
essary, retrieved using the memory function:
▷ Seat position.
▷ Exterior mirror position.
▷ Height of the Head-up Display.
General information The memory buttons are located on the front

doors.
Two memory locations with different settings
can be set for each driver profile.
The following settings are not stored: Storing
▷ Backrest width. 1. Set the desired position.
▷ Lumbar support.
2. Press the button. The writing on the
button lights up.
Safety information
3. Press desired button 1 or 2 while the LED is
lit. A signal sounds.
Warning
Using the memory function while driving can Calling up settings
lead to unexpected seat or steering wheel
Press the desired button 1 or 2.
movements. Vehicle control could be lost.
There is a risk of accident. Only retrieve the The stored position is called up.
memory function when the vehicle is stationary. The procedure stops when a switch for setting
the seat is pressed or one of the memory but‐
tons is pressed again.
Warning The adjustment of the seat position on the driv‐
There is a risk of jamming when moving the er's side is interrupted after a short time while
seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage driving.
to property. Make sure that the area of move‐
ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐
ment.
116
Seat heating General information

The outside temperature at which the functions
are to be automatically activated can be set via
Overview
iDrive.
Activation is performed if the outside tempera‐
ture exceeds or falls below the set temperature
in the first few minutes after drive-ready state
has been switched on. A new alignment is car‐
ried out after the settings have been changed.
Depending on the equipment package, the fol‐
lowing functions can be automatically activated:
▷ Seat heating.
Seat heating ▷ Steering wheel heating

If the trip is continued within approx. 15 minutes
after a stop, the functions are activated automati‐
Turning on cally with the levels that were last selected.
Press the button once for each temper‐

ature level.
Drive-ready state is switched on.
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
Activate/deactivate
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 minutes 1. "CAR"
after a stop, seat heating is switched on auto‐
2. "Settings"
matically with the temperature selected last.
3. "Climate control"
When ECO PRO is activated, the heating output
is reduced. 4. If necessary, "Automate habits"
Additional information: 5. Select the desired function.
ECO PRO, refer to page 262. 6. Activate the desired rule.
7. Set the level.
Turning off
Press and hold the button, until the
LEDs turn off.
Climate control rules

Principle
Depending on the equipment, some heating and
cooling functions can be automatically activated
depending on the outside temperature.
117
CONTROLS Transporting children safely
Transporting children safely

Vehicle features and
Warning
options A heated vehicle may result in death to per‐
sons, especially children, or animals. There is a
risk of injury or danger to life. Do not leave per‐
sons, especially children, or animals unattended
in the vehicle.
tems. When using these functions and systems, Warning
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ Exposure to intense sunlight can cause child
served. restraint systems and their components to be‐
come very hot. Persons may sustain burn inju‐
ries when touching the hot components. There
The right place for children is a risk of injury. Do not expose the child re‐
straint system to direct sunlight or cover where
necessary. If necessary, let the child restraint
Safety information
system cool down before transporting a child.
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle.
Warning
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger Transport children in the rear
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the seat
following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. General information
▷ Releasing the parking brake. Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is in the rear seat.
dows. Children younger than 13 years of age or shorter
than 5 ft/150 cm should be transported in the
rear seat in suitable child restraint systems de‐
▷ Using vehicle equipment. signed for the age, weight and size of the child.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not Children 13 years of age or older must wear a
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint
hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐ system can no longer be used due to their age,
ing and lock the vehicle. weight, or size.
118
Transporting children safely CONTROLS
Safety information Installing child restraint

systems
Warning
The safety belt cannot be fastened correctly on
General information
children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm without suita‐
ble additional child restraint systems. The pro‐ Pay attention to the specifications and the oper‐
tective effect of safety gear, including safety ating and safety information of the child restraint
belts, can be limited or lost when safety belts system manufacturer when selecting, installing,
are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened and using child restraint systems.
safety belt can cause additional injuries, for in‐
stance in the event of an accident, braking or Safety information
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury or
danger to life. Secure children shorter than 5 ft,
Warning
150 cm using suitable child restraint systems.
The protective effect of child restraint systems
and their fastening systems which have been
Children on the front passenger damaged or exposed to an accident can be lim‐
ited or lost. A child cannot be properly re‐
seat
strained in the event of an accident, braking or
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury or
General information
danger to life.
Before using a child restraint system on the front
Do not use child restraint systems which have
passenger seat, ensure that the front, knee, and
been damaged or exposed to an accident.
side airbags on the front passenger side are de‐
activated. If a child restraint system and its fastening sys‐
tem has been damaged or exposed to an acci‐
dent, have these systems checked and re‐
For automatic deactivation of front passenger placed by the dealer's service center or another
airbags, refer to page 173. qualified service center or repair shop.
Safety information
Warning
Warning The stability of the child restraint system is lim‐
Active front passenger airbags can injure a child ited or compromised with incorrect seat setting
in a child restraint system when the airbags are or improper installation of the child seat. There
activated. There is a risk of injury. Make sure is a risk of injury or danger to life. Make sure
that the front passenger airbags are deacti‐ that the child restraint system fits securely
vated and that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF against the backrest. If possible, adjust the
indicator light lights up. backrest tilt for all affected backrests and cor‐
rectly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats
and backrests are securely engaged or locked.
If possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
straints or remove them.
119
On the front passenger seat Child seat security
Deactivating airbags
Warning
Active front passenger airbags can injure a child
in a child restraint system when the airbags are
activated. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
that the front passenger airbags are deacti‐
vated and that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
indicator light lights up. The safety belts in the rear and the front passen‐
ger safety belt can be permanently locked to fas‐
Before installing a child restraint system in the ten child restraint systems.
front passenger seat, make sure that the front,
knee and side airbags on the front passenger
Locking the safety belt
side are deactivated.
1. Pull out the belt strap completely.
2. Secure the child restraint system with the
For automatic deactivation of front passenger
safety belt.
airbags, refer to page 173.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and pull it
tight against the child restraint system. The
Seat position and height
safety belt is disabled.
After installing a child restraint system, move the
front passenger seat as far back as it will go and,
Unlocking the safety belt
if possible, bring it up to the highest position.
This seat position and height ensure the best 1. Unbuckle the safety belt buckle.
possible position for the belt and offers optimal 2. Remove the child restraint system.
protection in the event of an accident. 3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com‐
If the upper attachment point of the safety belt is pletely.
located in front of the belt guide of the child seat,
move the front passenger seat carefully forward
until the best possible belt guide position is LATCH child seat
reached. mountings
Backrest width
General information
Adjustable backrest width: before installing a
child restraint system in the front passenger seat, LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Children.
open the backrest width completely. Do not Pay attention to the specifications and the oper‐
change the backrest width again and do not call ating and safety information from the child re‐
up a memory position. straint system manufacturer when selecting, in‐
stalling, and using LATCH child restraint fixing
systems.
120
Mounts for the lower LATCH Position

anchors
Icon Meaning
General information The corresponding icon shows
The lower anchors may be used to attach the the mounts for the lower
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child LATCH anchors.
and CRS weight of 65 lbs/30 kg when the child is Seats equipped with lower
restrained by the internal harnesses. mountings are marked with a
pair, (2), of LATCH symbols.
Safety information For vehicles equipped with a
middle seat:
Warning It is not recommended to use
If the LATCH child restraint fixing systems are the inner lower mountings of
not correctly engaged, the protective effect of standard outer LATCH positions
the LATCH child restraint fixing system is lim‐ to fasten a child restraint system
ited. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. on the middle seat. Use the ve‐
Make sure that the lower mountings are se‐ hicle safety belt instead for the
curely engaged and that the LATCH child re‐ middle seat.
straint fixing system fits securely against the
backrest. Before installing LATCH child
restraint fixing systems
Pull the safety belt away from the area of the
Warning
child seat mountings.
The attachment points for child restraint sys‐
tems in the vehicle are intended for attaching Assembly of LATCH child
child restraint systems only. When other ob‐
jects are mounted, the attachment points can
restraint fixing systems
be damaged. There is a risk of injury or risk of 1. Install child restraint system, see manufactur‐
damage to property. Attach only child restraint er's information.
systems at the corresponding attachment 2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
points. erly engaged.
121
Child restraint systems Attachment points

with tether strap Icon Meaning
The respective icon shows the

Safety information attachment point for the upper
retaining strap. Seats with an
Warning upper top tether are marked
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly used with this icon. It is located on the
for the child restraint system, the protective ef‐ rear seat backrest, the rear shelf
fect is reduced. There is a risk of injury. Make or the rear seat.
sure that the upper retaining strap does not run
over sharp edges and is not twisted as it Routing the retaining strap
passes the upper anchor.
Rear seat
Warning
If the rear backrest is not locked, the protective
effect of the child restraint system is limited or
there is none. In certain situations, for instance
braking maneuvers or in case of an accident,
the rear backrest can fold forward. There is a
risk of injury or danger to life. Make sure that
the rear backrests are locked.
1 Driving direction
2 Head restraint
Warning
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
The attachment points for child restraint sys‐
tems in the vehicle are intended for attaching 4 Attachment point
child restraint systems only. When other ob‐ 5 Rear shelf
jects are mounted, the attachment points can 6 Seat backrest
be damaged. There is a risk of injury or risk of
7 Upper retaining strap
damage to property. Attach only child restraint
systems at the corresponding attachment
points. Attaching the upper retaining
strap to the attachment point
Rear seat
1. Open the attachment point cover.
2. Raise the head restraint.
3. Guide the upper retaining strap between the
supports or along both sides of the head re‐
straint to the attachment point.
122
For the middle seat in the second row of Safety switch for the rear
seats, guide it over or along both sides of the
head restraint to the anchor where applicable. Press the button on the driver's door.
4. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the

This disables various functions so that they can‐
attachment point.
not be operated from the rear.
5. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it down.
6. Lower and engage head restraints as
Safety switch, refer to page 103.
needed.
Locking the doors and

windows in the rear
General information
In certain situations it may be advisable to secure
the rear doors and windows, for instance when
transporting children.
Doors
Unlock or lock the safety switch on the rear

doors with the integrated key.
Icon Function
Child safety latch is unlocked.
Child safety latch is locked.
The door can now be opened from the outside

only.
123
CONTROLS Driving
Driving
Vehicle features and Auto Start/Stop function
options
Principle
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.
cific and optional features offered with the series. The system switches off the engine during a
It also describes features and functions that are stop, for instance in traffic jam or at traffic lights.
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due Drive-ready state remains switched on. The en‐
to the selected options or country versions. This gine starts automatically for driving off.
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ Coasting, refer to page 265.
served.
General information
After each engine start using the Start/Stop but‐
Start/Stop button ton, the Auto Start/Stop function is ready. The
function is activated from speeds of approx.
Principle 3 mph/5 km/h.
Depending on the selected driving mode, the
Pressing the Start/Stop button
system is automatically activated or deactivated.
switches drive-ready state on or
off.
Steptronic transmission: the
Engine stop
drive-ready state is switched on
when you depress the brake pedal while press‐ Functional requirements
ing the Start/Stop button.
Pressing the Start/Stop button again switches
The engine is switched off automatically during a
the drive-ready state back off and standby state
stop under the following conditions:
is switched back on.
▷ The selector lever is in selector lever position
Additional information: D.
▷ Drive-ready state, refer to page 41. ▷ The brake pedal remains depressed while the
▷ Standby state, refer to page 41. vehicle is stationary or the vehicle is held by
Automatic Hold.
Driving away ▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the driv‐
1. Turn on drive readiness. er's door is closed.
2. Apply gear position.

Steptronic transmission: manual
3. Release the parking brake. engine stop
4. Drive away. If the engine was not switched off automatically
when the vehicle stopped, the engine can be
switched off manually:
124
Driving CONTROLS
▷ Depress the brake pedal forcefully again from Functional limitations

the current pedal position. The engine is not switched off automatically in
▷ Engage selector lever position P. the following situations:
When all functional preconditions are fulfilled, the ▷ In case of a steep downhill grade.
engine switches off. ▷ Brake not engaged strongly enough.
▷ The outside temperature is high and auto‐
Air conditioning system when the
matic climate control is running.
engine is switched off
▷ The car's interior has not yet been heated or
The air flow from the air conditioning system is
cooled to the required level.
reduced when the engine is switched off.
▷ Where there is a risk of window condensation
Displays in the instrument cluster when the automatic climate control is
switched on.
General information ▷ Engine or other parts not at operating tem‐
Instrument cluster with enhanced features: perature.
▷ Engine cooling is required.
The display in the instrument
cluster indicates that the Auto ▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the steer‐
Start/Stop function is ready for an ing wheel is being turned.
automatic engine start. ▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
▷ At higher elevations.
Instrument cluster without enhanced features: ▷ Hood is unlocked.
The display in the instrument ▷ The Automatic Parking Assistant is activated.
cluster indicates that the Auto
▷ Stop-and-go traffic.
Start/Stop function is ready for an
automatic engine start. ▷ Steptronic transmission: selector lever posi‐
tion in N or R.
▷ After driving in reverse.
The display indicates that the
conditions for an automatic en‐ ▷ Use of fuel with high ethanol content.
gine stop have not been met.
Starting the engine
Total time with switched-off engine
ECO PRO driving mode: depend‐ Steptronic transmission
ing on the vehicle equipment, the The engine starts automatically under the follow‐
total time that the engine has ing preconditions:
been switched off using the Auto ▷ By releasing the brake pedal.
Start/Stop function is displayed
▷ When Automatic Hold is activated: step on
on an automatic engine stop.
the accelerator pedal.
The total time can be reset via the trip data.
Driving off
After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.
ECO PRO, refer to page 262.
125
CONTROLS Driving
Safety mode adapt to various traffic situations in a proactive

After the engine switches off automatically, it will manner.
not start again automatically if any one of the fol‐ For instance, this applies to the following situa‐
lowing conditions are met: tions:
▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and the ▷ When a situation is detected in which the
driver's door is open. stopping time is expected to be very short,
▷ Hood was unlocked. the engine is not switched off automatically.
A message appears on the Control Display,
Some indicator lights light up for a varied length depending on the situation.
of time.
▷ When a situation is detected in which the ve‐
The engine can only be started via the Start/Stop hicle needs to drive off immediately, the en‐
button. gine is started automatically.
The function may be restricted if the navigation
System limits
data is invalid, outdated or not available, for ex‐
Even if driving off was not intended, the deacti‐ ample.
vated engine starts up automatically in the fol‐
lowing situations:
Activating/deactivating the
▷ In case of excessive warming of the interior system manually
when air conditioning is turned on.
▷ In case of excessive cooling of the interior Principle
when the heating is turned on.
The engine is not automatically switched off.
▷ In case of a risk of window condensation
The engine is started during an automatic engine
when the automatic climate control is turned
stop.
on.
▷ In case of a steering operation. Via button
▷ Steptronic transmission:
When changing from gear lever position D to
N or R.
▷ Steptronic transmission:
When changing from gear lever position P to
N, D, or R.
▷ In case of seriously discharged vehicle bat‐
tery.
▷ When starting an oil level measurement.
Press the button.
Additional functions Auto Start/
Stop Steptronic transmission: via
Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐ selector lever position
try-specific version, the vehicle features a variety
The Auto Start/Stop function is also deactivated
of sensors for assessing the traffic situation. The
in selector lever position M/S.
Auto Start/Stop function uses this information to
126
Driving CONTROLS
Via the Driving Dynamics Control Driving Dynamics Control

The Auto Start/Stop function is also deactivated
in SPORT driving mode of the Driving Dynamics
Control.
Principle
The Driving Dynamics Control influences the
Display driving dynamics properties of the vehicle.
▷ LED comes on: auto Start/Stop function is The vehicle can be adjusted depending on the
deactivated. situation using various driving modes.
▷ LED goes out: auto Start/Stop function is ac‐

tivated.
General information
The following systems are affected, for instance:
Switching off the vehicle during ▷ Engine characteristics.
an automatic engine stop ▷ Steptronic transmission.
▷ Adaptive chassis.
General information
▷ Steering.
During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle can
▷ Display in the instrument cluster.
be switched off permanently, for instance when
leaving it. ▷ Cruise control.
Steptronic transmission Overview

1. Press the Start/Stop button.
▷ Drive-ready state is switched off.
▷ Selector lever position P is engaged auto‐
matically.
Automatic deactivation
General information Displays in the instrument

In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop function cluster
is deactivated automatically for safety reasons, The selected driving mode is dis‐
for instance if no driver is detected. played in the instrument cluster.
Malfunction
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer switches
off the engine automatically. A Check Control
message is displayed. It is possible to continue
driving. Have the system checked by a dealer's
service center or another qualified service center
or repair shop.
127
CONTROLS Driving
Driving modes SPORT INDIVIDUAL

Buttons in the vehicle
Principle
In the SPORT INDIVIDUAL driving mode, individ‐
ual settings can be adjusted to support driving
dynamics properties.
Button Driving Configura‐ Configuration

mode tion
1. "CAR"
SPORT SPORT INDIVIDUAL 2. "Settings"
COMFORT COMFORT 3. "Driving mode"
4. "SPORT INDIVIDUAL"
ECO PRO ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL
When drive-ready state is switched on, the Reset SPORT INDIVIDUAL to the standard set‐
COMFORT driving mode is selected automati‐ tings:
cally. "Reset to SPORT STANDARD".
Driving modes in detail ECO PRO
COMFORT Concept
In ECO PRO drive mode, consumption is opti‐
Principle mized.
The COMFORT driving mode is a balanced set‐
ting between sporty and consumption optimized Turning on
driving.
Press the button repeatedly until ECO
PRO is displayed in the instrument clus‐
Turning on
ter.
Press the button repeatedly until COM‐
FORT is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL
Principle
SPORT In the ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL driving mode, indi‐
vidual settings can be adjusted to support an
Principle economical driving style.
The SPORT driving mode is a dynamic setting The engine control and comfort features, for in‐
for more agility with an optimized suspension. stance the climate control output, are adjusted.
Turning on Configuration
Press the button repeatedly until 1. "CAR"
SPORT is displayed in the instrument 2. "Settings"
cluster.
3. "Driving mode"
128
Driving CONTROLS
4. "ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL"

5. Select the desired setting. Warning
Reset ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL to the standard Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
settings: can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
"Reset to ECO PRO STANDARD".
following actions:
INDIVIDUAL configuration ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.

General information ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
The last individual configuration is activated di‐ dows.
rectly when the driving mode is called up again. ▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
Activating configuration of the drive
mode leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
Press the button for the desired drive mode sev‐ hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐
eral times. ing and lock the vehicle.
Parking brake Overview
Principle
The parking brake is used to prevent the vehicle
from rolling when it is parked.
Safety information
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
Parking brake
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐
ing.
Setting
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
With a stationary vehicle
Pull the switch.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
The LED lights up.
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
The indicator light in the instrument clus‐
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, ter illuminates red. The parking brake is
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a set.
wheel chock.
Depending on the stopping situation, the parking
brake is engaged automatically.
129
CONTROLS Driving
Steptronic transmission: in some parking situa‐ Steptronic transmission:

tions, the parking brake is automatically engaged, Automatic Hold
when selector lever position P is engaged. In
these cases, the parking brake is released auto‐
Principle
matically when you leave the selector lever posi‐
tion P. Automatic Hold assists the driver by automati‐
cally setting and releasing the brake, such as
While driving when moving in stop-and-go traffic.
The vehicle is automatically held in place when it
General information is stationary.
To use as emergency brake while driving. On uphill grades the system prevents the vehicle
from rolling back when driving off.
Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle
brakes hard while the switch is being
pulled.
General information
Under the following conditions, the parking brake
The indicator light in the instrument clus‐ is automatically engaged:
ter illuminates red, a signal sounds, and ▷ Drive-ready state is switched off.
the brake lights illuminate.
▷ The driver's door is opened while the vehicle
A Check Control message is displayed. is stationary.
The parking brake is engaged when the vehicle ▷ The moving vehicle is brought to a standstill
is stationary. using the parking brake.
Releasing Safety information
Releasing manually Warning

1. Turn on drive readiness. An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
2. Steptronic transmission: press the Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐
switch while the brake is pressed or selector ing.
lever position P is set. In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
The LED and indicator light turn off. against rolling away, follow the following:
The parking brake is released. ▷ Set the parking brake.
Automatic release turn the front wheels in the direction of the
The parking brake is released automatically curb.
when you drive away. ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
The LED and indicator light turn off. also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
wheel chock.
130
Driving CONTROLS
Establishing operational readiness

Warning of Automatic Hold
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle 1. Turn on drive readiness.
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the 2. Press the button.
following actions:
The LED lights up.
The indicator light lights up green.
Automatic Hold is functional.
After every vehicle restart, the last se‐
dows.
lected setting is active.
Automatic Hold holding the vehicle
Operational readiness is established and the
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
driver's door is closed.
ing and lock the vehicle. After the brake is applied, the vehicle is
kept from rolling as soon as the indicator
light illuminates green.
NOTICE
If the vehicle is stationary, Automatic Hold en‐ Driving off
gages the parking brake and prevents the vehi‐ Press the accelerator pedal to drive off.
cle from rolling in a car wash. There is a risk of
The brake is released automatically and the indi‐
damage to property, among other potential
cator light of the parking brake is no longer illumi‐
damage. Deactivate Automatic Hold prior to
nated.
entering the car wash.
Activating the parking brake

Overview automatically
The parking brake is automatically set if drive-
ready state is switched off while the vehicle is
being held by Automatic Hold or if the vehicle is
exited.
The indicator light changes from green
to red.
The parking brake is not set automatically, if the

drive-ready state is switched off, while the vehi‐
cle is coasting to a halt. Automatic Hold is deacti‐
Automatic Hold
vated.
Switching operational readiness off

Press the button.
131
CONTROLS Driving
The LED goes out. Blinking

The indicator light goes out.
Automatic Hold is switched off.

If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold,
press additionally on the brake pedal, when
switching off.
Malfunction
Press the lever past the resistance point.
If the parking brake fails or in case of a fault, se‐
cure the vehicle against rolling before exiting.
A Check Control message is displayed. Triple turn signal activation
Secure the vehicle against rolling away, for in‐ Lightly tap the lever up or down.
stance with a wheel chock, after exiting the vehi‐ The triple turn signal duration can be adjusted.
cle.
1. "CAR"
After a power interruption 2. "Settings"
To reestablish parking brake functionality after a 3. "Exterior lighting"
power interruption: 4. "One-touch turn signal"
1. Turn on standby state. 5. Select the desired setting.
2. Pull the switch while stepping on the Brief blinking

brake pedal or selector lever position P is set Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it
and then push. there for as long as you want the turn signal to
This process may take a few seconds. Some flash.
mechanical sounds associated with this process
are normal.
The indicator light is no longer illumi‐
High beams,
nated as soon as the parking brake is headlight flasher
ready for operation again.
Press the lever forward or pull it backward.
Turn signal
Turn signal in exterior mirror
When driving and during operation of the turn
signals or hazard warning system, do not fold in
the exterior mirrors, so that the signal lights on
the exterior mirror are easy to see.
▷ High beams on, arrow 1.
132
Driving CONTROLS
The high beams light up when the low beams Press the lever up until the desired position is
are switched on. reached.
▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2. ▷ Resting position of the wipers, position 0.
▷ Rain sensor, position 1.
▷ Normal wiper speed, position 2.
Window wiper system ▷ Fast wiper speed, position 3.
When the journey is interrupted with the window
General information wiper system turned on: when the journey con‐
Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry, as tinues, the wipers resume at their previous
this may damage the wiper blades or cause them speed.
to become worn more quickly.
Turn off the window wiper
Safety information system and flick wipe
Warning
If the wipers start moving in the folded away
state, body parts can be jammed or damage
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to property. Make
sure that the vehicle is switched off when the
wipers are in the folded away state and the wip‐
ers are folded in when switching on.
Press the lever down.
▷ Turn off: press the lever down until it reaches
NOTICE the 0 position.
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the ▷ Flick wipe: press the lever down from the 0
wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper mo‐ position.
tor can overheat when switching on. There is a The lever automatically returns to its 0 posi‐
risk of damage to property, among other poten‐ tion when released.
tial damage. Defrost the windshield prior to
switching the wipers on.
Rain sensor
Turn on window wiper system Principle

The rain sensor automatically controls the time
between wipes depending on the intensity of the
rainfall.
General information
The sensor is located on the windshield, directly
in front of the interior mirror.
133
CONTROLS Driving
Safety information Upward: high rain sensor sensitivity.

Downward: low rain sensor sensitivity.
NOTICE
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers can Windshield washer system
accidentally start moving in vehicle washes.
There is a risk of damage to property, among Safety information
other potential damage. Deactivate the rain
sensor in vehicle washes.
Warning
The washer fluid can freeze onto the window at
Activate rain sensor low temperatures and obstruct the view. There
is a risk of accident. Only use the washer sys‐
tems, if the washer fluid cannot freeze. Use
washer fluid with antifreeze, if needed.
NOTICE
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty, the
wash pump cannot work as intended. There is
a risk of damage to property, among other po‐
Press the lever up once from its 0 position, ar‐ tential damage. Do not use the washer system
row 1. when the washer fluid reservoir is empty.
Wiping operation is started.
The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated. Cleaning the windshield
In frosty conditions, wiping operation may not
start.
Deactivate rain sensor

Press the lever back into the 0 position.
Adjusting the rain sensor sensitivity
Pull the lever.

The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
shield and activates the wipers briefly.
Windshield washer nozzles

The windshield washer nozzles are automatically
heated while standby state is switched on.
Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the sensitivity of
the rain sensor.
134
Driving CONTROLS
Fold-away position of the wipers Folding out the wipers

1. Turn on standby state.
Principle 2. Press and hold the wiper lever down, until the
In the fold-out position, the wipers can be folded wipers stop in a close to vertical position.
out from the windshield, which is important, for
instance, when changing the wiper blades or for
folding away under frosty conditions.
Safety information
Warning
If the wipers start moving in the folded away
state, body parts can be jammed or damage
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk 3. Fold the wipers all the way out from the wind‐
of injury or risk of damage to property. Make shield.
sure that the vehicle is switched off when the
wipers are in the folded away state and the wip‐
ers are folded in when switching on.
NOTICE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the
wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper mo‐
tor can overheat when switching on. There is a
risk of damage to property, among other poten‐
tial damage. Defrost the windshield prior to Folding down the wipers
switching the wipers on. 1. Fold the wipers back down onto the wind‐
shield.
2. Switch on standby state and press and hold
the wiper lever down again.
Wipers return to their resting position and are
ready again for operation.
Principle
The Steptronic transmission combines the func‐
tions of an automatic transmission with the pos‐
sibility of manual shifting, if needed.
135
CONTROLS Driving
Safety information ▷ After the drive-ready state is switched off and

selector lever position R, D or M/S is en‐
gaged.
Warning
▷ After the standby state has been turned off
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and when selector lever position N is engaged.
▷ If the driver's safety belt is unbuckled, the
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐
driver's door is opened, and the brake pedal
ing, for instance with the parking brake.
is not pressed while the vehicle is stationary
and selector lever position D, M/S or R is en‐
gaged.
Selector lever positions
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that selec‐
Gear position D tor lever position P is set. Otherwise, the vehicle
may begin to move. Also set parking brake.
Selector lever position for normal driving. All
gears for forward travel are activated automati‐ Additional information:
cally. Parking brake, refer to page 129.
R is reverse Engaging selector lever

Engage selector lever position R only when the positions
vehicle is stationary.
General information
Neutral N To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you
The vehicle may be pushed or roll without power, select a gear position, maintain pressure on the
for instance in vehicle washes in selector lever brake pedal until you are ready to start.
position N.
Parking position P Only when the drive-ready state is switched on
and the brake pedal is depressed is it possible to
General information change from selector lever position P to another
Selector lever position, for instance for parking selector lever position.
the vehicle. The transmission blocks the individ‐ The selection lever position P cannot be
ual wheels in selector lever position P. changed until all technical requirements are met.
Engage selector lever position P only when the
vehicle is stationary. Engaging selector lever position D,
N, R
P is engaged automatically
A selector lever lock prevents the following faulty
Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐ operation:
cally in situations such as the following:
▷ Unintentional shifting into selector lever posi‐
tion R.
▷ Unintentional shifting from selector lever po‐
sition P into another selector lever position.
136
Driving CONTROLS
1. Fasten driver's safety belt. Rolling or pushing the vehicle

2. Press and hold the button to release the se‐
lector lever lock. General information
In some situations, the vehicle is to roll without
its own power for a short distance, for instance in
a car wash, or be pushed.
Engaging selector lever position N
NOTICE
Selector lever position P is automatically en‐
gaged when standby state is switched off.
3. Push the selector lever in the desired direc‐ There is a risk of damage to property, among
tion, past a resistance point, if needed. The other potential damage. Do not switch standby
selector lever automatically returns to the state off in car washes.
center position when released.
1. Switch on drive-ready state while pressing on
the brake pedal.
2. If necessary, release the parking brake.
3. If necessary, switch off Automatic Hold.
Automatic Hold, refer to page 130.
4. Depress the brake pedal.
5. Touch the selector lever lock and engage se‐
lector lever position N.
6. Switch off drive-ready state.
Engaging selector lever position P In this way, standby state remains switched
on, and a Check Control message is dis‐
played.
The vehicle can roll.
Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐
cally after approximately 35 minutes.
If there is a malfunction, you may not be able to
change the selector lever position.
Electronically unlock the transmission lock, if
Press button P. needed.
Kickdown
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
performance.
Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the resist‐
ance point at the full throttle position.
137
CONTROLS Driving
Sport program M/S Activating manual mode

1. Press the selector lever to the left from selec‐
Principle tor lever position D, arrow 1.
The shifting points and shifting times in the
Sport program are designed for sportier han‐
dling. The transmission, for instance shifts up
later and the shifting times are shorter.
Activating the Sport program
2. Press the selector lever forward or pull it

backward, arrows 2.
Manual mode becomes active and the gear is
changed.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument
cluster, for instance M1.
Press the selector lever to the left from selector
lever position D. Shifting
The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument ▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
cluster, for instance S1. ward.
The sport program of the transmission is acti‐ ▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rearwards.
vated.
The transmission continues shifting automati‐
cally in certain situations, for instance when RPM
Ending the Sport program limits are reached.
Press the selector lever to the right. When M2 is set manually while the vehicle is sta‐
D is displayed in the instrument cluster. tionary, the transmission will no longer shift back
to M1. This shifting behavior is retained until you
Manual mode M/S engage M1 manually or exit M.
Principle Steptronic Sport transmission:

prevent automatic upshifting in M/S
Manual gear-shifting is possible in manual mode.
manual mode
Depending on the motorization: if driving mode
SPORT is selected, the Steptronic Sport trans‐
mission does not automatically upshift in M/
S manual mode once the maximum speed is
reached.
In addition, there is no downshifting for kick‐
down.
138
Driving CONTROLS
M235i: once a particular engine speed is at‐ Continuous manual mode

tained, M/S manual mode does not upshift auto‐ In selector lever position S, actuating a shift pad‐
matically. dle switches into manual mode permanently.
With the appropriate transmission version, the
lowest possible gear can be selected by simulta‐ Steptronic Sport transmission
neously activating kickdown and operating the With the appropriate transmission version, the
left shift paddles. This is not possible by switch‐ lowest possible gear can be selected by simulta‐
ing briefly via the shift paddles from selector neously activating kickdown and operating the
lever position D to manual mode M/S. left shift paddles. This is not possible in short-
Additional information: term manual mode.
SPORT, refer to page 128.
Shifting
Ending the manual mode
Press the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Shift paddles
Principle
The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow
you to shift gears quickly while keeping both
▷ Shifting up: pull the right shift paddle.
hands on the steering wheel.
▷ Shifting down: pull left shift paddle.
General information ▷ Downshifting to the lowest possible gear:
keep the left shift paddle pulled.
Shifting The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
The vehicle only shifts at suitable RPM and road strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
speeds.
Short-term manual mode

Displays in the instrument
cluster
In selector lever position D, actuating a shift pad‐
dle switches into manual mode temporarily. The selector lever position is dis‐
After conservative driving in manual mode with‐ played, for example P.
out acceleration or shifting via the shift paddles
for a certain amount of time, the transmission
switches back to automatic mode.
It is possible to switch into automatic mode:
Electronic unlocking of the
▷ Keep the right shift paddle pulled until D is
transmission lock
displayed in the instrument cluster.
▷ In addition to the pulled right shift paddle, pull General information
the left shift paddle.
Electronically unlock the transmission lock to
maneuver vehicle from a hazardous area.
139
CONTROLS Driving
Before unlocking the transmission lock, set the 4. Release the selector lever.
parking brake to prevent the vehicle from rolling 5. Release the brake.
away.
6. Maneuver the vehicle from the hazardous
area and secure it against rolling away.
Engage selector lever position N
Unlocking is possible, if the starter can crank the
engine. Tow-starting/towing, refer to page 319.
1. Press and hold down brake pedal. Launch Control

2. Press the Start/Stop button. The starter must
audibly start. Hold the Start/Stop button Principle
pressed.
Launch Control enables optimum acceleration
3. With your free hand, press the button on the on roads with good traction under dry surround‐
selector lever, arrow 1, and press the selector ing conditions.
lever into selector lever position N and hold,
arrow N, until selector lever position N is dis‐ General information
played in the instrument cluster.
The use of Launch Control causes premature
A Check Control message is displayed. component wear since this function represents a
very heavy load for the vehicle.
Do not use Launch Control during the break-in.
Do not steer the steering wheel when driving off
with Launch Control.
Breaking-in period, refer to page 256.
4. Release Start/Stop button and selector lever. Launch Control is available as soon as the engine
5. Release brake, as soon as the starter stops. and transmission are at operating temperature.
Depending on the outside temperature and driv‐
6. Maneuver the vehicle from the hazardous ing style, the engine and transmission require an
area and secure it against rolling away. interrupted trip of up to 30 miles/50 km in order
With some transmission versions, the procedure to reach the operating temperature needed for
for unlocking is as follows: Launch Control.
1. Press the Start/Stop button three times in a
row. Start with launch control
2. Press and hold down brake pedal. 1. Turn on drive readiness.
3. Press the button on the selector lever, ar‐

row 1, and press and hold the selector lever
into selector lever position N, arrow N, until TRACTION is displayed in the instrument
selector lever position N is displayed in the in‐ cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF
strument cluster. lights up.
A Check Control message is displayed. 3. Engage selector lever position S.
140
Driving CONTROLS
4. With the left foot, forcefully press down on

the brake.
5. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal
beyond the resistance point at the full throttle
position, kickdown.
A destination flag is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster.
6. The starting engine speed adjusts. Wait
briefly until the engine speed is constant.
Keep the accelerator pedal in this position.
7. Release the brake within 3 seconds after the
destination flag illuminates.
The vehicle accelerates.
Upshifting occurs automatically as long as the
destination flag is displayed and the accelera‐
tor pedal is not released.
Repeated use during a trip

After Launch Control has been used, the trans‐
mission must cool down for approx. 5 minutes
before Launch Control can be used again.
Launch Control adjusts to the surrounding con‐
ditions, when used again.
After using Launch Control

To increase driving stability, activate DSC Dy‐
namic Stability Control again as soon as possible.
System limits
An experienced driver may be able to achieve
better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode.
141
CONTROLS Displays
Displays
Vehicle features and Navigation display
options 4 Depending on the equipment: Driver Atten‐

tion Camera
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ 5 Tachometer 151
cific and optional features offered with the series. Selection lists 157
Widgets 143
to the selected options or country versions. This Trip odometer, see Trip data 158
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ ECO PRO displays 262
tems. When using these functions and systems, Power gauge 151
Status, Driving Dynamics Control 127
served.
Transmission display 135
6 Engine temperature 153
Instrument cluster 7 Outside temperature 154
8 Check Control 146
General information 9 Speed Limit Assistant 205
Depending on the vehicle equipment, it may be
Speed Limit Info 155
possible to deactivate the display change in the
instrument cluster via iDrive. Time 62
Some of the displays in the instrument cluster

may differ from the illustrations in the Owner's Instrument cluster without
Manual. enhanced features: Overview
Instrument cluster with
enhanced features: Overview
1 Fuel gauge 151
2 Speedometer
3 Check Control 146
1 Fuel gauge 151
Widgets 144
Range 154
Service notifications 154
2 Speedometer
Navigation display
3 Central display area 143
142
Displays CONTROLS
Shift lights 152 Settings

Range 154 Individual displays in the instrument cluster can
4 Tachometer 151 be configured individually.
5 Engine temperature 153 1. "CAR"

6 Outside temperature 154 2. "Settings"
Transmission display 3. "Displays"
Status, Driving Dynamics Control 127 4. "Instrument panel"
Time 62 5. Select the desired setting.
7 Speed Limit Info 155
Instrument cluster with

Central display area extended features: Widgets
Depending on the equipment and configuration,
the following is displayed in the central display
area of the instrument cluster:
Principle
▷ Navigation displays such as the map view or, Displays for specific functions can be displayed
if destination guidance is active, a route pre‐ in the instrument cluster.
view with route guidance information. The following displays can be selected:
▷ Displays showing service notifications. ▷ Current entertainment source, e.g., radio.
Some displays in the central display area can be ▷ Torque and power.
configured individually. ▷ G-Meter.
The displays may vary depending on the equip‐ ▷ Trip data.
ment version and country variant.
▷ Efficiency display.
Driving mode view Selecting

Principle
Depending on the equipment, if the driving mode
view is activated, the displays in the instrument
cluster will adapt to the respective driving mode
when a program is changed via the Driving Dy‐
namics Control.
Activate/deactivate
1. "CAR"
Continue to press the button on the turn signal
2. "Settings" lever until the desired widget is selected.
3. "Displays"
4. "Driving mode view"
143
CONTROLS Displays
Display Current consumption

The current consumption displays the current
consumption of fuel. Check whether you are cur‐
rently driving in an efficient and environmentally-
friendly manner.
Energy recovery
During energy recovery, the kinetic energy of the
vehicle is converted into electric energy in coast‐
ing overrun mode. The vehicle battery is partially
charged and fuel consumption can be reduced.
G-meter
The G-meter indicates the forces that are ap‐ ECO PRO bonus range
plied in longitudinal and transverse direction on In the ECO PRO driving mode, the yielded exten‐
the vehicle occupants while driving. sion of the range as a result of fuel-efficient driv‐
ing is displayed as ECO PRO bonus range.
Efficiency display
Principle Instrument cluster without

Information about driving style and consumption enhanced features:
can be displayed in the form of a consumption Widgets
display as a widget in the instrument cluster, for
example.
Principle
General information Displays for specific functions can be displayed
in the instrument cluster.
Depending on the activated driving mode, differ‐
ent information will be displayed: ▷ Distance traveled.
▷ Consumption display.
Driving Display
mode ▷ Current fuel consumption and average fuel
consumption.
COMFORT Average consumption.
▷ Digital speed.
SPORT Current consumption.
▷ Navigation data.
Energy recovery.
When destination guidance is activated in the
ECO PRO ECO PRO bonus range. navigation system.
Distance traveled in Coasting ▷ Driver assistance systems.
mode. ▷ Compass display for the driving direction.
Current consumption. ▷ Current entertainment source, e.g., radio.
Average fuel consumption

The average consumption indicates the fuel con‐
sumption when driving a specific route.
144
Displays CONTROLS
Selecting General information

Energy recovery and current consumption can
be displayed as bar displays.
Display
Continue to press the button on the turn signal

lever until the desired widget is selected.
Configuring widgets ▷ Energy recovery, arrow 1.

Some widgets can be configured individually.
▷ Current consumption, arrow 2.
1. "CAR" ▷ Average consumption, arrow 3.
2. "Settings"
3. "Displays" Current fuel consumption and
4. "Instrument panel" average fuel consumption
5. "Configure widgets" The widget shows the current fuel consumption
6. Select the desired setting. and average fuel consumption depending on the
setting for the display of the trip data.
Information in detail
Navigation data
Distance traveled
General information
The widget for the distance traveled shows the
The estimated time of arrival and the distance re‐
total distance and traveled distance depending
maining to the destination are displayed if a des‐
on the setting for the display of the trip data.
tination is entered in the navigation system be‐
fore the trip is started.
Consumption display
Principle
During energy recovery, the kinetic energy of the
vehicle is converted into electric energy in coast‐
ing overrun mode. The vehicle battery is partially
charged and fuel consumption can be reduced.
The current consumption displays the current
consumption of fuel. Check whether you are cur‐
rently driving in an efficient and environmentally-
friendly manner.
145
CONTROLS Displays
Display In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and a

text message may appear on the Control Display.
Hiding Check Control messages
▷ Time of arrival, arrow 1.

▷ Distance to destination, arrow 2.
Press the button on the turn signal lever.

Compass
General information Continuous display

The compass shows the current driving direc‐ Some Check Control messages are displayed
tion. continuously and are not cleared until the fault is
eliminated. If several faults occur at once, the
Display messages are displayed consecutively.
The messages can be hidden for approx. 8 sec‐
onds. After this time, they are displayed again
automatically.
Temporary display
Some Check Control messages are hidden auto‐
matically after approx. 20 seconds. The Check
Control messages are stored and can be dis‐
played again later.
Displaying stored Check Control

Check Control messages
1. "CAR"
Principle 2. "Vehicle status"
The Check Control system monitors functions in
3. "Check Control messages"
the vehicle and notifies you of faults in the moni‐
tored systems. 4. Select the text message.
General information
A Check Control message is displayed as a com‐
bination of indicator or warning lights and text
messages in the instrument cluster and, if appli‐
cable, in the Head-up Display.
146
Displays CONTROLS
Display General information

The indicator/warning lights can light up in a vari‐
Check Control ety of combinations and colors.
At least one Check Control message is Several of the lights are checked for proper func‐
displayed or stored. tioning and light up temporarily when drive-ready
state is switched on.
Text messages
Red lights
Text messages in combination with an icon in
the instrument cluster explain a Check Control Safety belt reminder
message and the meaning of the indicator/warn‐
ing lights. Indicator light flashes or is illuminated:
safety belt on the driver or passenger
Supplementary text messages side is not buckled. The safety belt re‐
minder can also be activated if objects are placed
Additional information, such as the reason for a
on the front passenger seat.
fault or the required action, can be called up via
Check Control. Make sure that the safety belts are positioned
correctly.
With urgent messages the added text will be au‐
tomatically displayed on the Control Display.
Depending on the Check Control message, fur‐ Safety belt reminder for rear seats
ther help can be selected. The safety belt is not buckled on the cor‐
1. "CAR" responding rear seat.
2. "Vehicle status" The displays may vary depending on the

equipment version and country variant.
3. "Check Control messages"
4. Select the desired text message.
5. Select the desired setting. Airbag system
Airbag system and seat belt tensioner
Messages after trip completion may not be working.
Certain messages displayed while driving are dis‐ Have the vehicle checked immediately
played again after drive-ready state is switched by a dealer's service center or another qualified
off. service center or repair shop.
Indicator/warning lights Parking brake

The parking brake is set.
Principle Additional information:
Indicator/warning lights in the instrument cluster For releasing the parking brake, refer to
display the status of some functions in the vehi‐ page 130.
cle and indicate when a fault is present in the
monitored systems.
147
CONTROLS Displays
Brake system Yellow lights

Brake system impaired. Continue to drive
moderately. Antilock Braking System ABS
Have the vehicle checked immediately The Brake Assistant function may not
by a dealer's service center or another activate. Avoid abrupt braking. Take the
qualified service center or repair shop. longer braking distance into account.
Have the system immediately checked
Approach control warning with light by a dealer's service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
braking function
The indicator light is illuminated: pre‐
warning. Brake and increase distance. DSC Dynamic Stability Control
Indicator light flashes and an acoustic The indicator light flashes: DSC controls
signal sounds: acute warning. Brake and make an the drive and braking forces. The vehicle
evasive maneuver, if necessary. is stabilized. Reduce speed and modify
your driving style to the driving circumstances.
The indicator light lights up: DSC has malfunc‐
Approach control warning with light braking func‐
tioned.
tion, refer to page 175.
Have the system immediately checked by a deal‐
er's service center or another qualified service
Pedestrian Warning with City center or repair shop.
Collision Mitigation Additional information:
Indicator light flashes and an acoustic DSC Dynamic Stability Control, refer to
signal sounds: imminent collision with a page 190.
detected person or a cyclist.
Intervene immediately by braking or make an
evasive maneuver.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is
deactivated or DTC Dynamic
Traction Control is activated
Pedestrian Warning with City Collision Mitigation,
refer to page 178. DSC is deactivated or DTC is activated.
Drive power ▷ DSC Dynamic Stability Control, refer

to page 190.
Reduced drive power due to an over‐
▷ DTC Dynamic Traction Control, refer to
heated drivetrain.
page 192.
Power gauge, refer to page 151.
Flat Tire Monitor FTM
The FTM signals a tire pressure loss in a
tire.
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
148
Displays CONTROLS
Run-flat tires, refer to page 291. This indicates that there is excessive misfiring
in the engine.
Tire pressure monitor Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys‐
tem checked immediately; otherwise, serious
The indicator light illuminates: the Tire engine misfiring within a brief period can seri‐
Pressure Monitor reports a low tire pres‐ ously damage emission control components,
sure or a flat tire. Follow the information in particular the catalytic converter.
in the Check Control message.
The indicator light flashes and is then illuminated
Socket for OBD Onboard Diagnosis, refer to
continuously: flat tires or tire pressure losses
page 310.
cannot be detected.
▷ Fault caused by systems or devices with the
same radio frequency: after leaving the area Green lights
of the interference, the system automatically
becomes active again. Safety belt reminder for rear seats
▷ In the case of tires with special approval: the The safety belt is buckled on the corre‐
tire pressure monitor was unable to complete sponding rear seat.
the reset. Reset the system again.
The displays may vary depending on the
▷ A wheel without wheel electronics is equipment version and country variant.
mounted: have it checked by a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center
or repair shop as needed. Turn signal
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by a Turn signal switched on.
dealer’s service center or another qualified
Unusually rapid blinking of the indicator
light indicates that a turn signal bulb has
Additional information: failed.
Tire pressure monitor, refer to page 284. Additional information:
Turn signal, refer to page 132.
Steering system
Steering system may not be working. Parking lights
Have the system checked by a dealer's Parking lights are switched on.
service center or another qualified serv‐
ice center or repair shop.
Parking lights/low beams, refer to
page 164.
Emissions
▷ The warning light lights up:
Low beams
Emissions are deteriorating. Have the
Low beams are switched on.
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir‐
cumstances: Parking lights/low beams, refer to
page 164.
149
CONTROLS Displays
Lane departure warning Cruise control

The indicator light lights up: the system Indicator light is illuminated: the system
is activated. Warnings can be issued. is active.
Additional information: Additional information:
Lane departure warning, refer to page 181. Cruise control, refer to page 196.
Front fog lights Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go

Front fog lights are switched on. function
Additional information: The indicator light lights up: the system
is switched on.
Front fog lights, refer to page 168.
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go
Automatic High Beam Assistant
function, refer to page 198.
Automatic High Beam Assistant is
switched on.
Speed Limit Assistant
High beams are switched on and off au‐
tomatically depending on the traffic situation. Depending on the equipment, indicator
light illuminates together with the icon for
a cruise control system: Speed Limit As‐
Automatic High Beam Assistant, refer to sistant is active and detected speed limits can be
page 166. applied manually for the displayed system.
Automatic Hold Indicator light illuminates: the detected

speed limit can be applied with the SET
Automatic Hold is activated. The vehicle button. As soon as the speed limit has
is automatically held in place when it is been applied, a green checkmark is displayed.
stationary.
Speed Limit Assistant, refer to page 205.
Automatic Hold, refer to page 130.
Blue lights
Manual Speed Limiter
The indicator light lights up: the system High beams
is switched on. High beams are switched on.
The indicator light flashes: the set speed Additional information:
limit has been exceeded.
High beams, refer to page 132.
Manual Speed Limiter, refer to page 194.
Drive power
Reduced drive power due to a cold drive‐
train.
150
Displays CONTROLS
Power gauge, refer to page 151. Instrument cluster with

enhanced features: Activating/
deactivating
Fuel gauge 1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Principle 3. "Displays"
The current fill level of the fuel tank is displayed.
4. "Instrument panel"
5. "Engine display"
General information
6. "Tachometer"
Vehicle inclination may cause the display to vary.
When the setting for the driving mode view is ac‐
tivated, the activated tachometer is only shown in
Refueling, refer to page 268. the COMFORT or SPORT driving mode.
Display
Instrument cluster with enhanced features: Instrument cluster with
An arrow next to the fuel pump extended features: Power
symbol indicates the vehicle side gauge
on which the fuel filler flap is lo‐
cated.
Principle
The current range is displayed as
numerical value. The display indicates the drive power available as
a percentage of its total power.
Instrument cluster without enhanced features:
An arrow next to the fuel pump Activate/deactivate
symbol indicates the vehicle side 1. "CAR"
on which the fuel filler flap is lo‐ 2. "Settings"
cated.
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
Indicator light in the instrument 5. "Engine display"
cluster 6. "Power meter"
The yellow indicator light illuminates, When the setting for the driving mode view is ac‐
once the fuel reserve is reached. tivated, the activated power gauge is only shown
in the COMFORT driving mode.
Tachometer
General information
Always avoid RPM in the red warning field. In this
range, the fuel supply is reduced to protect the
engine.
151
CONTROLS Displays
Display General information

Depending on the equipment and national-mar‐
ket version, the Shift lights are active in the M
manual mode of the Steptronic Sport transmis‐
sion and with manual transmission.
▷ Depending on the equipment, either driving
program SPORT or SPORT PLUS is acti‐
vated.
Pointer in the area of arrow 1: display of the en‐ ▷ Head-up display is switched off or the display
ergy recovered by coasting or when decelerat‐ of the Shift lights in the Head-up display is
ing, CHARGE. deactivated.
Pointer in the area of arrow 2: output in percent,
POWER. Turning on/turning off
Steptronic Sport transmission:
Drive power 1. If applicable, select SPORT or SPORT PLUS
The available drive power may be reduced due driving mode.
to certain factors, for instance a cold engine. De‐ Press Driving Dynamics Control.
pending on the available drive power, the range
2. Activate the M manual mode of the transmis‐
for POWER is adjusted automatically.
sion.
If needed, icons in the power gauge indicate a
reduction of the drive power.
Display
Example Description
symbol
Reduced drive power due to a

cold drivetrain.
Reduced drive power due to an

overheated drivetrain.
Full Black Panel Display.

Shift lights
Principle
The Shift lights in the instrument cluster indicate
the maximum shift point at which the best possi‐
ble acceleration can be achieved.
152
Displays CONTROLS
The letters OFF in the tachome‐

ter indicate that drive-ready state
is switched off and standby state
is switched on.
The letters READY in the instru‐
ment cluster indicate that the drive readiness is
turned on and the Auto Start/Stop function is
ready to start the engine automatically.
Instrument cluster without enhanced features. Additional information:

Operating state of the vehicle, refer to page 40.
Information about the driving

style Engine oil temperature
▷ Current engine speed is displayed in the
tachometer. Display
▷ Arrow 1: successive yellow illuminated fields Instrument cluster with enhanced features:
indicate an increase in the speed.
▷ Cold engine: the pointer is at
▷ Arrow 2: successive orange illuminated fields
the low temperature end.
indicate the upcoming shift moment.
Drive at moderate RPM and
▷ Arrow 3: the field lights up red. Do not wait vehicle speeds.
any further to shift.
▷ Normal operating tempera‐
When the maximum speed is reached, the entire ture: the pointer is in the mid‐
display flashes red and the fuel supply is inter‐ dle or in the lower half of the
rupted in order to protect the engine. temperature display.
▷ Hot engine: the pointer is at the high end of
Standby state and drive- the temperature range. In addition, a Check
Control message is displayed.
ready state
Instrument cluster with enhanced features: ▷ Cold engine: the LEDs of the
The lettering OFF in the instru‐ indicator show a low tempera‐
ment cluster indicates that drive- ture value. Drive at moderate
ready state is switched off and RPM and vehicle speeds.
standby state is switched on. ▷ Normal operating tempera‐
ture: the LEDs of the indicator
The letters READY in the instru‐ show an average temperature
ment cluster indicate that the value.
drive readiness is turned on and ▷ Hot engine: the LEDs of the indicator show a
the Auto Start/Stop function is high temperature value. In addition, a Check
ready to start the engine automat‐ Control message is displayed.
ically.
Instrument cluster without enhanced features: Coolant level, refer to page 307.
153
CONTROLS Displays
Indicator light in the instrument Safety information

cluster
A red indicator light is displayed. NOTICE
With a driving distance of less than
30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐
Outside temperature sured anymore. There is a risk of damage to
property, among other potential damage. Re‐
fuel promptly.
General information
If the indicator drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a
signal sounds. Display
A Check Control message is displayed. Instrument cluster with enhanced features:
There is an increased risk of ice on roads. The current range is displayed as
numerical value next to the fuel
Safety information gauge.
Warning
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃
there can be a risk of icy roads, for instance on The current range is displayed as
bridges or shady sections of the road. There is numerical value between speed‐
a risk of accident. Modify your driving style to ometer and tachometer.
the weather conditions at low temperatures.
Range Service notifications

Principle Principle
The range indicates the distance that can still be The function displays the service notifications
covered with the current full tank of fuel. and the corresponding maintenance scopes.
General information General information

The estimated range available with the remaining After switching on drive-ready state, the instru‐
fuel is permanently displayed in the instrument ment cluster briefly displays available driving dis‐
cluster. tance or time to the next scheduled mainte‐
With a low remaining range, a Check Control nance.
message is briefly displayed. With a sporty driv‐ A service advisor can read out the current serv‐
ing style, for instance fast cornering, the engine ice notifications from your vehicle key.
function is not always ensured.
The Check Control message appears continu‐
ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.
154
Displays CONTROLS
Display Gear shift indicator

Detailed information on service
notifications
Principle
The gear shift indicator recommends the most
More information on the type of service required
efficient gear for the current driving situation.
may be displayed on the Control Display.
1. "CAR" General information
2. "Vehicle status" Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐
3. "Required services" try version, the gear shift indicator is active in the
Maintenance work and legally mandated in‐ M manual mode of the Steptronic transmission
spections are displayed. and with manual transmission.
4. Select an entry to call up detailed information.

Symbols displaying
Suggestions to shift up or down are displayed in
Sym‐ Description the instrument cluster.
bols On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the en‐
gaged gear is displayed.
No service is currently required.
Example Description
The time for recommended mainte‐ Efficient gear is set.

nance or a legally mandated inspec‐
tion is approaching.
Shift into efficient gear.
Service interval is exceeded.
Entering appointment dates Speed Limit Info

Enter the dates for the mandatory vehicle in‐
spections. Speed Limit Info
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are
set correctly. Principle
1. "CAR" Speed Limit Info shows the currently valid speed
limit in the instrument cluster and, if necessary,
2. "Vehicle status" the Head-up Display.
3. "Required services"
4. "Vehicle inspection" General information
5. "Date:" The camera in the area of the interior mirror de‐
6. Select the desired setting. tects traffic signs at the edge of the road as well
as overhead sign posts.
Traffic signs with extra symbols are considered
and compared with the vehicle's onboard data.
155
CONTROLS Displays
The traffic sign will then be either displayed or ig‐ Activating

nored depending on the situation in the instru‐ 1. "CAR"
ment cluster and the Head-up Display.
2. "Settings"
With the navigation system, the system takes
into account the information stored in the naviga‐ 3. "Driver Assistance"
tion data and also displays speed limits present 4. If necessary, "Driving"
on routes without signs. 5. "Speed Limit Assistance"
Without a navigation system, the system is sub‐ 6. "Speed limits"
ject to limitations imposed by technology. Traffic
7. "Show current limit"
signs with speed limitations are detected and
displayed only. Speed limitations due to entering
or exiting towns, highway signs, etc. are not dis‐ Display
played. Speed limits with extra text characters
are always displayed. Speed Limit Info
Current speed limit.
Safety information Without a navigation system the
traffic signals are grayed out after
Warning curves or longer stretches of
roadway.
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility Depending on the equipment,
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Speed Limit Info not available.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.
Overview
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following sen‐ If the detected speed limit has been exceeded,
sors: the indicator light will flash.
Additional information: Settings
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 37. 1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Displaying Speed Limit Info 3. "Driver Assistance"
4. If necessary, "Driving"
General information
5. "Speed Limit Assistance"
Depending on the vehicle equipment, Speed
Limit Info is displayed permanently in the instru‐ 6. Select the desired setting:
ment cluster or via iDrive. ▷ "Warn when speeding": activate/deacti‐
vate the flashing of the Speed Limit Info
display in the instrument cluster and,
156
Displays CONTROLS
where applicable, the Head-up Display

when the currently valid speed limit is ex‐
Selection lists
ceeded. The warning that is issued when
a speed limit is exceeded may depend on Concept
the Speed Limit Assistant settings. Lists can be displayed and, if necessary, used for
▷ "Excess speed display": the speed limit certain functions in the instrument cluster or the
that is detected by the Speed Limit Info is Head-up Display.
displayed with a marking in the speedom‐ ▷ Entertainment source.
eter in the instrument cluster.
▷ Current audio source.
▷ List of most recent telephone calls.
System limits
If necessary, the corresponding menu will open
System limits of the sensors on the Control Display.
Display
▷ Cameras, refer to page 37.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional and may
provide incorrect information in the following sit‐
uations:
▷ When traffic signs are fully or partially con‐
cealed by objects, stickers or paint.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front
of you. Depending on the equipment version, the list in
▷ In the case of navigation data that is invalid, the instrument cluster may differ from the illus‐
outdated or not available. tration.
▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐
tem. Displaying and using the list
▷ When roads differ from the navigation, such The lists can be displayed and operated using
as due to changes in road layout. the buttons on the steering wheel.
▷ In case of electronic traffic signs.
▷ When passing buses or trucks with traffic
signs applied to them.
▷ When the traffic signs do not correspond to
the standard.
▷ When traffic signs that are valid for a parallel
road are detected.
▷ In the presence of country-specific road signs
or road layouts.
157
CONTROLS Displays
Button Function ▷ Total time for shut off engine through the
Auto Start/Stop function.
Change the entertainment
▷ Distance traveled in Coasting mode.
source.
▷ Consumption history in form of a chart.
Pressing the button again will
close the currently displayed
Displays
list.
1. "CAR"
Show list of most recent tele‐
2. "Driving information"
phone calls.
3. "Trip data"
Turn the thumbwheel to select
the desired setting. Consumption history
Press the thumbwheel to con‐ The average consumption is shown in the con‐
firm the setting. sumption history in form of a chart based on the
The list of the current entertain‐ distance traveled and the driving mode.
ment source can be displayed
in the instrument cluster again Display in the instrument cluster
by turning the thumbwheel.
Depending on the equipment, information about
the route can be displayed as widget in the in‐
strument cluster.
Trip data The following information is displayed:
▷ Total kilometers.
Principle
▷ Configured interval for displaying trip data.
Values for the trip, such as the average con‐
▷ Distance traveled depending on the config‐
sumption or trip kilometers, are displayed.
ured interval.
General information ▷ Average speed.
The trip data can be displayed on the Control Selecting and setting widgets in the instrument
Display and in the instrument cluster. cluster.
The values can be displayed and reset depend‐ Additional information:

ing on various intervals, such as after refueling. Instrument cluster with enhanced features:
Widgets, refer to page 143.
Display on the Control Display Instrument cluster without enhanced features:
Overview
The following information is displayed depending
on the equipment and the set interval and driving
mode:
▷ Configured interval for displaying trip data.
▷ Average fuel consumption depending on the
configured interval.
▷ Average speed.
158
Displays CONTROLS
Adjusting the display of the trip With the button on the turn signal lever:
data 1. Continue to press the button on the turn sig‐
The intervals for the display of the trip data in the nal lever until the widget for the trip data is
instrument cluster and on the Control Display are selected.
adjustable.
1. "CAR"
3. "Trip data"
4. "Data since"
▷ "Start of trip ( )": the values are automati‐
cally reset approx. four hours after the ve‐
hicle has come to a standstill. 2. Press and hold the button on the turn signal
lever.
▷ "Refueling ( )": the values are automati‐
cally reset after refueling with a larger Via iDrive:
quantity of fuel. 1. "CAR"
▷ "Factory": Average consumption 2. "Driving information"
since delivery from the factory.
3. "Trip data"
The values since the time of the factory
delivery are displayed. 4. "Data since"
▷ "Individual ( )": the values since the last 5. "Reset individual"

manual reset are displayed. The values The average values and counters are reset.
can be reset at any time. Once the average values and counters have
been reset, the following interval is automatically
Resetting average values set: "Individual ( )".
manually
The following interval can be reset manually at Sport displays
any time: "Individual ( )".
Concept
The Sport displays especially support a sporty
driving style.
Display on the Control Display
Overview
The following information is displayed:
▷ Boost pressure.
▷ Engine oil temperature.
▷ G-Meter.
159
CONTROLS Displays
▷ Torque. Symbols Description

▷ Power.
"Engine oil level": electronic oil
measurement, refer to
Displays
page 304.
1. "CAR"
"Check Control messages": dis‐
playing stored Check Control
3. "Sport displays" messages, refer to page 146.
Instrument cluster with "Required services": displaying

service notifications, refer to
enhanced features: Display in the page 154.
instrument cluster
The Sport displays can be displayed in form of
widgets in the instrument cluster. Head-up Display
The following widgets can be selected:
▷ Widget for torque and power. Principle
▷ Widget for G meter. The Head-up display projects important informa‐
Additional information: tion in the driver's field of view, for instance the
speed.
The driver can get information without averting
his or her eyes from the road.
Vehicle status
General information
General information Follow the information on cleaning the Head-up
The status can be displayed and actions per‐ Display.
formed for several systems.
Overview
Going to the vehicle status
1. "CAR"
2. "Vehicle status"
Information at a glance
Symbols Description
"Flat Tire Monitor": status of the

run-flat tires, refer to page 291.
Turning on/off
"Tire Pressure Monitor": status
of the Tire Pressure Monitor, re‐ 1. "CAR"
fer to page 284. 2. "Settings"
3. "Displays"
160
Displays CONTROLS
4. "Head-up display" When the low beams are switched on, the
5. "Head-up display" brightness of the Head-up Display can be ad‐
justed using the instrument lighting.
Display
Adjusting the height
Overview 1. "CAR"
The following information is displayed on the 2. "Settings"
Head-up Display: 3. "Displays"
▷ Vehicle speed. 4. "Head-up display"
▷ Navigation instructions. 5. "Height"
▷ Check Control messages. 6. Turn the Controller until the desired height is
▷ Selection list in the instrument cluster. reached.
▷ Driver assistance systems. 7. Press the Controller.
▷ Sport displays. The height of the Head-up Display can also be
stored using the memory function.
Some of this information is only displayed briefly
as needed.
Setting the rotation
Selecting displays in the Head-up The Head-up Display view can be rotated.
Display 1. "CAR"
1. "CAR" 2. "Settings"
2. "Settings" 3. "Displays"
3. "Displays" 4. "Head-up display"
4. "Head-up display" 5. "Rotation"
5. Select the desired setting. 6. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is
selected.
Setting the brightness 7. Press the Controller.
The brightness is automatically adjusted to the
ambient brightness. Additional settings
The base setting can be adjusted manually. 1. "CAR"
1. "CAR" 2. "Settings"
2. "Settings" 3. "Displays"
3. "Displays" 4. "Head-up display"
4. "Head-up display" 5. Select the desired setting:
5. "Brightness"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
161
CONTROLS Displays
▷ "Speed Limit Assistance": access the set‐

tings for the speed assistant.
▷ "Display infotainment lists in": set up if the
selection lists are displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster or the Head-up Display.
▷ "Sport displays": display tachometer and
shift Lights in the Head-up Display.
▷ "Off": the Sport displays are not dis‐
played in the Head-up Display.
▷ "In SPORT mode": the Sport displays
are only displayed in SPORT driving
mode.
▷ "Always": the Sport displays are con‐
tinuously displayed in the Head-up
Display.
Visibility of the display

The visibility of the displays in the Head-up Dis‐
play is influenced by the following factors:
▷ Seat position.
▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Display.
▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
▷ Wet road.
▷ Unfavorable light conditions.
If the image is distorted, have the base settings
checked by a dealer’s service center or another
Special windshield
The windshield is part of the system.
The shape of the windshield makes it possible to
display a precise image.
A film in the windshield prevents double images
from being generated.
For this reason, it is strongly suggested to have
the special windshield replaced by a dealer’s
or repair shop, if necessary.
162
Lights CONTROLS
Lights
Vehicle features and Icon Function
options Automatic headlight control.

Adaptive light functions.
cific and optional features offered with the series. Low beams.
to the selected options or country versions. This Instrument lighting.
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ Right roadside parking light.
served.
Left roadside parking light.

Lights and lighting
Switches in the vehicle
Automatic headlight
control
Principle
The low beams are switched on and off automat‐
ically depending on the ambient brightness, for
example in tunnels, in twilight or if there is pre‐
cipitation.
The light switch element is located next to the
steering wheel. General information
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
Icon Function cause the lights to be turned on.
Front fog lights. If the low beams are switched on manually, the
automatic headlight control is deactivated.
Lights off. Activating

Daytime driving lights. Press the button on the light switch ele‐
ment.
Parking lights.
The LED in the button lights up.
163
CONTROLS Lights
The indicator light in the instrument clus‐ After the drive-ready state is switched on, the
ter is illuminated when the low beams are automatic headlight control will be activated.
switched on.
Low beams
System limits
Switching on
The automatic headlight control cannot replace
your personal judgment of lighting conditions. Press the button on the light switch ele‐
ment.
For example, the sensors are unable to detect
fog or hazy weather. In these situations, turn the The low beams illuminate when drive-ready state
lights on manually. is switched on.
Parking lights, low beams ter lights up.
and roadside parking lights Press the button again to switch on the low
beams when the standby state is switched on.
General information
Turning off
If the driver's door is opened when the drive-
ready state is switched off, the exterior lighting is Depending on the country variant, the low beams
automatically switched off after a period of time. can be switched off in the low speed range.
Press the button on the light switch ele‐
Parking lights ment.
General information
Roadside parking lights
The parking lights can only be switched on in the
When the vehicle is parked, a one-sided roadside
low speed range.
parking light can be switched on.
Switching on Button Function
Press the button on the light switch ele‐ Right roadside parking light on.
ment.
Left roadside parking light off.
ter lights up.
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides. Switching off the roadside parking light:
Do not use the parking lights for extended peri‐ Press the button on the light switch ele‐
ods; otherwise, they might drain the battery and ment or switch on the drive-ready state.
it would then be impossible to switch on drive-
ready state.
Turning off
ment or switch on the drive-ready state.
164
Lights CONTROLS
Welcome lights Setting the duration

1. "CAR"
Principle 2. "Settings"
The exterior lighting is switched on automatically 3. "Exterior lighting"
when approaching or unlocking the vehicle. 4. "Pathway lighting"
General information 6. "OK"
Depending on the equipment, the exterior light‐
ing of the vehicle can be set individually.
Daytime driving lights
Activating/deactivating welcome
light General information
1. "CAR" The daytime driving lights light up when drive-
2. "Settings" ready state is switched on.
3. "Exterior lighting"
4. Depending on the equipment, select the fol‐ Activate/deactivate daytime
lowing setting: driving lights
▷ "Welcome and goodbye" In some countries, daytime driving lights are
mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti‐
When unlocking the vehicle, individual
vate the daytime driving lights in front.
light functions are switched on for a lim‐
ited time. 1. "CAR"
▷ "Door handle lights" 2. "Settings"
Door handles and the ground in front of 3. "Exterior lighting"
the doors are illuminated for a limited 4. Depending on country specifications:
time. "Daytime driving lights" or "Daytime driving
lights, rear"
Pathway lighting
Adaptive light functions
Principle
For the illumination of the vehicle’s surroundings Principle
after exiting the vehicle, the exterior lighting can Adaptive light functions enable dynamic illumina‐
be switched on for a defined period of time. tion of the road.
Switching pathway lighting on General information

After switching off the drive-ready state, briefly The adaptive light functions may consist of one
push the turn signal lever forward. system or multiple systems, depending on the
equipment version:
▷ Adaptive Light Control.
▷ Cornering light.
165
CONTROLS Lights
Activating well as the vehicle load conditions in order to

avoid blinding oncoming traffic.
ment.
The LED in the button lights up.

Automatic High Beam
The adaptive light functions are active when the Assistant
drive-ready state is switched on.
Principle
Adaptive Light Control The Automatic High Beam Assistant detects
other road users early on and automatically
switches the high beams on or off depending on
General information the traffic situation.
Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐
rameters, the light from the headlight follows the General information
course of the road. The Automatic High Beam Assistant ensures
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adaptive that the high beams are switched on, whenever
Light Control does not swivel to the opposite the traffic situation allows. In the low speed
lane when the vehicle is at a standstill. range, the high beams are not switched on by
the system.
The system responds to light from oncoming
Cornering light traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to am‐
bient lighting, for instance in towns and cities.
Principle The high beams can be switched on and off
In tight curves, for instance on mountainous manually at any time.
roads or when turning, an additional, cornering
light is switched on that lights up the inside of Activate Automatic High Beam
the curve when the vehicle is moving below a Assistant
certain speed.
1. Press the button on the light switch
General information element.
The cornering light is automatically switched on The LED in the button lights up.
depending on the steering angle or, where appli‐ 2. Press the button on the turn signal lever.
cable, the use of turn signals.
When driving in reverse, the cornering lights may
be automatically switched on regardless of the
steering angle.
Adaptive headlight range

control
The adaptive headlight range control feature bal‐
ances out acceleration and braking processes as
166
Lights CONTROLS
The indicator light in the instrument clus‐ Safety information

ter is illuminated when the low beams are
switched on.
Warning
The headlights are automatically switched be‐ If adjustments have been made or the sensitiv‐
tween low beams and high beams. ity has been modified, oncoming traffic may be
The blue indicator light in the instrument momentarily blinded. There is a risk of accident.
cluster lights up when the system If adjustments have been made and the sensi‐
switches on the high beams. tivity has been modified, make sure that on‐
coming traffic is not momentarily blinded.
Driving interruption with activated Automatic Switch off the high beams manually if required.
High Beam Assistant: the Automatic High Beam
Assistant remains activated when driving contin‐
ues. Functional requirements
The Automatic High Beam Assistant is deacti‐ ▷ Setting at standstill only.
vated when manually switching the high beams ▷ Drive readiness is switched on.
on and off.
▷ Light is turned off.
To reactivate the Automatic High Beam Assis‐
tant, press the button on the turn signal lever. Increase sensitivity
Push the turn signal lever to the front for approxi‐
Deactivate Automatic High Beam mately 10 seconds.
Assistant A Check Control message is displayed. The sys‐
tem responds more sensitively.
Resetting the sensitivity

Push the turn signal lever to the front again for
approx. 10 seconds or switch off the drive-ready
state.
The sensitivity of the Automatic High Beam As‐
sistant is reset to the factory settings.
Press the button on the turn signal lever.

System limits
The Automatic High Beam Assistant cannot re‐
Sensitivity of the Automatic High place the driver's personal judgment of when to
Beam Assistant use the high beams. In situation that require this,
therefore dimming manually.
General information The system is not fully functional in the following
The sensitivity of the Automatic High Beam As‐ situations, and driver intervention may be neces‐
sistant can be adjusted. sary:
▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions, such
as fog or heavy precipitation.
▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such as
pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and
167
CONTROLS Lights
wagons; when driving close to train or ship Setting the brightness

traffic; or at animal crossings.
Adjust the brightness with the
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions, thumbwheel.
in crossing traffic or half-obscured oncoming
traffic on highways.
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities or in the pres‐
ence of highly reflective signs.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
mirror is fogged up, dirty or covered with Interior lighting
stickers, etc.
General information
Fog lights Depending on the equipment version, interior
lights, footwell lights, entry lights, ambient light‐
ing, and speaker lighting are automatically con‐
Front fog lights trolled.
Principle Overview
The front fog lights work alongside the low
beams to illuminate a wider area of the roadway. Buttons in the vehicle
▷ Low beams are switched on.
Front fog light on/off

Press the button.
The green indicator light in the instru‐

ment cluster lights up if the front fog
lights are switched on. Interior lights
If the automatic headlight control is activated, the Reading lights

low beams will come on automatically when you
switch on the front fog lights.
When the high beams or headlight flasher are Turning interior lights on/off
activated, the front fog lights are not switched
on. Press the button.
To switch off permanently: press the button and

Instrument lighting hold for approx. 3 seconds.
The interior lights in the rear of the vehicle can
Functional requirement be switched on and off independently. The but‐
ton is located in the rear headliner.
The parking lights or low beams must be
switched on to set the brightness.
168
Lights CONTROLS
Turning reading lights on/off 3. "Interior lighting"
Press the button. 4. "Brightness"

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the read‐
ing lights are located next to the interior lights in Dimmed while driving
the front and rear. Some lights of the interior lighting are dimmed
when the vehicle is driven in the dark.
Ambient light 1. "CAR"

2. "Settings"
General information 3. "Interior lighting"
Depending on the equipment version, lighting 4. "Dimmed for night driving"
can be adjusted for some lights in the car's inte‐
rior.
Activating/deactivating ambient
light
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Interior lighting"
4. "Ambient lighting"
Turning ambient light on/off

The ambient light is switched on when the vehi‐
cle is unlocked, and switched off when the vehi‐
cle is locked.
If the ambient light was deactivated via iDrive, it
will not be switched on when the vehicle is un‐
locked.
Selecting the color

1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Interior lighting"
4. "Color"
Setting the brightness

1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
169
CONTROLS Safety
Safety
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver 4 Side airbag

2 Front airbag, front passenger 5 Knee airbag
3 Head airbag
Front airbags Side airbag

Front airbags help protect the driver and the In the event of a side collision, the side airbag
front passenger by responding to frontal impacts protects the side of the body in the chest and lap
in which safety belts alone would not provide ad‐ area.
equate protection. Depending on the equipment:
170
Safety CONTROLS
In the event of a side collision, the side airbag in risk of injury to your hands or arms as low as
the rear protects the chest and lap area on the possible when the airbag is triggered.
side of the bodies of the occupants in the outer ▷ Adjust seat and steering wheel so that hands
rear seats. can be crossed over the steering wheel. Se‐
lect the settings so that the shoulder rests
Head airbag against the backrest when crossing the
In the event of a side collision, the head airbag hands and the upper body is as far back as
protects the head. possible while still maintaining a comfortable
grip on the steering wheel.
Ejection Mitigation ▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sitting
The head airbag system is designed as an ejec‐ correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs in
tion mitigation countermeasure to reduce the the floor area and does not support them on
likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants the dashboard.
through side windows during rollovers or side ▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads
collision events. away from the side airbag.
▷ There should be no additional persons, ani‐
Knee airbag mals or objects between an airbag and a per‐
Depending on the equipment: son.
The knee airbag protects the legs in the event of ▷ Dashboard and windshield on the front pas‐
a frontal impact. senger side must stay clear - do not attach
adhesive film or coverings and do not attach
Protective effect brackets or cables, for instance for navigation
devices or mobile phones.
General information ▷ Do not bond the airbag cover panels with ad‐
hesive, do not cover them or modify them in
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐
any way.
tion, e.g., in less severe accidents.
▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
Information on optimum protective the front passenger side as a storage area.
effect of the airbags ▷ Do not attach slip covers, seat cushions or
other objects to the front passenger seat that
are not specifically suited for seats with
Warning integrated side airbags.
If the seat position is incorrect or the deploy‐ ▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jack‐
ment area of the airbags is impaired, the airbag ets, over the backrests.
system cannot provide protection as intended
and may cause additional injuries due to trig‐ ▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐
gering. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. nents or the wiring in the airbag system. This
Follow the information on achieving the opti‐ also applies to steering wheel covers, the
mum protective effect of the airbag system. dashboard, and the seats.
▷ Do not disassemble the airbag system.
▷ Keep a distance from the airbags. Even when you follow all instructions very
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the closely, injury from contact with the airbags can‐
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the not be fully ruled out in certain situations.
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep the
171
CONTROLS Safety
The ignition and inflation noise may lead to Malfunction

short-term and, in most cases, temporary hear‐
▷ Warning light does not come on
ing impairment in sensitive occupants.
when drive-ready state is turned on.
Vehicle modifications for a person with disabili‐
▷ The warning light lights up continu‐
ties may affect the air bag system; contact BMW
ously.
Customer Relations for further information.
Have the system checked.
Warnings and information on the airbags are also
found on the sun visors.
Strength of the driver's and front
Operational readiness of the passenger airbag
airbag system
General information
Safety information The power that triggers the driver's/front passen‐
ger airbags depends on the position of the driv‐
Warning er's/front passenger seat.
Individual components can be hot after trigger‐ To maintain the accuracy of this function over
ing of the airbag system. There is a risk of in‐ the long term, calibrate the front seats as soon as
jury. Do not touch individual components. a respective message appears on the Control
Display.
Calibrating the front seats

Warning
Improperly executed work can lead to failure,
malfunction or unintentional triggering of the Warning
airbag system. In the case of a malfunction, the There is a risk of jamming when moving the
airbag system might not trigger as intended de‐ seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
spite the accident severity. There is a risk of in‐ to property. Make sure that the area of move‐
jury or danger to life. Have the airbag system ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐
checked, repaired, disassembled and scrapped ment.
by a dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop. A corresponding message appears on the Con‐
trol Display.
Display in the instrument cluster 1. Press the switch and move the respective
seat all the way forward, until it stops.
When drive-ready state is turned on, the
2. Press the switch forward again. The seat still
warning light in the instrument cluster
moves forward slightly.
lights up briefly and thereby indicates the
operational readiness of the entire airbag system 3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
and the seat belt tensioners. The calibration procedure is completed when the
message on the Control Display disappears.
If the message continues to be displayed, repeat
the calibration.
172
Safety CONTROLS
If the message does not disappear after a repeat If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
calibration, have the system checked as soon as the person sit in the rear.
possible. To enable accurate recognition of the occupied
seat cushion:
Automatic deactivation of ▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or

other items to the front passenger seat un‐
the front passenger airbags less they are specifically determined to be
safe for use on the front passenger seat.
Principle ▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the
The system reads if the front passenger seat is front passenger seat if a child restraint sys‐
occupied by measuring the human body's resist‐ tem is to be installed on it.
ance. ▷ Do not place objects under the seat that can
Front, knee, and side airbag on the front pas‐ press against the seat from below.
senger's side are activated or deactivated. ▷ No moisture in or on the seat.
General information Indicator light for the front

Before transporting a child on the front passen‐ passenger airbags
ger seat, refer to the safety information and in‐ The indicator light for the front-seat passenger
structions for children on the front passenger airbag in the headliner indicates the operating
seat, see Children. state of the front-seat passenger airbag.
The light indicates whether the airbags are either
Safety information activated or deactivated.
After drive-ready state is switched on, the light
Warning shortly lights up and then indicates whether the
To ensure the front passenger airbag function, airbags are either activated or deactivated.
the system must be able to detect whether a ▷ The indicator light lights up
person is sitting in the front passenger seat. when a child is properly
The entire seat cushion area must be used for seated in a child restraint sys‐
this purpose. There is a risk of injury or danger tem or when the seat is
to life. Make sure that the front passenger empty. The airbags on the
keeps his or her feet in the floor area. front passenger side are not
activated.
▷ The indicator light does not light up when, for
Fault of the automatic instance a correctly seated person of suffi‐
deactivation system cient size is detected on the seat. The air‐
When transporting older children and adults, the bags on the front passenger side are acti‐
front passenger airbags may be deactivated in vated.
certain seat positions. In this case, the indicator
light for the front passenger airbags lights up.
Detected child restraint systems
In this case, change the seat position so that the
The system generally detects children seated in
front passenger airbags are activated and the in‐
a child restraint system, particularly in child re‐
dicator light goes out.
straint systems required by NHTSA at the point
173
CONTROLS Safety
in time when the vehicle was manufactured. Af‐ style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
ter installing a child restraint system, make sure and actively intervene where appropriate.
that the indicator light for the front passenger air‐
bags lights up. This indicates that the child re‐
straint system has been detected and the front Warning
passenger airbags are not activated.
Due to system limits, individual functions can
malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the
Intelligent Safety Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a
risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety
systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.
Principle
Intelligent Safety enables central operation of the
driver assistance systems. Overview
General information Button in the vehicle

Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, Intel‐
ligent Safety consists of one or more systems
that can help prevent an imminent collision.
▷ Approach control warning with light braking
function.
▷ Daytime Pedestrian Collision Mitigation.
▷ Lane departure warning.
▷ Active Blind Spot Detection.
Intelligent Safety
Safety information
Warning Turning on/off

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the Some Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility cally active after every departure. Some Intelli‐
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. gent Safety systems activate according to the
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch last setting.
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐ Button Status
propriate.
Button lights up green: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched on.
Warning Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐ gent Safety systems are switched off
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due or currently unavailable.
to its limits, the system may not issue warnings
Button does not light up: all Intelligent
or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a
Safety systems are switched off.
manner that is not consistent with their normal
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
174
Safety CONTROLS
Press the button. above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of warn‐
The menu for the Intelligent Safety sys‐ ings may vary with the current driving situation.
tem is displayed. When the vehicle is driven so that it is intention‐
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off, ally approaching another vehicle, the Forward
all systems are now switched on. Collision Warning and brake intervention are de‐
layed in order to avoid false system reactions.
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems can be individually configured. The individ‐ Safety information
ual settings are activated and stored. As soon as
a setting is changed on the menu, all settings of Warning
the menu are activated.
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
Press the button repeatedly. The follow‐
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.
ing settings are switched between:
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
switched on. Basic settings are activated for the propriate.
sub-functions, for instance setting for warning
time.
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are Warning
switched on according to the individual settings.
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐ stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
vidually switched off. to its limits, the system may not issue warnings
Press and hold this button.
All Intelligent Safety systems are use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
switched off. style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Approach control warning

with light braking function Warning
Principle Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a
The Forward Collision Warning warns of a possi‐ risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety
ble risk of collision and may brake independently. systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.
In the event of an accident, the system may re‐
duce impact speed.
General information
Sensors detect the traffic situation.
The system issues a two-phase warning of a
possible risk of collision with vehicles at speeds
175
CONTROLS Safety
Overview Press the button repeatedly.

The following settings are switched be‐
Button in the vehicle tween:
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on. Basic settings are activated for the
subfunctions.
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐
vidually switched off.
Manual switching off

Intelligent Safety
All Intelligent Safety systems are
Sensors switched off.
The system is controlled by the following sen‐
sors: Button Status
▷ Cameras behind the windshield. Button lights up green: all Intelligent
▷ With radar sensor: front radar sensor. Safety systems are switched on.
Additional information: Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 37. gent Safety systems are switched off
or currently unavailable.
Turning on/off Button does not light up: all Intelligent
Turning on automatically
The system is automatically active when the ve‐ Setting the warning time
hicle is turned on.
1. "CAR"
Switching on manually 2. "Settings"

3. "Driver Assistance"
Press the button.
4. "Safety and Warnings"
The menu for the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tem is displayed. 5. "Forward Collision Mitigation"
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off, 6. Select the desired setting:
all systems are now switched on. ▷ "Early"
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the ▷ "Medium"
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐ ▷ "Late": only acute warnings are displayed.
tems can be individually configured. The individ‐
a setting is changed on the menu, all settings of
176
Safety CONTROLS
Warning with braking function Brake intervention

The warning prompts the driver to intervene. If a
Display warning is active, the maximum braking force is
A warning symbol appears in the instrument used when the brake is applied. The brake pedal
cluster and in the Head-up Display, where availa‐ must be applied sufficiently quickly and force‐
ble, if a collision with a detected vehicle is immi‐ fully.
nent. The system may also assist in braking if there is
a risk of collision.
Icon Measure
When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed, the
Icon lights up red: prewarning. vehicle may come to a complete stop.
Brake and increase distance. City brake function: the brake intervention occurs
to up to approx. 50 mph/80 km/h.
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic
signal sounds: acute warning. With radar sensor: the brake intervention occurs
to up to approx. 155 mph/250 km/h.
Brake and make an evasive maneuver,
if necessary. At speeds above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h, the
brake intervention occurs as a brief braking pres‐
sure. No automatic delay occurs.
Prewarning
The brake intervention can be interrupted by
This warning is provided, for instance when there
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by actively
is impending danger of a collision or the distance
moving the steering wheel.
to the vehicle ahead is too small.
The system’s ability to detect objects may be
If a prewarning is provided, respond by braking
limited in some circumstances. Refer to the in‐
as warranted.
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding the
limitations of the system and actively intervene
Acute warning with braking function as warranted.
An acute warning is displayed in case of the im‐
minent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐ System limits
proaches another object at a high differential
speed. Safety information
Intervene in the case of an acute warning. De‐
pending on the driving situation and the equip‐
Warning
ment version, the acute warning may be accom‐
panied by a brief activation of the braking The system is designed to operate in certain
system. conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐
With the warning time setting "Late" the brief ac‐
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk
tivation of the braking system is omitted.
of damage to property. Actively intervene as
If an acute warning is provided, the system may warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐
also provide assistance, such as through auto‐ er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐
matic brake intervention, when there is risk of tem’s operation and limitations.
collision.
Acute warnings may be provided even when
there has been no prior warning.
177
CONTROLS Safety
Detection range ▷ In tight curves.

▷ If the driving stability control systems are lim‐
ited or deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine
Warning sensitivity
The more sensitive the warning settings are, for
example the warning time, the more warnings are
displayed. Therefore, there may also be an ex‐
The system's detection capability is limited. cess of premature or unjustified warnings and re‐
Only objects that are detected by the system are actions.
taken into account.
Thus, a system reaction might not come or Pedestrian Warning with

might come late.
City Collision Mitigation
The following situations may not be detected, for
instance:
Principle
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
The Pedestrian Warning warns in the city speed
them at high speed.
range of possible risk of collision with pedes‐
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you, trians and bicycle riders and may brake inde‐
or strongly decelerating vehicles. pendently. In the event of an accident, the sys‐
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear view. tem may reduce impact speed.
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
General information
Upper speed limit Sensors detect the traffic situation.
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx. The system issues a warning of a possible risk of
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated collision with pedestrians and cyclists at speeds
temporarily. When the vehicle slows down to be‐ above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h.
low this speed, the system is reactivated.
The system reacts to pedestrians and cyclists
who are within the detection range of the sys‐
System limits of the sensors tem.
▷ Cameras, refer to page 37. Safety information
▷ Radar sensors, refer to page 38.
Warning
Functional limitations The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
The system may be limited in the following situa‐ driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
tions: and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.
propriate.
178
Safety CONTROLS
Detection range
Warning
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
The detection range in front of the vehicle is div‐

ided into two areas:
Warning
▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the
Due to system limits, individual functions can vehicle.
▷ Extended area, arrows 2, to the right and left
Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a
of the central area.
systems off prior to tow-starting/towing. A collision is imminent if pedestrians are located
within the central area. A warning is issued about
pedestrians who are located within the extended
Overview area only if they are moving in the direction of the
central area.
Button in the vehicle
Turning on/off
The system is automatically active when the ve‐
hicle is turned on.
Switching on manually
Press the button.
Intelligent Safety
tem is displayed.
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off,
Sensors all systems are now switched on.
The system is controlled by the following sen‐ "Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
sors: equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems can be individually configured. The individ‐
▷ With radar sensor: front radar sensor. a setting is changed on the menu, all settings of
Additional information: the menu are activated.
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 37.
179
CONTROLS Safety
Press the button repeatedly. Brake intervention

The following settings are switched be‐ The warning prompts the driver to intervene.
tween: While a warning is active, the maximum braking
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are force is used when the brake is applied. In order
switched on. Basic settings are activated for the to activate the Brake Assistant function, the
subfunctions. brakes must be applied sufficiently quickly and
forcefully.
switched on according to the individual settings. If there is a risk of collision, the system may also
assist with brake intervention.
vidually switched off. When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed, the
vehicle may come to a complete stop.
The brake intervention can be interrupted by
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by actively
Press and hold this button. moving the steering wheel.
All Intelligent Safety systems are The system’s ability to detect objects may be
switched off. limited in some circumstances. Refer to the in‐
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding the
Button Status limitations of the system and actively intervene
as warranted.
System limits
Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐
gent Safety systems are switched off Safety information
Button does not light up: all Intelligent Warning

The system is designed to operate in certain
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐
Warning with braking function tions or other factors, the system may not re‐
Display of damage to property. Actively intervene as
If a collision with a pedestrian or a cyclist is immi‐ warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐
nent, a warning symbol appears on the instru‐ er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐
ment cluster and in the Head-up Display. tem’s operation and limitations.
The red icon is displayed and a signal

sounds. Upper speed limit
The system responds to pedestrians and cyclists
Alternatively, depending on the vehicle when the speed of the vehicle is below approx.
equipment, a red warning triangle lights 50 mph/80 km/h.
up in the instrument cluster.
Intervene immediately by braking or make an Detection range

evasive maneuver. The system's detection capability is limited.
180
Safety CONTROLS
Thus, a warning might not be issued or be is‐ The system does not provide a warning if the
sued late. turn signal is set in the respective direction be‐
The following situations may not be detected, for fore leaving the lane.
instance: Depending on the equipment version, if in the
▷ Partially covered pedestrians. speed range up to 130 mph/210 km/h a lane
marking is crossed, the system may intervene
▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such be‐
with a brief active steering intervention in addi‐
cause of the viewing angle or contour.
tion to vibrating. The system thus helps keep the
▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range. vehicle in the lane.
▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than
32 in/80 cm. Safety information
System limits of the sensors

Warning
▷ Cameras, refer to page 37. driver’s personal judgment in assessing road
▷ Radar sensors, refer to page 38. and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.
Functional limitations traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
The system may be limited or may not be availa‐ propriate. Do not jerk the steering wheel in re‐
ble in the following situations: sponse to a warning.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are de‐

activated, for instance DSC OFF.
Warning
via the Start/Stop button. Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
Lane departure warning or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a
Principle style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
The lane departure warning alerts when the vehi‐ and actively intervene where appropriate.
cle is about to run off the road or exit the lane.
General information Functional requirement

This camera-based system warns starting at a The camera must detect the lane markings for
minimum speed. the lane departure warning to be active.
The minimum speed is country-specific and is
displayed in the menu for the intelligent Safety
systems.
Warnings are issued by means of a steering
wheel vibration. The severity of the steering
wheel vibration can be adjusted.
181
CONTROLS Safety
Overview a setting is changed on the menu, all settings of

Press the button repeatedly.
tween:
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are
subfunctions.
Intelligent Safety vidually switched off.

Sensors
sors: All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
Additional information: Button Status
Turning on/off
Turning on automatically gent Safety systems are switched off
The lane departure warning activates automati‐
cally after departure if the function was switched Button does not light up: all Intelligent
on at the completion of the last trip. Safety systems are switched off.
system is automatically active after every driving Setting the warning time
off. The base setting is thereby activated.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Switching on manually
Press the button.
4. "Safety and Warnings"
tem is displayed. 5. "Lane Departure Warning"
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off, 6. Select the desired setting:
all systems are now switched on. ▷ "Early"
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the ▷ "Medium"
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐ ▷ "Reduced": some warnings are sup‐
tems can be individually configured. The individ‐ pressed depending on the situation,
ual settings are activated and stored. As soon as for instance when purposely driving over
182
Safety CONTROLS
lane markings in curves or with dynamic cordance with the steering wheel vibration set‐
passing without blinker. ting.
▷ "Off": no warnings are issued. When the turn signal is switched on in the corre‐
sponding direction before changing the lane, a
Setting the intensity of the steering warning is not issued.
wheel vibration
1. "CAR" Steering intervention
2. "Settings" Depending on the equipment version: if, in the
speed range up to 130 mph/210 km/h a lane
3. "Driver Assistance" marking is crossed, the system may intervene
4. "Steering Wheel Feedback" with a brief active steering intervention in addi‐
5. "Vibration intensity" tion to vibrating. The steering intervention helps
keep the vehicle in the lane. The steering inter‐
vention can be noticed on the steering wheel
The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety sys‐ and can be manually overridden at any time. Dur‐
tems. ing an active steering intervention, the display in
the instrument cluster will blink.
Switch steering intervention on/off
The steering intervention can be switched on Warning signal
and off separately for Active Blind Spot Detec‐ Depending on the equipment version: in the
tion and lane departure warning. event of multiple active steering interventions by
1. "CAR" the system within 3 minutes without the driver's
intervention at the steering wheel, an acoustic
2. "Settings"
warning will sound. A short warning signal will
3. "Driver Assistance" sound at the second steering intervention. Be‐
4. "Safety and Warnings" ginning with the third steering intervention, an
5. "Lane Departure Warning" continuous warning will sound.
6. "Steering intervention" In addition, a Check Control message is dis‐

played.
steering intervention is automatically active after The warning signal and Check Control message
every driving off. are an encouragement to pay closer attention to
the lane.
Display in the instrument cluster
End of warning
The icon illuminates green: at lane mark‐ For instance, the warning will be canceled in the
ing was detected on at least one side of following situations:
the vehicle and warnings can be issued.
▷ Automatically after a few seconds.
▷ When returning to your own lane.
Warning function
▷ When braking hard.
If you leave the lane ▷ When blinking.
If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has ▷ The Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) adjusts.
been detected, the steering wheel vibrates in ac‐
183
CONTROLS Safety
System limits Active Blind Spot

Safety information Detection
Warning
Principle
Active Blind Spot Detection detects vehicles in
the blind spot or vehicles approaching from be‐
hind in the adjacent lane.
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk The light in the exterior mirror warns the driver in
of damage to property. Actively intervene as different steps.
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐ General information
tem’s operation and limitations.

The system may be limited in the following situa‐
tions: Radar sensors monitor the area behind and next
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible, to the vehicle when traveling faster than a mini‐
merging, diverging, or multiple lane markings mum speed.
such as in construction areas. The minimum speed is country-specific and is
▷ With lane boundaries that are covered in displayed in the menu for the intelligent Safety
snow, ice, dirt or water. systems.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow roads. The system indicates whether there are vehicles
in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching from
▷ With lane boundaries that are covered by ob‐
behind in the adjacent lane, arrow 2.
jects.
The light in the exterior mirror lights up dimmed.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front
of you. Before you change lanes after setting the turn
signal, the system issues a warning in the situa‐
tions described above.
The light in the exterior mirror flashes and the
A Check Control message may be displayed
steering wheel vibrates.
when the system is not fully functional.
184
Safety CONTROLS
Safety information Turning on/off
Warning
Active Blind Spot Detection is automatically acti‐
vated after departure if the function was
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
switched on at the completion of the last trip.
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐ Switching on manually
propriate. Press the button.
tem is displayed.
Warning If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off,
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐ all systems are now switched on.
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due "Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
to its limits, the system may not issue warnings equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐
or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a tems can be individually configured. The individ‐
manner that is not consistent with their normal ual settings are activated and stored. As soon as
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving a setting is changed on the menu, all settings of
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely the menu are activated.
Press the button repeatedly.
Overview
tween:
Button in the vehicle "ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are
subfunctions.
vidually switched off.

Intelligent Safety
All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
Sensors
sors:
185
CONTROLS Safety
Button Status Warning function

Light in the exterior mirror

gent Safety systems are switched off
Button does not light up: all Intelligent

Setting the warning time

1. "CAR"
2. "Settings" Prewarning
3. "Driver Assistance" The dimmed light in the exterior mirror indicates
4. "Safety and Warnings" when there are vehicles in the blind spot or ap‐
proaching from behind.
5. "Active Blind Spot Detection"
6. Select the desired setting. Acute warning
When the turn signal is switched on while a vehi‐
Setting the intensity of the steering
cle is in the critical zone, the steering wheel vi‐
wheel vibration brates briefly and the light in the exterior mirror
1. "CAR" flashes brightly.
2. "Settings" The warning stops when the other vehicle has
3. "Driver Assistance" left the critical area or the turn signal has been
deactivated.
4. "Steering Wheel Feedback"
5. "Vibration intensity"
Flashing of the light
A flashing of the light during vehicle unlocking
The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety sys‐ serves as system self-test.
tems.
System limits
Safety information
Warning
186
Safety CONTROLS
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐ General information

Upper speed limit

If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated
temporarily.
If the vehicle speed falls below approx.
155 mph/250 km/h, the system once again re‐
sponds according to the setting.
Radar sensors monitor the area behind the vehi‐
cle.
When a vehicle approaches from the rear at a
certain speed, the system can react as as fol‐
▷ Radar sensors, refer to page 38. lows:
▷ Where applicable, the hazard warning flashers
Functional limitations will be switched on.
▷ Where applicable, the PreCrash functions are
tions:
triggered.
▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
much faster than your own.
Safety information
▷ In tight curves or on narrow roads.
▷ The bumper is dirty, iced up or covered,
for instance by stickers. Warning
A Check Control message is displayed when the The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
system is not fully functional. driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
Displaying warnings Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
Depending on the selected warning settings,
propriate.
e.g., warning time, more or fewer warnings can
be displayed. However, there may also be an ex‐
cess of premature warnings of critical situations.
Warning
Rear-end collision stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
preparation to its limits, the system may not issue warnings
Principle use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
Depending on the equipment and national-mar‐ style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
ket version, the rear-end collision preparation can and actively intervene where appropriate.
react to vehicles approaching from behind.
187
CONTROLS Safety
Overview At standstill
After coming to a halt, the brake is released auto‐
Sensors matically.
sors: Harder vehicle deceleration
▷ Radar sensors, side, rear. In certain situations, it can be necessary to bring
Additional information: the vehicle to a halt more quickly than the Brake
Assistant allows.
To do this, quickly apply extra force to the brake.
Switching on/off For a brief period, the braking pressure will be
higher than the braking pressure that is achieved
The system is automatically active when the ve‐ by the automatic braking function. Automatic
hicle is turned on. braking is interrupted.
The system is deactivated in the following situa‐
tions: Interrupting automatic braking
▷ When driving in reverse. It can be necessary to interrupt automatic brak‐
ing in certain situations, for instance for an eva‐
System limits sive maneuver.
Interrupt automatic braking:
▷ By pressing the brake pedal.
▷ By pressing the accelerator pedal.
Functional limitations Fatigue alert

The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐
lowing situations: Principle
▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed The Fatigue Alert can detect decreasing alert‐
much faster than your own. ness or fatigue of the driver during long, monoto‐
▷ The approaching vehicle is approaching nous trips, for instance on highways. The system
slowly. recommends a break.
Safety information
PostCrash – iBrake
Warning
Principle
In the event of an accident, PostCrash can bring driver’s personal judgment in assessing one's
the vehicle to a halt automatically without inter‐ physical state. An increasing lack of alertness or
vention by the driver in certain situations. fatigue may not be detected or not be detected
in time. There is a risk of accident. Make sure
General information that the driver is rested and alert. Adjust driving
PostCrash can reduce the risk of another colli‐ style to traffic conditions.
sion and subsequent consequences.
188
Safety CONTROLS
Function System limits

The system is switched on each time drive-ready The function may be limited in the following sit‐
state is switched on. uations and may issue an incorrect warning or no
After travel has begun, the system monitors cer‐ warning at all:
tain aspects of the driver's behavior, so that de‐ ▷ When the time is set incorrectly.
creasing alertness or fatigue can be detected. ▷ When the vehicle speed is mainly below
This procedure takes the following criteria into about 43 mph/70 km/h.
account: ▷ With a sporty driving style, such as during
▷ Personal driving style, for instance steering rapid acceleration or when cornering fast.
behavior. ▷ In active driving situations, such as when
▷ Driving conditions, for instance time, length of changing lanes frequently.
trip. ▷ When the road condition is poor.
Starting at approx. 43 mph/70 km/h, the system ▷ In the event of strong side winds.
is active and can also display a recommendation
The system is reset approx. 45 minutes after
to take a break.
parking the vehicle, for instance in the case of a
break during longer trips on highways.
Break recommendation
Adjusting
The fatigue alert is active automatically with each
switching on of drive-ready state and can thus
display a break recommendation.
The break recommendation can also be
switched on or off and adjusted via iDrive.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
4. "Fatigue and Focus Alert"
Display
If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued, a
message is displayed in the Control Display with
the recommendation to take a break.
During the display, various settings can be se‐
lected.
After a break, another recommendation to take a
break cannot be displayed until after approxi‐
mately 45 minutes.
189
CONTROLS Driving stability control systems
Driving stability control systems

Vehicle features and Adaptive brake assistant
options In combination with Active Cruise Control ACC,
this system ensures that the brakes respond
even more rapidly when braking in critical situa‐
tions.
Drive-off assistant
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ Principle
served. The drive-off assistant supports driving off on
uphill grades.
Antilock Braking System Driving off

ABS 1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake.
2. Release the foot brake and drive off without
The Antilock Braking System (ABS) prevents
delay.
locking of the wheels during braking.
After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is
The vehicle maintains its steerability even during
held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
emergency braking, which increases the active
driving safety. Depending on the vehicle loading, the vehicle
may roll back slightly.
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐
gine.
DSC Dynamic Stability
Brake assistant Control
The Brake Assistant effects maximum braking Principle
assistance when the brake is applied quickly. It
reduces the braking distance to a minimum dur‐ The Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) helps to
ing emergency braking. The advantages of the keep the vehicle on a steady course by reducing
Antilock Braking System (ABS) are thereby uti‐ drive power and by brake intervention on individ‐
lized. ual wheels.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal

for the duration of emergency braking.
General information
DSC detects the following unstable driving con‐
ditions, for instance:
190
Driving stability control systems CONTROLS
▷ Skidding, which can lead to oversteering. Deactivating/activating DSC

▷ Loss of adhesion of the front wheels, which
can lead to understeering. General information
When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is re‐
Safety information duced during acceleration and when driving in
curves.
Warning To increase driving stability, activate DSC again
as soon as possible.
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐ Deactivating DSC
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic Hold the button down until DSC OFF is
situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust displayed in the instrument cluster and
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic the DSC OFF indicator light is illuminated.
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.
Activating DSC
Press the button.
Warning DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator
When driving with a roof load, for instance with light turn off.
roof-mounted luggage rack, the vehicle's cen‐
ter of gravity is higher, which increases the risk
Display
of the vehicle tipping in critical driving situa‐
tions. There may be a risk of accident or risk of
In the instrument cluster
damage to property. Driving with roof load only
with activated Dynamic Stability Control. When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is displayed
Overview Indicator/warning lights

The indicator light lights up: DSC is de‐
Button in the vehicle activated.
The indicator light flashes: DSC controls

the drive and braking forces.
The indicator light lights up: DSC has
malfunctioned.
DSC OFF
191
CONTROLS Driving stability control systems
DTC Dynamic Traction Activating/deactivating DTC

Control Activating DTC
Press the button.
Principle
TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐
Dynamic Traction Control (DTC) is a version of ment cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF
the Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) where drive lights up.
power is optimized.
The system ensures maximum drive power on
unusual road conditions, for instance unplowed Deactivating DTC
snow covered roads, or loose road surfaces, but Press the button again.
with somewhat limited driving stability. TRACTION and the DSC OFF indicator
light turn off.
General information
When DTC is activated, the vehicle has maxi‐
mum traction. Driving stability is limited during
Display
acceleration and when driving in curves.
Display in the instrument cluster
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC in
the following situations: If DTC is activated, TRACTION is displayed in
the instrument cluster.
▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared, snow-
covered roads.
Indicator/warning lights
▷ When driving off from deep snow or loose
ground. The indicator light lights up: DTC is acti‐
vated.
▷ When driving with tire chains.
Overview Automatic program change

In certain situations, the Dynamic Stability Con‐
Button in the vehicle trol (DSC) is activated automatically:
▷ If Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go func‐
tion ACC is activated.
▷ On a brake intervention by the Intelligent
Safety systems.
▷ The vehicle has a flat tire.
xDrive
DSC OFF Principle
xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of the vehi‐
cle. Concerted action by the xDrive and and
other suspension control systems, such as Dy‐
192
Driving stability control systems CONTROLS
namic Stability Control (DSC), further optimizes

traction and driving dynamics.
General information
xDrive variably distributes the driving power to
the front and rear axles as demanded by the driv‐
ing situation and road condition.
The Driving Dynamics Control is used to change
the all-wheel distribution from traction oriented
to sport oriented.
Because of the needs-based use of the all-
wheel-drive system, Efficient4x4 yields a reduc‐
tion in consumption.
M sports steering
The M sports steering creates a direct driving
style by using smaller steering angles. M sports
steering features variable steering force support
that takes the speed and lateral acceleration into
account. The system enhances agility and im‐
proves handling while maintaining a sporty driv‐
ing style; for example, in tight corners or during
evasive maneuvers. At the same time, it ensures
improved comfort during parking, turning, and
maneuvering.
193
CONTROLS Driver assistance systems
Driver assistance systems

Vehicle features and Operation
options Turning on
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ Press the button on the steering wheel.
It also describes features and functions that are The current speed is accepted as the speed
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due limit.
to the selected options or country versions. This If the system is switched on while the vehicle is
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ stationary or driving at low speeds,
tems. When using these functions and systems, 20 mph/30 km/h is set as the speed limit.
The marking in the speedometer is set to the
served.
corresponding speed.
When the speed limit is switched on, DSC Dy‐
Manual Speed Limiter namic Stability Control and COMFORT driving
mode may be switched on as well.
Principle Turning off

The system can be used to set a speed limit, for
instance to prevent the vehicle from exceeding Press the button on the steering wheel.
speed limits.
The system switches off automatically in the fol‐
General information lowing situations, for example:
The system can limit the speed, starting at a ▷ When the engine is switched off.
value of 20 mph/30 km/h. The vehicle can be ▷ When cruise control is switched on.
driven at any speed below the set speed limit. ▷ When certain programs are activated via the
Driving Dynamics Control.
Overview The displays turn off.
Buttons on the steering wheel Interrupting

If the reverse gear is engaged or at idle, the sys‐
Button Function
tem is interrupted when rolling backwards.
System on/off.
Store current speed.

Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug‐
gested speed manually.
Rocker switch:
Changing the speed limit.
194
Driver assistance systems CONTROLS
Changing the speed limit Warning when the speed limit is

exceeded
Visual warning
If the speed limit is exceeded: the indica‐
tor light in the instrument cluster flashes
while the vehicle speed is greater than
the set speed limit.
Acoustic warning
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed limit is set. ▷ If the speed limit is exceeded unintentionally,
a signal sounds.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the
resistance point, the speed limit increases or ▷ When the speed limit is reduced to below the
decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h. vehicle speed while driving, the signal sounds
after some time.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past
the resistance point, the desired speed ▷ When the speed limit is intentionally ex‐
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h. ceeded by stepping on the accelerator pedal
all the way down, there is no signal.
If the set speed limit is reached or unintentionally
exceeded, such as when driving downhill, the ve‐
hicle is not actively braked. Displays in the instrument
When the speed limit is set during a trip to a
cluster
value below the current speed, the vehicle
coasts until it drops to the set speed limit. Display in the speedometer
The current speed can also be stored by press‐ Depending on the equipment, a mark in the
ing a button: speedometer displays the status of the system.
Press the button on the steering wheel. ▷ Green marking: system is ac‐
tive.
▷ Grey marking: system is inter‐
Exceeding the speed limit rupted.
When the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed ▷ No marking: system is
limit, a warning is issued. switched off.
The speed limit can be exceeded intentionally.
There is no warning in this case. Indicator light
Press the accelerator pedal all the way down to ▷ The indicator light lights up: the sys‐
intentionally exceed the set speed limit. tem is switched on.
When the vehicle speed drops below the set ▷ The indicator light flashes: the set
speed limit, the limit is automatically reactivated. speed limit has been exceeded.
▷ Gray indicator light: the system has been in‐
terrupted.
195
Cruise control
Warning
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or
Principle called up by mistake. There is a risk of accident.
With the Cruise Control, a set speed can be ad‐ Adjust the set speed to the traffic conditions.
justed using the buttons on the steering wheel. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene
The system maintains the set speed. The sys‐ where appropriate.
tem accelerates and brakes automatically as
needed.
Overview
General information
The system can be activated starting at Buttons on the steering wheel
20 mph/30 km/h.
Button Function
Depending on the vehicle setting, the cruise
control settings may change under certain condi‐ Cruise control on/off.
tions. For instance, acceleration can change de‐
pending on the driving mode.
Safety information
Continue cruise control with the last
setting.
Warning
Pause cruise control.
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐ Store current speed.
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug‐
situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust gested speed manually.
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ Rocker switch:
ate. Set speed.
Switching cruise control on/off

Warning
The use of the system can lead to an increased Turning on
risk of accidents in the following situations, Depending on the equipment version,
for instance: press the relevant button on the steer‐
▷ On winding roads. ing wheel.
▷ In heavy traffic.
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or wet The indicator lights in the instrument cluster light
conditions, or on a loose road surface. up and the marking on the speedometer is set to
the current speed.
There may be a risk of accident or risk of dam‐
age to property. Only use the system if driving Cruise control is active. The current speed is
at constant speed is possible. maintained and stored as set speed.
196
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if When the system is switched on, the current
necessary. speed is maintained and stored as the set speed.
The stored speed is displayed on the speedom‐
Turning off eter.
Depending on the equipment version, DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if
press the relevant button on the steer‐ necessary.
ing wheel. The speed can also be stored by pressing a but‐
ton.
The displays turn off. The stored set speed is
Press the button.
deleted.
Pausing cruise control Changing the speed

Interrupting manually
When active, press the button.
Interrupting automatically
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations, for example:
▷ When braking manually.
▷ Steptronic transmission: gear lever position D Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
is disengaged. until the desired speed is set.
▷ Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated or If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated. vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road
is clear.
▷ The Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) adjusts.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is tapped to the
Setting the speed resistance point, the set speed increases or
decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.
Maintaining and storing the speed ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past
the resistance point, the desired speed
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
The maximum speed that can be set de‐
pends on the vehicle.
▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resistance
point and holding it: vehicle accelerates or
decelerates without pressure on the acceler‐
ator pedal.
After the rocker switch is released, the vehi‐
Press the rocker switch up or down once while cle maintains its final speed. Pressing the
the system is interrupted. switch beyond the resistance point causes
the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.
197
Continuing cruise control The icon is displayed when the set

speed is reached.
An interrupted cruise control can be continued
by calling up the stored speed.
Make sure that the difference between current System limits
speed and stored speed is not too large before The set speed is also maintained downhill. The
calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, uninten‐ speed may not be maintained on uphill grades if
tional deceleration or acceleration may occur. the drive power is insufficient.
Press the button with the system inter‐ In ECO PRO driving mode, the vehicle may ex‐
rupted. ceed or drop below the set desired speed in
some situations, for instance on downhill or uphill
Cruise control is continued with the stored val‐ grades.
ues.
In the following cases, the stored speed value is
deleted and cannot be called up again: Active Cruise Control with
▷ When the system is switched off. Stop&Go function ACC
▷ When drive-ready state is switched off.
Principle
Using the Cruise Control, a desired speed and a
cluster distance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted us‐
ing the buttons on the steering wheel.
Display in the speedometer
Depending on the equipment, a mark in the General information
speedometer displays the status of the system.
The system maintains the set speed on clear
▷ Green marking: system is ac‐ roads. The vehicle accelerates or brakes auto‐
tive, the marking indicates the matically.
desired speed. If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the system
▷ Grey marking: system is inter‐ adjusts the speed of your vehicle so that the set
rupted, the marking indicates distance to the vehicle ahead is maintained. The
the stored speed. speed is adjusted as far as the given situation al‐
▷ No marking: system is switched off. lows.
The distance can be adjusted in several steps.
For safety reasons, it depends on the respective
Indicator light speed.
▷ Indicator light green: system is active. If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, and
▷ Gray indicator light: the system has then proceeds to drive again within a brief period,
been interrupted. the system is able to detect this within the given
▷ No indicator light: system is switched off. system limits.
Depending on the vehicle setting, the cruise
control settings may change under certain condi‐
Displays in the Head-up Display tions. For instance, acceleration can change de‐
Some system information can also be displayed pending on the driving mode.
in the Head-up Display.
198
Safety information ▷ When fast approaching a slowly moving

vehicle.
▷ Vehicle suddenly swerving into own lane.
Warning
▷ When fast approaching standing vehicles.
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Watch
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐ traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic propriate.
situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ Overview
ate.
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and Cruise control on/off.
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐ Store current speed.
ing.
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug‐
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured gested speed manually.
Continue cruise control with the last
setting.
turn the front wheels in the direction of the Pause cruise control.
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, Increase the distance.
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a Switch distance control on/off.
wheel chock.
Reduce distance.
Switch distance control on/off.
Warning
Rocker switch:
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or
Set speed.
called up by mistake. There is a risk of accident.
Adjust the set speed to the traffic conditions.
Watch traffic closely and actively intervene Sensors
where appropriate. The system is controlled by the following sen‐
sors:
Warning
▷ Front radar sensor.
Risk of accident due to too high speed differen‐
ces to other vehicles, for instance in the follow‐
ing situations: Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 37.
199
Application range Interrupting automatically

The system is best used on well-constructed The system is automatically interrupted in the
roads. following situations:
The minimum speed that can be set is ▷ When the driver applies the brakes.
20 mph/30 km/h. ▷ When selector lever position D is disengaged.
The maximum speed that can be set is limited ▷ Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated or
and, e.g., depends on the vehicle and the vehicle DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.
equipment.
▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control intervenes.
The system can also be activated when station‐
▷ If the safety belt and the driver's door are
ary.
opened while the vehicle is standing still.
▷ If the system has not detected objects for an
Turning on/off and interrupting
extended period, for instance on a road with
cruise control very little traffic without curb or shoulder
markings.
Turning on
▷ If the detection range of the radar is impaired,
Press the button on the steering wheel. for instance by contamination or heavy pre‐
cipitation.
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster light ▷ After a longer stationary period when the ve‐
up and the marking on the speedometer is set to hicle has been braked to a stop by the sys‐
the current speed. tem.
Cruise control is active. The current speed is
maintained and stored as set speed. Setting the speed
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if
necessary. Maintaining and storing the speed
Turning off
To switch off the system while standing, step on
brake pedal at the same time.
Press the button on the steering wheel:
Button on the steering wheel.
The displays turn off. The stored set speed is

deleted.
Press the rocker switch up or down once while
the system is interrupted. The system will be ac‐
Interrupting manually tivated.
When active, press the button on the steering
wheel: The current speed is maintained and stored as
desired speed.
Button on the steering wheel.
The stored speed is displayed on the speedom‐
eter.
If interrupting the system while stationary, press
on the brake pedal at the same time.
200
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if ditions and maintain the prescribed safety dis‐
necessary. tance, possibly by braking.
The speed can also be stored by pressing a but‐
ton.
Reduce distance
Press the button.
Press the button repeatedly until the
desired distance is set.
Changing the speed Instrument cluster will display selected distance.
Increase the distance

Press the button repeatedly until the
desired distance is set.
Instrument cluster will display selected distance.
Continuing cruise control

An interrupted cruise control can be continued
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly by calling up the stored speed.
until the desired speed is set.
Make sure that the difference between current
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the speed and stored speed is not too large before
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, uninten‐
is clear. tional deceleration or acceleration may occur.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is tapped to the Press the button on the steering wheel with the
resistance point, the set speed increases or system interrupted:
decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h. Button on the steering wheel.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past
the resistance point, the desired speed Cruise control is continued with the stored val‐
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h. ues.
Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the In the following cases, the stored speed value is
action. deleted and cannot be called up again:
▷ When the system is switched off.
Adjusting the distance
▷ When drive-ready state is switched off.
Safety information
Warning
driver’s personal judgment. Due to the system
limits, deceleration can be late. There may be a
risk of accident or risk of damage to property.
Be aware to the traffic situation at all times. Ad‐
just the distance to the traffic and weather con‐
201
Changing between cruise control ▷ Green marking: system is ac‐

with/without distance control tive, the marking indicates the
desired speed.
Safety information ▷ Grey marking: system is inter‐
rupted, the marking indicates
the stored speed.
Warning
▷ No marking: system is switched off.
The system does not react to traffic driving
ahead of you, but instead maintains the stored
speed. There may be a risk of accident or risk Distance to vehicle ahead of you
of damage to property. Adjust the set speed to Selected distance to the vehicle ahead of you is
the traffic conditions and brake as needed. shown.
Icon Description
Change over mode of the cruise Distance 1
control
Switching cruise control without distance control
off and on:
▷ Press and hold this button. Distance 2
▷ Press and hold this button.

Switching on distance control:
▷ Press the button. Distance 3
▷ Press the button.

After changing, a Check Control message is dis‐
played.
Distance 4
This value is set automatically
cluster after the system is switched on.
General information
Depending on the equipment version, the dis‐ No distance control display, as
plays in the instrument cluster may vary. the accelerator pedal is being
pressed.
Display in the speedometer
Depending on the equipment, a mark in the
speedometer displays the status of the system.
202
Detected vehicle Displays in the Head-up Display

Icon Description Set speed
Green icon: Some system information can also be displayed
in the Head-up Display.
A vehicle has been detected
ahead of you. The icon is displayed when the set
speed is reached.
When the distance to the detected vehicle in‐ Distance information

creases, the vehicle symbol in the distance dis‐ The icon is displayed when the distance
play will move away. from the vehicle traveling ahead is too
If necessary, independent drive-off, such as by short.
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by pressing
the rocker switch. The distance information is active in the follow‐
ing situations:
Indicator/warning lights ▷ Active Cruise Control switched off.
▷ Display in the Head-up Display selected.
Icon Description
Head-Up Display, refer to page 160.
Indicator light green: system is ▷ Distance too short.
active.
▷ Speed greater than approx. 40 mph/70 km/h.
No indicator light: system is
switched off. System limits
Vehicle symbol flashes:
The conditions are not adequate System limits of the sensors
for the system to work. Additional information:
The system was deactivated but ▷ Cameras, refer to page 37.
applies the brakes until you ac‐ ▷ Radar sensors, refer to page 38.
tively resume control by press‐
ing on the brake pedal or accel‐ Detection range
erator pedal.
The vehicle symbol and dis‐

tance bars blink red and an
acoustic signal sounds:
Brake and make an evasive ma‐
neuver, if necessary.
System interrupted.
The detection capability of the system and the

automatic braking performance are limited.
203
Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might not be Cornering

detected.
Deceleration
The system does not decelerate in the following
situations:
▷ For pedestrians or similarly slow-moving road
users.
▷ Depending on the equipment, with red traffic
lights.
When the set speed is too high for a curve, the
▷ For cross traffic. speed is reduced slightly. Because curves may
▷ For oncoming traffic. not be anticipated in advance, drive into a curve
at an appropriate speed.
Merging vehicles The system has a limited detection range. Situa‐
tions can arise in tight curves where a vehicle
driving ahead will not be detected or will be de‐
tected very late.
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly merges

into your lane, the system may not be able to au‐
tomatically restore the selected distance. It may
not be possible to restore the selected distance
in certain situations, including if you are driving When you approach a curve the system may
significantly faster than vehicles driving ahead of briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to the
you, for instance when rapidly approaching a bend of the curve. If the system decelerates you
truck. When a vehicle driving ahead of you is reli‐ may compensate it by briefly accelerating. After
ably detected, the system requests that the releasing the accelerator pedal the system is re‐
driver intervene by braking and carrying out eva‐ activated and controls speed independently.
sive maneuvers, if needed.
Driving off
In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off
automatically; for example:
▷ On steep uphill grades.
▷ In front of bumps in the road.
In these cases, step on the accelerator pedal.
204
Weather Safety information

The following restrictions can occur under unfav‐
orable weather or light conditions: Warning
▷ Poorer vehicle detection. The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
▷ Short-term interruptions for vehicles that are driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
already recognized. traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situation. If necessary, intervene actively, for in‐ situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
stance by braking, steering or evading. driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
Drive power ate.
The set speed is also maintained downhill. The

speed may not be maintained on uphill grades if
the drive power is insufficient. Warning
In ECO PRO driving mode, the vehicle may ex‐ The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or
ceed or drop below the set desired speed in called up by mistake. There is a risk of accident.
some situations, for instance on downhill or uphill Adjust the set speed to the traffic conditions.
grades. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Speed Limit Assistant

Overview
Principle Buttons on the steering wheel
Speed Limit Assistant supports driving at the
speed limit. A suggested speed can be applied. Button Function
Accept suggested speed manually.

General information
When the systems in the vehicle, e.g., Speed
Limit Info, detect a change of the speed limit, this Rocker switch:
new speed value can be applied for the following Set speed, refer to Cruise Control.
systems:
▷ Manual Speed Limiter. Turning Speed Limit Assistant
▷ Cruise control. on/off
▷ Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function 1. "CAR"
ACC. 2. "Settings"
The speed value is suggested as the new de‐ 3. "Driver Assistance"
sired speed to be applied. To apply the speed
4. If necessary, "Driving"
value, the corresponding system must be acti‐
vated. 5. "Speed Limit Assistance"
6. "Speed limits"
205
▷ "Adjust manually": detected speed limits System limits

can be applied manually.
Speed Limit Assistant is based on the Speed
▷ "Show anticipation": current and upcom‐ Limit Info system.
ing speed limits are displayed in the in‐
Consider the system limits of Speed Limit Info.
strument cluster without being applied.
Upcoming speed limits can only be applied for
▷ "Show current limit": current speed limits
the Active Cruise Control ACC.
are displayed without being applied in the
instrument cluster. Additional information:
▷ "Off": depending on the national-market ▷ System limits of Speed Limit Information, re‐
version, Speed Limit Info and Speed Limit fer to page 157.
Assistant will be turned off. ▷ System limits of the sensors, refer to
page 37.
cluster
Parking assistance
A message is displayed in the instrument cluster
when the system and a driver assistance system systems
are activated.
Icon Function Principle

The parking assistance systems support the
Depending on the equipment ver‐
driver in parking and maneuvering.
sion, the indicator light illuminates
green, together with the icon for a
cruise control system:
General information
The parking assistance systems comprise the
Speed Limit Assistant is active and
following individual systems.
detected speed limits can be ap‐
plied manually for the displayed Additional information:
system. ▷ PDC Park Distance Control, refer to
page 207.
Detected change of a speed limit
with immediate effect. ▷ Depending on equipment version: emer‐
gency brake function, Active PDC, refer to
Indicator light illuminates green: page 209.
the detected speed limit can be ▷ Side parking aid, refer to page 210.
applied with the SET button.
▷ Without Surround View: rearview camera, re‐
After it has been applied, a green fer to page 211.
checkmark is displayed.
▷ Automatic Parking Assistant, refer to
page 214.
Manual adoption ▷ Automatic Parking Assistant, driving out of
A detected speed limit can be applied manually parking space, refer to page 218.
for the active driver assistance system. ▷ Back-up Assistant, refer to page 219.
When the SET icon lights up, press the ▷ Cross traffic warning, refer to page 221.
button.
206
PDC Park Distance Control Overview

Principle
Park Distance Control (PDC) helps with parking.
Acoustic and visual warnings signal obstacles in
front of or behind the vehicle.
Depending on the equipment version: obstacles
that are detected by the side ultrasonic sensors
may also be reported by the side protection.
General information
The range of the system, depending on obsta‐
Park assistance button
cles and environmental conditions, is approx.
6 ft/2 m.
An acoustic warning sounds in case of an im‐ Sensors
pending collision at a distance to the object of
approx. 27 in/70 cm.
sors:
For objects behind the vehicle, the acoustic
warning is already issued at a distance to the ob‐
ject of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m. ▷ Depending on the equipment: ultrasonic sen‐
sors on the side.
Safety information Additional information:
Warning
Turning on/off
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic The system switches on automatically in the fol‐
situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust lowing situations:
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic ▷ If selector lever position R is engaged when
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ the engine is running.
ate. ▷ Depending on the equipment version: while
approaching detected obstacles at a speed
slower than approx. 2.5 mph/4 km/h. The ac‐
Warning tivation distance depends on the situation in
Due to high speeds when PDC Park Distance question.
Control is activated, the warning can be de‐ You may switch automatic activation when ob‐
layed due to physical circumstances. There is a stacles are detected on and off.
risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
1. "CAR"
Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid
driving off fast while PDC Park Distance Control 2. "Settings"
is not yet active. 3. "Driver Assistance"
207
4. "Parking and Maneuvering" Steptronic transmission: the intermittent tone

5. If necessary, "Automatic PDC Activation" and constant tone are switched off if the selector
lever position P is engaged.
6. "Automatic PDC Activation"
The intermittent tone is switched off after a short
Depending on equipment, an additional camera
time when the vehicle is stationary.
view is also switched on.
Volume
Automatic deactivation during
The PDC signal tone volume can be adjusted.
forward travel
The system switches off when a certain driving 1. "CAR"
distance or speed is exceeded. 2. "Settings"
Switch the system back on, if needed. 3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Parking and Maneuvering"
Switching on/off manually
5. "Volume PDC signal"
Press the park assistance button. 6. Set the desired value.
▷ On: the LED lights up. Visual warning

▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The rearview camera image is displayed if the re‐
verse gear is engaged when pressing the park
assistance button.
Depending on the equipment version, the sys‐
tem cannot be switched off manually if the re‐
verse gear is engaged.
Warning
The approach of the vehicle to an object is
Signal tones shown on the Control Display. Objects that are
farther away are already displayed on the Control
General information Display before a signal sounds.
An intermittent tone indicates when the vehicle
The display appears as soon as PDC is activated.
is approaching an object. E.g., when an object is
detected at the rear left of the vehicle, a signal The range of the sensors is represented in the
tone sounds from the rear left speaker. colors green, yellow and red when obstacles are
detected.
The shorter the distance to the object, the
shorter the intervals. Lanes are faded in for better estimation of the re‐
quired space.
When the distance to a detected object is less
than approx. 8 in/20 cm, a continuous tone is When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐
sounded. played, the switch can be made to PDC or to a
different view with obstacle markings as needed:
When there are objects in front of and behind the
vehicle at the same time, with a distance smaller 1. Press the Controller to the left, if needed.
than approx. 8 in/20 cm, an alternating constant 2. For instance "Park. sensors only"
tone will sound.
208
Cross traffic warning: depending on the equip‐ obstacle detection, for instance in automatic car
ment, it is warned in the PDC display against ve‐ washes.
hicles approaching in the front or rear from the
side. Malfunction
Additional information: A Check Control message is displayed.
Cross traffic warning, refer to page 221. White icon is displayed, and the range of
the sensors is dimmed on the Control
System limits Display.
Safety information PDC Park Distance Control malfunction. Have

the system checked by a dealer's service center
or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Warning
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐ Depending on equipment
version: emergency brake
of damage to property. Actively intervene as function, Active PDC
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐ Principle
The emergency braking function of PDC initiates
an emergency braking in case of acute risk of
System limits of the sensors collision.
General information
▷ Ultrasonic sensors, refer to page 38.
Due to system limits, a collision cannot be pre‐
vented under all circumstances.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
The function is available below walking speed
The detection of objects with ultrasonic meas‐
when driving in reverse or rolling backward.
urements can run into physical limits, e.g., in the
following situations: A press of the accelerator pedal interrupts the
brake intervention.
▷ With obstacles and persons at the edge of
the lane. After emergency braking to a stop, further creep‐
ing toward an obstacle is possible. Proceed with
▷ Low objects already displayed, for instance
caution. To move forward, lightly press the accel‐
curbs, can move into the blind area of the
erator pedal and release as needed.
sensors before or after a continuous tone
sounds. If the accelerator pedal is depressed longer, the
vehicle drives off. Manual braking is possible at
Unwarranted warnings any time.
Reaching the system limits can cause unwar‐ The system uses the ultrasonic sensors of the
ranted warnings. Park Distance Control PDC and the Parking As‐
sistant.
To prevent unwarranted alarms, switch off auto‐
matic Park Distance Control PDC activation on
209
Safety information If required, deactivate the system via iDrive

where applicable.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the With Parking Assistant:
side parking aid
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust Principle
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic The side protection warns of obstacles on the
and vehicle surroundings closely and actively side of the vehicle.
intervene where appropriate.
General information
Additionally, the safety information for the PDC
The system uses the ultrasonic sensors of the
Park Distance Control and the Automatic Parking
Park Distance Control PDC and the Parking As‐
Assistant apply.
sistant.
▷ PDC Park Distance Control, refer to Safety information
page 207.
▷ Automatic Parking Assistant, refer to
Warning
page 214.
Temporary switching off
The emergency brake function can be switched tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
off temporarily: situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
Confirm the message on the Control Display. driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
During continued driving in this surrounding sit‐ and vehicle surroundings closely and actively
uation, no further emergency braking will occur. intervene where appropriate.
Settings Additionally, the safety information for the PDC

It is possible to set which areas on the vehicle will Assistant apply.
be protected by the system.
1. "CAR" ▷ PDC Park Distance Control, refer to
2. "Settings" page 207.
3. "Driver Assistance" ▷ Automatic Parking Assistant, refer to
4. "Parking and Maneuvering" page 214.
5. "Active PDC with braking interv."
System limits
The limits of the systems of the Park Distance
Control PDC and the Parking Assistant apply.
210
Display Additionally, assistance functions can be shown

in the display, e.g., help lines.
Safety information
Warning
To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
markings are displayed on the sides of the vehi‐ driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
cle. and vehicle surroundings closely and actively
▷ Color markings: warning against detected ob‐ intervene where appropriate.
stacles.
▷ Gray markings, hatched area: no obstacles
Overview
were detected.
▷ No markings, black area: the area next to the Depending on the vehicle
vehicle was not yet captured. equipment: button in the vehicle
Limits of the side parking aid

The system only displays stationary obstacles
that were previously detected by sensors while
passing them.
The system does not detect whether an obstacle
moves later on. If the vehicle is stationary, the
markings are shown in black after a certain time.
The area next to the vehicle must be newly cap‐
tured. Park assistance button
Additionally, the limits of the systems of the Park
Distance Control PDC and the Parking Assistant
apply. Sensors
sors:
Rearview camera ▷ Rearview camera.
Principle
The rearview camera provides assistance in
parking and maneuvering backwards. The area
behind the vehicle is shown on the Control Dis‐
play.
211
Turning on/off Display on the Control Display
Turning on automatically Toolbars

The system is switched on automatically if selec‐ The assistance functions can be activated man‐
tor lever position R is engaged when the engine ually via the toolbars on the sides of the Control
is running. Display.
1. Move the Controller to the right, if needed.
Automatic deactivation during
forward travel 2. With corresponding equipment:
"Camera image"
The system switches off when a certain driving
3. ▷ "Parking aid lines".
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on, if needed. Pathway lines and turning circle lines are
displayed.
Depending on the vehicle ▷ "Obstacle mark.".
equipment: switching on/off Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
manually obstacles detected by PDC Park Distance
Control are displayed by markings.
Press the park assistance button.
More than one assistance function can be active
at the same time.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out. Parking aid lines
The parking assistance functions are shown on
the Control Display. Lanes
Switching the view via iDrive

If the rearview camera view is not displayed,
change the view via iDrive:
1. If necessary, tilt the Controller to the side.

2. "Rear view camera"
The rearview camera image is displayed.
Functional requirements Lanes help you to estimate the space required

▷ The trunk lid is fully closed. when parking and maneuvering on level roads.
▷ Keep the recording range of the camera Lanes depend on the steering angle and are
open. Protruding cargo, roof rack systems or continuously adjusted to the steering wheel
trailers can limit the detection range of the movements.
camera.
212
Turning circle lines The colored thresholds of the obstacle markings

match the markings of the PDC Park Distance
Control.
Setting brightness and contrast

With the rearview camera switched on:
1. Move the Controller to the right, if needed.

2. "Camera image"
Turning circle lines can only be superimposed on
the camera image together with lanes. System limits
Turning circle lines show the course of the small‐
est possible turning radius on a level road. System limits of the sensors
Only one turning circle line is displayed after the Additional information:
steering wheel is turned past a certain angle.
Parking using lanes and turning circle lines Deactivated camera

1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning When the camera is deactivated, for instance
circle line leads to within the limits of the when the trunk lid is open, the camera image is
parking space. displayed hatched in gray.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the green lane covers the corresponding Detection of objects
turning circle line. Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding
objects such as ledges may not be detected by
Obstacle marking the system.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, some as‐
sistance functions also consider data from the
PDC Park Distance Control.
Follow the notes in the PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol chapter.
The objects displayed on the Control Display
may be closer than they appear. Do not estimate
the distance from the objects on the display.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, obstacles

behind the vehicle are detected by the PDC Park
Distance Control sensors.
Obstacle markings can be faded into the image
of the rearview camera.
213
With Parking Assistant: the following functions during the parking opera‐
tion:
Parking Assistant ▷ Steering.
▷ Accelerating and braking.
Principle ▷ Changing gears.
The parking operation is automatic.
Safety information
Warning
The Automatic Parking Assistant supports the tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
driver in the following situations: situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
▷ When parking parallel to the road, parallel driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
parking. closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.
▷ When parking in reverse perpendicular to the
road, perpendicular parking. The system ori‐
ents itself with the middle of the parking
space. NOTICE
▷ Depending on the equipment version: when The system can steer the vehicle over or onto
driving out of parallel parking spaces. curbs. There is a risk of damage to property,
among other potential damage. Watch traffic
General information
ate.
Handling
The safety information of the PDC Park Distance
Automatic Parking Assistant handling is divided Control apply in addition.
into three steps:
▷ Switching on and activating.
PDC Park Distance Control, refer to page 207.
▷ Parking space search.
▷ Parking.
System status and instructions on required ac‐
tions are displayed on the Control Display.
Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces on
both sides of the vehicle.
The Automatic Parking Assistant calculates the
best possible parking line and takes control of
214
Overview ▷ Min. length of gap between two objects: own

vehicle length plus approx. 2.6 ft/0.8 m.
Button in the vehicle ▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
Perpendicular parking:
▷ Minimum width of the gap: own vehicle width
plus approx. 2.3 ft/0.7 m.
▷ Minimum depth: own vehicle length.
The depth of diagonal parking spaces must
be estimated by the driver. Due to technical
limitations, the system is only able to approxi‐
mate the depth of diagonal parking spaces.
Park assistance button For the parking operation

▷ Doors and trunk lid are closed.
Sensors Steptronic transmission:
The system is controlled by the following sen‐ ▷ Driver's safety belt is fastened.
sors:
Switching on with the button
▷ Ultrasonic sensors, side. Press the park assistance button.
Additional information: The LED lights up.
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 37. The current status of the parking space search is
indicated on the Control Display.
Functional requirements Automatic Parking Assistant is activated au‐
tomatically.
For the measurement od parking
spaces Switching on with reverse gear
▷ Maximum speed while driving forward approx. 1. Shift into reverse.
22 mph/35 km/h.
The current status of the parking space
▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehicles: search is indicated on the Control Display.
5 ft/1.5 m.
2. If necessary, activate: "Autom. Parking"
Suitable parking space
Switching on via iDrive
General information:
Display of the rearview camera or PDC view
▷ Gap behind an object that has a min. length
must be active.
of 1.7 ft/0.5 m.
▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum 1. Move the Controller to the right.
length of approx. 1.7 ft/0.5 m. 2. Activate the parking assistant on the Control
Parallel parking to the road: Display: "Autom. Parking"
215
Display on the Control Display ▷ The parking operation is active. The sys‐
tem takes over the steering.
System activated/deactivated ▷ Parking space search is always active when‐
ever the vehicle is moving forward slow and
Icon Meaning straight, even if the system is deactivated.
When the system is deactivated, the displays
Gray: the system is not available. on the Control Display are shown in gray.
White: the system is available but not
activated. Switching signal tone for
System is activated. suitable parking spaces on/off
1. "CAR"
Parking space search is active.
2. "Settings"
The parking operation is active. The
system takes over the steering.
4. "Parking and Maneuvering"
Parking space search and system 5. "Automatic Parking"
status 6. "Alert if parking space detected"
Signal tones of the PDC Park

Distance Control
During an automatic parking operation, no inter‐
mittent tone will sound from the PDC Park Dis‐
tance Control.
A continuous tone sounds when the distance to
a detected object is less than approx. 8 in‐
ches/20 cm.
▷ Parking assistant is activated and parking
space search is active. Parking using the Automatic
▷ Control Display shows suitable parking Parking Assistant
spaces at the edge of the road next to the ve‐
hicle symbol. When Park Assistant is active, Parking
suitable parking spaces are highlighted and
1. Switching on and activating the parking assis‐
an acoustic signal sounds.
tant.
▷ If a diagonal or parallel parking space is clearly
For this, engage the reverse gear or press the
detected, the system automatically adjusts
parking assist button and activate the system
the suitable parking method. In the case of
on the Control Display, if needed.
parking spaces suitable for parallel and diago‐
nal parking, a selection menu is displayed. In Automatic Parking Assistant is activated.
this case, the desired parking method must 2. Pass the row of parked vehicles forward at a
be selected manually. speed of up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h and
at a distance of maximum 5 ft/1.5 m.
216
The status of the parking space search and ▷ When a maximum number of parking at‐
possible parking spaces are displayed on the tempts or the time taken for parking is ex‐
Control Display. ceeded.
3. Confirm the suggested parking space for the ▷ When changing over to another function on
parking operation: select the parking space the Control Display.
on the Control Display. Steptronic transmission:
The system takes over the steering. ▷ If the trunk lid is open.
4. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐ ▷ If doors are open.
play.
▷ When setting the parking brake.
▷ During acceleration.
At the end of the parking operation, the P se‐
▷ When the brake pedal remains pressed for an
lector lever position is set.
extended period while the vehicle is station‐
The end of the parking operation is indicated ary.
on the Control Display.
▷ When unfastening the driver's safety belt.
5. Adjust the parking position yourself, if
needed.
Resuming
Interrupting manually
An interrupted parking operation can be contin‐
The Automatic Parking Assistant can be inter‐
ued, if needed.
rupted at any time:
Reactivate the parking assistant and follow the
▷ Press the park assistance button.
instructions on the Control Display.
▷ "Autom. Parking": select the icon on the

Control Display.
Turning off
The system can be switched off manually:
Interrupting automatically Press the park assistance button.
The system is interrupted automatically in the
following situations:
▷ When the driver grasps the steering wheel or System limits
takes over steering.
▷ Possibly on snow-covered or slippery road.
Safety information
▷ When there are obstacles that are hard to
overcome, such as curbs. Warning
▷ When there are obstacles that suddenly ap‐ The system is designed to operate in certain
pear. conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐
▷ If the PDC Park Distance Control displays
clearances that are too small.
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐
217
No parking assistance Depending on the

The Automatic Parking Assistant does not offer
assistance in the following situations:
equipment version: driving
▷ In tight curves. out of a parking space
▷ For diagonal parking spaces. using the parking assistant
System limits of the sensors Principle
Additional information: The system makes driving out of parallel parking
▷ Ultrasonic sensors, refer to page 38. spaces easier.
Functional limitations General information

tions: Steptronic transmission
▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel The parking assistant calculates an optimal line
roads. for pulling out of a parking space and takes con‐
▷ On slippery ground. trol of the following functions during the maneu‐
ver:
▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades.
▷ Steering.
▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the
parking space. ▷ Accelerating and braking.
▷ With a mounted emergency wheel. ▷ Changing gears.
▷ In case of changes to an already-measured The vehicle maneuvers automatically until the

parking space. vehicle reaches a position in which the driver can
drive out of the parking space without further
▷ With ditches or edges, for instance an edge steering movements.
of a port.
▷ Parking spaces that are not suitable may be Safety information
detected or suitable parking spaces may not
be detected at all.
Warning
Malfunction The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
The Automatic Parking Assistant has malfunc‐ tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
tioned. Have the system checked by a dealer's situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
service center or another qualified service center driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
or repair shop. closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.
Additionally, the safety information for the PDC

Assistant apply.
218
▷ PDC Park Distance Control, refer to System limits

page 207.
The limits of the systems of the Park Distance
▷ Automatic Parking Assistant, refer to Control PDC and the Parking Assistant apply.
page 214.
Functional requirements With Parking Assistant:

▷ The vehicle was parked manually and objects Reversing Assistant
in front of and behind the car are detected.
The distance to a detected curb is at least
6 inches/15 cm.
Principle
▷ The vehicle was parked using the parking as‐ The Back-up Assistant supports the driver when
sistant and an object is detected in front of driving in reverse, for instance when driving out
the vehicle. of tight or confusing parking or street situations.
▷ The parking space is at least 2.6 ft/0.8 m lon‐ The vehicle stores the driving movements of the
ger than your vehicle. last route. This stored route can be driven back
with automated steering.
▷ The vehicle has been parked in reverse.
General information
Driving out of parking spaces
The system takes control of the steering when
1. Turn on drive readiness. driving in reverse along the stored route.
2. Steptronic transmission: The driver controls driving the vehicle via accel‐
Press the park assistance button or shift into erator pedal and brake.
reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary to The Reversing Assistant uses the control ele‐
switch on the Automatic Parking Assistant. ments and sensors of the PDC Park Distance
3. Tilt the Controller to the right and activate the Control and the Automatic Parking Assistant.
Automatic Parking Assistant on the Control Additional information:
Display: "Autom. Parking"
▷ PDC Park Distance Control, refer to
4. On the Control Display, confirm the required page 207.
direction for driving out of the parking space if
necessary. ▷ Parking assistant, refer to page 214.
5. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐

play.
Safety information
Warning
The system takes control of the maneuver. A
message will be displayed at the end of the The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
maneuver. driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
6. Make sure that the traffic situation permits
driving out of the parking space and drive off
situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
as usual.
The Automatic Parking Assistant is switched closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
off automatically. ate.
219
Additionally, the safety information for the PDC with the instruction to take control of the ve‐
Park Distance Control and the Automatic Parking hicle.
Assistant apply.
Additional information: Terminating the system
▷ PDC Park Distance Control, refer to The system automatically cancels in situations
page 207. such as the following:
▷ Automatic Parking Assistant, refer to ▷ When the driver grasps the steering wheel or
page 214. takes over steering.
▷ When engaging a forward gear.
Functional requirements ▷ During activation or intervention by driving
▷ Drive forward without interruption to store the control systems or assist systems.
route. ▷ After a few minutes when the vehicle is sta‐
▷ A maximum of 165 ft/50 m will be stored. tionary.
▷ To store the route, do not exceed a driving ▷ If the vehicle leaves the stored lane during re‐
speed of 22 mph/36 km/h. versing; for example, at the maximum steer‐
▷ DSC Dynamic Stability Control is activated. ing angle.
▷ When the display on the Control Display is
Driving back with automated cross-faded with messages, e.g., due to in‐
steering coming calls.
1. Press the park assistance button or shift into

reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary
System limits
and the drive-ready state is switched on. ▷ When you reach normal road traffic or if you
encounter an obstacle, stop immediately and
2. Move the Controller to the right.
take over control of the vehicle.
3. "Back-up Assistant"
▷ The maximum speed for driving in reverse is
The system takes over the steering. limited to approximately 6 mph/9 km/h.
4. Follow the instructions on the Control Display If the maximum speed is exceeded, a warning
where required. is issued and the function may be canceled.
5. Take your hands off the steering wheel and ▷ After driving a stored distance with major
carefully drive off with the accelerator pedal steering-wheel angles, the function of the
and the brake. system will be limited for the return trip.
When driving in reverse, pay attention to the ▷ Additionally, the limits of the systems of the
vehicle's surroundings, and if you encounter Park Distance Control PDC and the Parking
an obstacle, stop immediately and take over Assistant apply.
control of the vehicle. Follow the instructions
Different influences can lead to side deviations
on the PDC Park Distance Control.
when driving back on the stored route. For exam‐
6. Stop no later than when normal traffic is ple, this includes the following factors:
reached and take control of the vehicle, such
as by shifting to a forward gear.
At the end of the stored route, a signal will
sound and a request will be displayed, also
220
▷ Steering movements when the vehicle is sta‐ Overview

tionary while storing the distance covered.
▷ The speed is not adapted to the distance Button in the vehicle
traveled.
▷ Road characteristics, such as gradients or in‐
clines.
Cross traffic warning

Principle
At blind driveway exits or when driving out of per‐
pendicular parking spaces, road users approach‐ Park assistance button
ing from the side are detected sooner by the
cross traffic warning than is possible from the
driver's seat. Sensors
General information sors:
Switching on/off
Activating/deactivating the system
With the button

Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor
the area behind the vehicle.
1. Press the park assistance button.
The system indicates approaching road users.
3. "Settings"
Safety information 4. "Cross Traffic Warning"
5. "Cross traffic warning"
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the Via iDrive
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility 1. "CAR"
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. 2. "Settings"
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐ 3. "Driver Assistance"
propriate. 4. "Parking and Maneuvering"
5. "Cross Traffic Warning"
6. "Cross traffic warning"
221
Turning on automatically Display in the PDC Park Distance

If the system was activated on the Control Dis‐ Control view
play, it is automatically switched on as soon as
PDC Park Distance Control is active and a gear is
engaged.
If reverse gear is engaged, the rear system is
switched on.
Switching off automatically

The system is automatically switched off in the
following situations:
▷ When the speed exceeds walking speed. In the PDC Park Distance Control view, the re‐
spective boundary area flashes red, if vehicles
▷ When a certain driving distance is exceeded.
are detected by the sensors.
▷ With an active parking operation of the Auto‐
matic Parking Assistant.
Acoustic warning
Warning In addition to the optical indicator, a warning sig‐
nal sounds if your own vehicle moves into the re‐
General information spective direction.
The respective display is called up on the Con‐
trol Display. A signal tone may sound and the System limits
light in the exterior mirror may flash.
Light in the exterior mirror Additional information:
tions:
▷ In tight curves.
▷ When crossing objects move at a very slow
or a very fast speed.
▷ If other objects are in the capture range of the
The light in the exterior mirror flashes if vehicles
sensors, that hide cross traffic.
are detected by the rear sensors and your own
vehicle is moving in reverse.
222
Driving comfort CONTROLS
Driving comfort
Vehicle features and Performance Control
options Performance Control enhances the agility of the
vehicle.
cific and optional features offered with the series. To increase maneuverability, wheels are braked
It also describes features and functions that are individually when a sporty driving style is used.
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ Engine sound
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ Depending on the equipment and national-mar‐
served. ket version, you may be able to configure the
sound of the engine.
1. "CAR"
Chassis components
2. "Settings"
The chassis components are optimized for the 3. "General settings"
vehicle and its application range and thereby en‐ 4. "Engine sound"
sure the best possible Driving Dynamics.
Adaptive chassis
Principle
With the adaptive suspension, the chassis set‐
ting can be changed.
Programs
The system offers several different programs.
Select the programs via the Driving Dynamics
Control.
SPORT
Consistently sporty tuning of the shock absorb‐
ers for greater driving agility.
COMFORT/ECO PRO
Balanced tuning of the shock absorbers for more
comfort.
223
CONTROLS Climate control
Climate control
Vehicle features and Automatic climate control
options
Overview
cific and optional features offered with the series. Buttons in the vehicle
served.
Air quality
Climate control functions
General information
The air quality in the interior is improved by the Button Function
following components:
Defrost function.
▷ Emission tested passenger compartment.
▷ Interior filter.
▷ Air conditioning system to control the tem‐
perature, air flow and recirculated-air mode.
AUTO program.
▷ Pre-ventilation.
▷ Depending on the equipment: Temperature.
Automatic recirculated-air control.
Switching off.
Interior filter
Depending on the equipment, the interior filter Air flow, manual.
cleans the inflowing outside air and improves the
air quality:
Air distribution, manual.
▷ Dust and pollen is filtered out from the inflow‐
ing air.
Air recirculation mode.
▷ Nano-particle emissions are reduced.
▷ Gaseous pollutants are filtered.
Air conditioning.
▷ Microbial particles and allergens are filtered.
224
Climate control CONTROLS
Button Function Via iDrive:
Maximum cooling. 1. "CAR"

2. "Settings"
Seat heating, refer to page 117. 3. "Climate control"
4. "Heating/ventilation"
5. "Driver"
Some of the functions can also be used via
voice, e.g., temperature. 6. "Temperature:"
7. Set the desired temperature.
Switching climate control Do not rapidly switch between different tempera‐
functions on/off ture settings. Otherwise, the automatic climate
control will not have sufficient time to adjust the
Turning on set temperature.
Press one of the following buttons:
Air conditioning
▷ Temperature.
▷ Air conditioning. Principle
▷ Maximum cooling. The air in the car's interior will be cooled and de‐
▷ AUTO program. humidified and, depending on the temperature
▷ Air recirculation mode. setting, warmed again.
▷ Air flow, manual.

▷ Air distribution, manual.
The car's interior can only be cooled with the
▷ Defrosting the windshield drive-ready state switched on.
Turning off Switch climate control function

Complete system: on/off
Press the button until the automatic cli‐ Press the button.
mate control switches off. The LED is illuminated when the cli‐
mate control function is switched on.
Temperature Depending on the weather, the windshield and
the side windows may fog up briefly when drive-
Principle ready state is switched on.
The automatic climate control cools or heats to Air conditioning is switched on automatically with
the configured temperature and then keeps the the AUTO program.
temperature constant.
When using the cooling mode, condensation that
will exit below the vehicle.
Setting the temperature
Using the button:
Press the upper or lower button side to
set the desired temperature.
225
Maximum cooling 4. "Heating/ventilation"

5. "Automatic"
Principle Depending on the selected temperature and out‐
The system is set to the lowest temperature, op‐ side influences, the air is directed to the wind‐
timum air flow and recirculated-air mode with the shield, side windows, upper body, and into the
drive-ready state switched on. floor area.
Point the side air vents toward the side windows.
Functional requirement The cooling function is switched on with the
The system is available at outside temperatures AUTO program.
above approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the drive-
The AUTO program is switched off automati‐
ready state switched on.
cally, when manual air distribution is set.
Switching maximum cooling on/off

Air recirculation mode
Press the button.
The LED is illuminated when maximum Principle
cooling is switched on. You may react to unpleasant odors or pollutants
in the immediate environment by temporarily
Air flows out of the air vents to the upper body
suspending the supply of outside air. The system
region. The air vents need to be open for this.
then recirculates the interior air.
The air flow can be adjusted with the program
When recirculated-air mode is switched off, fresh
active.
air is directed into the vehicle's interior.
AUTO program Switch air recirculation on/off

Using the button:
Principle
The AUTO program cools, ventilates or heats Press the button.
the car's interior automatically. The LED of the button is illuminated
The air flow, air distribution and the temperature when the air-recirculation mode is switched on.
will be controlled automatically depending on the
Via iDrive:
interior temperature and the setting for the de‐
sired temperature. 1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Switching the AUTO program on/off 3. "Climate control"
Using the button:
4. "Air quality"
Press the button. 5. Select the desired setting:
The LED of the button is illuminated ▷ "Air recirculation"
with the AUTO program switched on.
▷ "Fresh air"
Via iDrive: To prevent window fogging, recirculated-air
mode switches off automatically after a certain
1. "CAR"
amount of time, depending on the environmental
2. "Settings" conditions.
226
With constant air recirculation mode, the air qual‐ Defrost function
ity in the car's interior deteriorates and window
fogging increases. Principle
If there is window condensation, switch off recir‐ Ice and condensation are quickly removed from
culated-air mode or defog the windows. the windshield and the front side windows.
Air flow, manual Switching the Defrost function

on/off
Principle
Press the button.
The air flow for climate control can be adjusted
manually. The LED of the button is illuminated
when the system is switched on.
Adjusting the air flow manually The air flow can be adjusted manually with the
Press the lower or upper side of the system switched on.
button: decrease or increase air flow. If there is any window condensation, switch on
the air conditioning. Make sure that air can flow
The selected air flow is shown on the climate to the windshield.
control display.
The air flow may be reduced automatically to Rear window defroster
save battery power.
Principle
Manual air distribution Ice and condensation are removed from the rear
window quickly.
Principle
The air distribution for climate control can be ad‐ Functional requirement
justed manually.
The function is operational when the drive-ready
state is switched on.
Adjusting the air distribution
The rear window defroster can only be activated
manually
continuously at an outside temperature below
Press the button repeatedly. Select the approx. 41 ℉/5 ℃.
desired setting:
Switching rear window defroster
▷ Windows, upper body region, and floor area.
on/off
▷ Upper body region and floor area.
Press the button. The LED is illumi‐
▷ Floor area.
nated with rear window defroster
▷ Windows and floor area. switched on.
▷ Windows. The rear window defroster switches off automat‐
▷ Windows and upper body. ically after a certain period of time.
▷ Upper body region. For permanent activation, press the button for
The selected air distribution is shown on the cli‐ longer than 3 seconds. To deactivate, press the
mate control display. button again.
227
Microfilter Button Function

The microfilter removes dust and pollen from the
Defrost function.
incoming air.
Have this filter changed during vehicle mainte‐
nance.
Seat heating, refer to page 117.

Automatic climate control
with enhanced features Air conditioning.
Open Climate menu, such as for
the following settings: upper
Overview
body temperature adjustment,
pre-ventilation, air conditioning.
Buttons in the vehicle
Some of the functions can also be used via
voice, e.g., temperature.
Opening the Climate menu

Press the button.
The Climate menu is displayed.

For example, the following climate control func‐
tions can be accessed via the Climate menu:
Climate control functions
▷ Air quality.
Button Function ▷ Heating/ventilation.

▷ Pre-ventilation.
Temperature.
▷ Air conditioning.
Individual settings can be entered for some of
Air recirculation mode.
the climate functions, e.g., switching on/off, in‐
tensity.
Maximum cooling.
Switching climate control
AUTO program. functions on/off
Switching off. Turning on

Air flow, manual. ▷ Temperature.
Intensity AUTO program. ▷ Air conditioning.
Air distribution, manual. ▷ Maximum cooling.
▷ AUTO program.
228
▷ Air recirculation mode. Air conditioning

▷ Upper side of the air flow, manual button.
▷ Air distribution, manual. Principle
▷ Defrosting the windshield The air in the car's interior will be cooled and de‐
humidified and, depending on the temperature
Turning off setting, warmed again.
Complete system:
Press the button. The car's interior can only be cooled with the
drive-ready state switched on.
Temperature Switch climate control function

on/off
Principle
Using the button:
The automatic climate control cools or heats to
the configured temperature and then keeps the Press the button.
temperature constant.
Via iDrive:
Setting the temperature 1. "CAR"
Using the button: 2. "Settings"
Press the upper or lower button side to 3. "Climate control"
set the desired temperature.
Via iDrive: 5. "A/C"
1. "CAR" Depending on the weather, the windshield and

the side windows may fog up briefly when drive-
2. "Settings"
ready state is switched on.
Air conditioning is switched on automatically with
4. "Heating/ventilation" the AUTO program.
5. "Driver" or "Front passenger" When using the cooling mode, condensation that
6. "Temperature:" will exit below the vehicle.
7. Set the desired temperature.
8. "OK"
Maximum cooling
Do not rapidly switch between different tempera‐ Principle
ture settings. Otherwise, the automatic climate
control will not have sufficient time to adjust the The system is set to the lowest temperature, op‐
set temperature. timum air flow and recirculated-air mode with the
drive-ready state switched on.
The function is available at an outside tempera‐
ture above approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the drive-
ready state switched on.
229
Switching maximum cooling on/off At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐
trols the program so as to prevent window con‐
Press the button.
densation as much as possible.
The LED is illuminated when maximum
The AUTO program is switched off automati‐
cooling is switched on.
cally, when manual air distribution is set.
Air flows out of the air vents to the upper body
region. The air vents need to be open for this. Controlling the intensity of the air
The air flow can be adjusted with the program flow
active. With the AUTO program switched on, the inten‐
sity can be adjusted. This changes the automatic
AUTO program control for the air mass.
Using the button:
Principle Press the lower or upper side of the
The AUTO program cools, ventilates or heats button: decrease or increase intensity.
the car's interior automatically.
Via iDrive:
The air distribution and the temperature are con‐
trolled automatically depending on the interior 1. "CAR"
temperature and the desired temperature setting 2. "Settings"
including the selected intensity of the air flow.
Switching the AUTO program on/off 4. "Heating/ventilation"
Using the button: 5. "Driver"
Press the button. 6. "Level"
The LED of the button is illuminated 7. Set the desired intensity.

with the AUTO program switched on. The selected intensity is shown on the climate
control display.
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR" Automatic recirculated-air
2. "Settings" control
Principle
The automatic recirculated-air control recognizes
5. "Driver" pollutants in the outside air. The outside air sup‐
6. "Automatic" ply is shut off and the interior air is recirculated.
Depending on the selected settings and outside
influences, the air is directed to the windshield, General information
side windows, upper body, and into the floor If the system is activated, a sensor detects pollu‐
area. tants in the outside air and controls the shut-off
Point the side air vents toward the side windows. automatically.
The cooling function is switched on with the If the system is deactivated, outside air continu‐
AUTO program. ously flows into the car's interior.
230
With constant air recirculation mode, the air qual‐ amount of time, depending on the environmental
ity in the car's interior deteriorates and window conditions.
fogging increases. With constant air recirculation mode, the air qual‐
If there is window condensation, switch off recir‐ ity in the car's interior deteriorates and window
culated-air mode or defog the windows. fogging increases.
If there is window condensation, switch off recir‐
Switching automatic recirculated-air culated-air mode or defog the windows.
control on/off
1. "CAR" Air flow, manual
2. "Settings"
Principle
The air flow for climate control can be adjusted
4. "Air quality"
manually.
5. "Automatic"
General information
Air recirculation mode To adjust the air flow manually switch off AUTO
program first.
Principle
You may react to unpleasant odors or pollutants Adjusting the air flow manually
in the immediate environment by temporarily
suspending the supply of outside air. The system Press the lower or upper side of the
then recirculates the interior air. button: decrease or increase air flow.
When recirculated-air mode is switched off, fresh The selected air flow is shown on the climate
air is directed into the vehicle's interior. control display.
The air flow may be reduced automatically to
Switch air recirculation on/off save battery power.
Using the button:
Press the button. Manual air distribution
The LED of the button is illuminated
when the air-recirculation mode is switched on.
Principle
The air distribution for climate control can be ad‐
Via iDrive: justed manually.
1. "CAR"
Adjusting the air distribution
2. "Settings"
manually
Press the button repeatedly. Select the
4. "Air quality" desired setting:
▷ Windows, upper body region, and floor area.
▷ "Air recirculation"
▷ Upper body region and floor area.
▷ "Fresh air"
▷ Floor area.
To prevent window fogging, recirculated-air
mode switches off automatically after a certain ▷ Windows and floor area.
231
▷ Windows. Rear window defroster

▷ Windows and upper body region.
▷ Upper body region. Principle
The selected air distribution is shown on the cli‐ Ice and condensation are removed from the rear
mate control display. window quickly.
SYNC program Functional requirement

The function is operational when the drive-ready
Principle state is switched on.
The Sync program can be used to apply the set‐ The rear window defroster can only be activated
tings on the driver's side to the passenger’s side. continuously at an outside temperature below
approx. 41 ℉/5 ℃.
Switching the SYNC program on/off
1. "CAR"
Switching rear window defroster
on/off
2. "Settings"
Press the button. The LED is illumi‐
nated with rear window defroster
4. "Synchronize" switched on.
The following settings of the driver's side can be The rear window defroster switches off automat‐
transferred to the front-passenger side: ically after a certain period of time.
▷ Temperature. For permanent activation, press the button for
The program is switched off automatically if the longer than 3 seconds. To deactivate, press the
settings on the front passenger side are button again.
changed.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal
Defrost function
filter
Principle The microfilter removes dust and pollen from the
incoming air.
Ice and condensation are quickly removed from
the windshield and the front side windows. The activated-charcoal filter also removes gas‐
eous pollutants from the outside air that enters
Switching the Defrost function the vehicle.
on/off Have this combined filter changed during vehicle
maintenance.
Press the button.
The LED of the button is illuminated
when the system is switched on. Ventilation
The air flow can be adjusted manually with the
system switched on. Principle
If there is window condensation, switch on the The air flow directions can be adjusted individu‐
AUTO program or the air conditioning to utilize ally for direct or indirect ventilation.
the condensation sensor. Make sure that air can
flow to the windshield.
232
Setting the ventilation Ventilation in rear, center
General information
Open the air vents and position them to ensure
effective climate control.
Direct ventilation
The air flow is directed towards the passengers.
The air flow heats or cools noticeably, depending
on the adjusted temperature.
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐
Indirect ventilation row 1.
The air flow is not directed towards the passen‐ ▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and closing
gers. The vehicle interior is warmed or cooled in‐ of the air vents, arrow 2.
directly, depending on the set temperature.
Front ventilation Pre-ventilation

Principle
The car's interior can be cooled or heated before
driving off with the pre-ventilation. Depending on
set temperature and ambient temperature, the
car's interior is ventilated or possibly heated us‐
ing the residual engine heat.
General information
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐
row 1. The system can be switched on and off directly
or via a preset departure time.
▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and closing
of the air vents, arrow 2. The activation time is determined based on the
outside temperature. The system promptly
switches on before the selected departure time.
▷ The vehicle is in idle state or standby state
and not in drive-ready state.
▷ The battery is sufficiently charged.
If pre-ventilation is switched on, the vehicle
battery will be discharged. Thus, limit the
maximum activation time to save the vehicle
battery. The system will be available again af‐
ter the engine is started or after a short trip.
233
▷ Make sure that the vehicle's date and time Via iDrive
are set correctly.
▷ Open the air vents to allow air to flow out. Turning on
1. "CAR"
Switching on/off directly 2. "Settings"
General information
4. "Pre-ventilation"
There are different ways to switch the system on
or off. 5. "Start now"
The system switches off automatically after a

Display
certain period of time. The system continues to
run for some time after being switched off.
Icon Description
Using the button Symbol on the climate con‐

trol display.
Functional requirement Flashing: the pre-ventilation
When the vehicle is in standby state, the pre- is switched on.
ventilation can be switched on or off with the au‐
tomatic climate control buttons.
Departure time
Turning on
Principle
Different departure times can be set to ensure a
▷ Temperature. comfortable interior temperature in the vehicle at
▷ Air conditioning. the time of departure.
▷ Maximum cooling. ▷ One-time departure time: the time can be
▷ AUTO program. set.
▷ Air recirculation mode. The system is switched on once.
▷ Upper side of the air flow, manual button. ▷ Departure time with weekday: time and day
of the week can be set.
▷ Air distribution, manual.
On the desired weekdays, the system will be
▷ Defrosting the windshield
switched on before the set departure time.
Turning off The departure time is preselected in two steps:

▷ Set departure times.
Press the button.
▷ Activate departure times.
The system switches off after leaving and lock‐ A minimum of 10 minutes should pass between
ing the vehicle. setting/activating the departure time and the
planned departure time to allow a sufficient pe‐
riod of time for the climate control.
234
Setting the departure time depending on the interior, external, and set tem‐
perature. Snow and ice may be removed more
Via iDrive easily.
1. "CAR" The system starts the engine automatically and
2. "Settings" allows it to run for a limited period of time.
Safety information
4. "Pre-ventilation"
5. "Departure plan"
DANGER
6. Select the desired departure time.
7. Set the departure time. sufficient, harmful exhaust gases can pollute
8. Select day of the week, if needed. the area in and around the vehicle or enter into
9. "OK" the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollu‐
tants which are colorless and odorless. In en‐
Activating the departure time closed areas or areas with insufficient ventila‐
tion, exhaust gases can also accumulate
Functional requirement outside of the vehicle. There is danger to life.
Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure suffi‐
To switch on the parked-car ventilation automati‐ cient ventilation. Do not switch on stationary cli‐
cally at the departure time, the departure time mate control in enclosed areas or areas with in‐
must be activated first. sufficient ventilation, e.g. in enclosed garages.
Via iDrive
1. "CAR"
Warning
2. "Settings"
When stationary climate control is in operation,
3. "Climate control" high temperatures can occur underneath the
4. "Pre-ventilation" body, for instance caused by the exhaust gas
system. If combustible materials, such as
5. "Departure plan"
leaves or grass, come in contact with hot parts
6. Activate the desired departure time. of the exhaust gas system, these materials can
ignite. There is a risk of fire. Make sure that no
Display combustible materials can come in contact with
, Symbol on the climate control display hot vehicle parts during stationary climate con‐
signals an activated departure time. trol operation, e.g. leaves, grass, gas, gasoline,
oil or other combustible objects.
Pre-conditioning through
Remote Engine Start Functional requirements
▷ The vehicle is in idle state or standby state
and not in drive-ready state.
Principle
▷ Battery is sufficiently charged.
Pre-conditioning cools or heats the car's interior
▷ For reasons of safety, the system can only be
prior to departure to a comfortable temperature.
switched on twice consecutively. The system
The system automatically cools, vents, and heats
will be available again as soon as the drive-
235
ready state is activated and deactivated Switching on/off via vehicle key
again. The system can be switched on and off using
▷ The fuel tank capacity is sufficient. the vehicle key.
▷ Hood is closed. Press the button on the vehicle key three
▷ Make sure that the vehicle's date and time times within 1 second.
are set correctly. After operating the vehicle key, it will take ap‐
▷ Air vents are opened. proximately 3 seconds until the engine is
switched on.
Enabling the automatic engine
To switch off the system, press the button again
start function three times.
The automatic engine start must be enabled be‐
fore using the system. Otherwise, the engine Switching off with the Start/Stop
cannot switch on automatically to climatize the button
car's interior.
The system can be switched off directly as fol‐
Via iDrive: lows: pressing the Start/Stop button, without op‐
1. "CAR" erating the brake pedal.
2. "Settings"
Switching on via departure time
4. "Preconditioning/ventilation" General information
5. "Remote Engine Start" Scheduled departure times can be set up in the
6. "Starting engine for clim. control" system to ensure a comfortable interior tempera‐
7. Confirm the disclaimer. ture in the vehicle at the time of departure.
▷ One-time departure time: the time of the
Switching on/off directly scheduled departure can be set.
The system is switched on once.
General information ▷ Departure time with weekday: time and day
The system switches off automatically after ap‐ of the week of the scheduled departure can
prox. 15 minutes. be set.
For reasons of safety, the system can only be The departure time is preselected in two steps:
switched on twice consecutively. The system will ▷ Set departure times.
be available again as soon as the drive-ready
▷ Activate departure times.
state is activated and deactivated again.
The climate control function will start approxi‐
Switching on via iDrive mately 10 minutes before the set departure time
and continue for approximately 5 more minutes
1. "CAR" after the departure time.
2. "Settings" A minimum of 10 minutes should pass between
3. "Climate control" setting/activating the departure time and the
4. "Preconditioning/ventilation" planned departure time to allow a sufficient pe‐
riod of time for the climate control.
5. "Start now"
236
For reasons of safety, the system can only be Confirmation signals from the
switched on once. The system will be available vehicle
again as soon as the drive-ready state is acti‐
vated and deactivated again. The activation of the system is confirmed by
flashing twice.
Observe the information about the intended use
of the vehicle. The parking lights are switched on as long as the
system is switched on.
For Your Own Safety, refer to page 8.
Adjusting the departure time via

iDrive
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
4. "Preconditioning/ventilation"
5. "Departure plan"
6. Select the desired departure time.
7. Set the departure time.
8. Select day of the week, if needed.
Activating the departure time via

iDrive
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
4. "Preconditioning/ventilation"
5. "Departure plan"
6. Activate the desired departure time.
Display
In the instrument cluster:
The engine runs for the purpose
of operating the pre-conditioning.
The vehicle is not ready to drive.
The icon on the automatic climate con‐

trol signals an activated departure time.
The icon flashes while Remote Engine Start
is running.
237
CONTROLS Interior equipment
Interior equipment
options
Warning
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ The operation of remote-controlled systems
cific and optional features offered with the series. with the integrated universal remote control,
It also describes features and functions that are such as the garage door, may result in injury,
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due for example, body parts becoming jammed in a
to the selected options or country versions. This garage door. There is a risk of injury or risk of
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ damage to property. Make sure that the area of
tems. When using these functions and systems, movement of the respective system is clear
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ during programming and operation. Also follow
served. the safety information for the hand-held trans‐
mitter.
Integrated Universal
Remote Control Compatibility
If this symbol is printed on the packaging
or in the operating instructions of the
Principle
system to be controlled, the system is
The integrated Universal Remote Control in the generally compatible with the integrated Univer‐
interior mirror can operate up to 3 functions of sal Remote Control.
remote-controlled systems such as garage door
Additional questions are answered by:
drives, barriers, or lighting systems.
▷ A dealer's service center or another qualified
General information service center or repair shop.
The Integrated Universal Remote Control repla‐ ▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.

ces up to 3 different hand-held transmitters. To
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex
operate the remote control, the buttons on the
Corporation.
interior mirror must be programmed with the de‐
sired functions. The hand-held transmitter for the
particular system is required in order to program
the remote control.
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored func‐
tions for the sake of security.
If possible, do not install the antenna of the re‐
mote-controlled system, e.g. the garage door
drive, near metal objects to ensure the best pos‐
sible operation.
238
Interior equipment CONTROLS
Control elements on the interior Canada: if programming with the hand-held

mirror transmitter was interrupted, hold down the in‐
terior mirror button and repeatedly press and
release the hand-held transmitter button for
2 seconds.
6. ▷ The LED lights up green: programming
completed.
Release the button.
▷ The LED flashes fast: programming is not
complete.
Press the button on the interior mirror for
▷ Buttons, arrow 1. 2 seconds and release. Perform this pro‐
▷ LED, arrow 2. cedure three times to complete the pro‐
gramming procedure.
▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐
quired for programming. If the integrated universal remote control
remains nonoperational, continue with the
special features for change code wireless
Programming systems.
▷ LED does not flash green after 60 sec‐
General information onds: programming not completed.
The battery of the hand-held transmitter must be Repeat steps 3 to 6.
fully charged at the time of programming to en‐
To program other functions on other buttons, re‐
sure an optimal range of the integrated universal
peat steps 3 to 5.
remote control.
1. Turn on standby state. Special feature of the rolling code
2. Initial commissioning: wireless system
Press and hold the two outer buttons on the If you are unable to operate the remote-control‐
interior mirror simultaneously for approxi‐ led system after repeated programming, please
mately 10 seconds until the LED flashes check if the system to be controlled features a
green rapidly. This erases all programming of rolling code radio system.
the buttons on the interior mirror. Refer to the operating instructions for the sys‐
3. Press the interior mirror button to be pro‐ tem.
grammed. The LED on the interior mirror will For systems with a rolling code radio system, the
slowly begin flashing orange. integrated Universal Remote Control and the
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the system system also have to be synchronized.
to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 to 30 cm Please read the operating instructions to find out
away from the buttons on the interior mirror. how to synchronize the system.
The required distance depends on the hand- Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a second
held transmitter. person.
5. Press and hold the button of the desired
function on the hand-held transmitter.
239
Synchronizing the universal remote control with Release the button.

the system: ▷ The LED flashes fast: the hand-held
1. Park the vehicle within range of the remote- transmitter was detected but program‐
controlled system. ming is not complete.
2. Program the relevant button on the interior Press the button on the interior mirror for
mirror as described. 2 seconds and release. Perform this pro‐
cedure three times to complete the pro‐
3. Locate and press the synchronizing button
gramming procedure.
on the system being programmed, e.g. at the
garage gate. You have approx. 30 seconds If the integrated universal remote control
for the next step. remains nonoperational, continue with the
special features for change code wireless
4. Hold down the programmed button on the in‐
systems.
terior mirror for approximately 3 seconds and
then release it. If necessary, repeat this step ▷ LED does not flash green after 60 sec‐
up to three times in order to end synchroniza‐ onds: programming not completed.
tion. Once synchronization is complete, the Repeat steps 3 to 6.
programmed function will be carried out. If the programming procedure is not completed,
the previous programming will remain un‐
Reprogramming individual changed.
buttons
1. Turn on standby state. Operation
2. Press and hold the interior mirror button to be
programmed. Warning
3. As soon as the LED on the interior mirror The operation of remote-controlled systems
flashes orange after approx. 20 seconds, re‐ with the integrated universal remote control,
lease the button. such as the garage door, may result in injury,
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the system for example, body parts becoming jammed in a
to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 to 30 cm garage door. There is a risk of injury or risk of
away from the buttons on the interior mirror. damage to property. Make sure that the area of
The required distance depends on the hand- movement of the respective system is clear
held transmitter. during programming and operation. Also follow
the safety information for the hand-held trans‐
5. Press and hold the button of the desired
mitter.
function on the hand-held transmitter.
Canada: if programming with the hand-held The system, such as the garage door, can be op‐
transmitter was interrupted, hold down the in‐ erated using the button on the interior mirror
terior mirror button and repeatedly press and while the drive-ready or standby state is
release the hand-held transmitter button for switched on. To do this, hold down the button
2 seconds. within receiving range of the system until the
6. The LED can light up in different ways. function is activated. The interior mirror LED
▷ The LED lights up green: the program‐ stays lit while the wireless signal is being trans‐
ming procedure is completed. mitted.
240
Deleting stored functions Ashtray

All stored functions will be deleted. The func‐
tions cannot be deleted individually.
Front center console
Press and hold the two outer buttons on the in‐
terior mirror simultaneously for approximately Opening
10 seconds until the LED on the interior mirror
flashes green fast.
Sun visor
Glare shield
Fold the sun visor down or up.
Glare shield from the side Fold the ashtray cover upward.
Folding out
Emptying
1. Fold the sun visor down.
2. Unhook it from the holder and swing it to the
side.
Folding in
Proceed in the reverse order to close the sun vi‐
sor.
Vanity mirror
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor behind Pull the ashtray with the closed cover out of the
a cover. When the cover is opened, the mirror cup holder.
lighting switches on.
Cigarette lighter
Safety information
Warning
Contact with the hot heating element or the hot
socket of the cigarette lighter can cause burns.
Flammable materials can ignite if the cigarette
lighter falls down or is held against the objects.
There is a risk of fire and an injury hazard.
There is a risk of damage to property, among
other potential damage. Take hold of the ciga‐
241
rette lighter by its handle. Make sure that chil‐ Do not damage the socket by using non-com‐
dren do not use the cigarette lighter. patible connectors.
Safety information
NOTICE
If metal objects fall into the socket, they can Warning
cause a short circuit. There is a risk of damage
Devices and cables in the unfolding area of the
to property, among other potential damage. In‐
airbags, such as portable navigation devices,
sert the cigarette lighter or socket cover again
can hinder the unfolding of the airbag or be
after using the socket.
thrown around in the car's interior during un‐
folding. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
devices and cables are not in the airbag's area
Front center console of unfolding.
NOTICE
Battery chargers that charge the vehicle battery
via sockets or cigarette lighters in the vehicle
may overload or damage the 12 V electrical
system. There is a risk of damage to property,
among other potential damage. Only connect
battery chargers for the vehicle battery to the
The cigarette lighter is located between the cup starting aid terminals in the engine compart‐
holders. ment.
Operation
Push in the cigarette lighter. NOTICE
The cigarette lighter can be re‐ If metal objects fall into the socket, they can
moved as soon as it pops back cause a short circuit. There is a risk of damage
out. to property, among other potential damage. In‐
sert the cigarette lighter or socket cover again
after using the socket.
Sockets
Principle
The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
electrical equipment when standby and drive-
ready state are switched on.
General information
The total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts.
242
Front center console In the center armrest
A socket is located between the cup holders. Pull A USB port is located in the center armrest.
off the cover. Properties:
▷ USB port Type C.
In the cargo area ▷ For charging of mobile devices.
▷ Charge current: max. 3 A.
▷ With navigation system: for data transfer.
Wireless charging tray

Principle
The wireless charging tray enables the following
A socket is located on the right side in the cargo wireless functions:
area. Unfold the cover. ▷ Charging the rechargeable battery of a mo‐
bile phone with Qi capability and of other mo‐
bile devices, which support the Qi standard.
USB port
General information
General information When inserting the mobile phone, make sure
Follow the information regarding the connection there are no objects between it and the wireless
of mobile devices to the USB port in the section charging tray.
on USB connections. During charging, the surface of the tray and the
Additional information: mobile phone may become warm. Higher tem‐
peratures may lead to a reduction in the charge
USB connections, refer to page 78. current through the mobile phone, and in iso‐
lated cases the charging process is paused tem‐
porarily. Follow the relevant instructions in the
mobile phone owner's manual.
The charge indicator shows on the Control
Display whether a mobile phone with Qi capabil‐
ity is being charged.
243
NOTE
This device has been tested for human exposure
limits and found compliant at a minimum dis‐
tance of 2 in/5 cm during operation.
Therefore, a distance of 4 in/10 cm must be
maintained in every direction when operating the
device.
1 Car mount
2 Storage area
▷ The mobile phone must compatibly support
the required Qi standard.
If the mobile phone does not support the Qi
Mounting position of the product. standard, the mobile phone can be charged
using a special Qi-compatible charging case.
Safety information ▷ Standby state is switched on.
▷ Observe the maximum dimensions of the
Warning mobile phone.
When charging a device that meets the Qi ▷ Use only protective jackets and covers up to
standard in the wireless charging tray, any a maximum thickness of 0.07 in/2 mm; other‐
metal objects located between the device and wise, the charging function may be impaired.
the tray can become very hot. Placing storage ▷ The mobile phone to be charged is located in
devices or electronic cards, such as chip cards, the center of the tray and pushed as far as
cards with magnetic strips or cards for signal possible behind the holding clasp.
transmission, between the device and the tray
may impair the card function. There is a risk of Operation
injury and risk of damage to property. When
charging mobile devices, make sure there are Inserting/removing the mobile
no objects between the device and the tray. phone
The mobile phone including cover or protective
sleeve cannot exceed the maximum size of ap‐
Overview
proximately 6.0 x 3.1 x 0.47 in/154.5 x 80 x
Tray in the center console: 12 mm.
Inserting: place the mobile phone centered in the
tray with the display facing up and slide down to
the stop behind the holding clasp.
Removing: pull the mobile phone out behind the
holding clasp.
244
Removing the holding clasp

The holding clasp can be removed, e.g., for
cleaning or to remove accidentally misplaced ob‐
jects.
Hold down the release buttons behind the hold‐

ing clasp, arrows 1, at the same time and pull off
the holding clasp, arrow 2.
Forgotten warning
General information
If the vehicle is equipped with the forgotten
warning function, a warning can be output if a
mobile phone with Qi capability was forgotten in
the wireless charging tray when leaving the vehi‐
cle.
The forgotten warning is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster.
Activating
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
4. "Wireless charging tray"
5. Activate reminder.
System limits
At high temperatures on the mobile phone or in
the vehicle, the charging functions of the mobile
phone may be limited and some functions may
no longer work.
245
CONTROLS Storage compartments
Storage compartments
Vehicle features and Front passenger side glove
options compartment
Safety information
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due Warning
to the selected options or country versions. This Folded open, the glove compartment protrudes
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ in the car's interior. Objects in the glove com‐
tems. When using these functions and systems, partment can be thrown into the car's interior
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ while driving, for instance in the event of an ac‐
served. cident, braking or evasive maneuvers. There is
a risk of injury. Always close the glove compart‐
ment immediately after using it.
Storage compartments
General information Opening the glove compartment
The vehicle interior contains multiple storage
compartments for stowing objects.
Safety information
Warning
Loose objects or devices with a cable connec‐
tion to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones,
can be thrown about the car's interior while Pull the handle.
driving, for instance in the event of an accident,
The light in the glove compartment switches on.
braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk of
injury. Secure loose objects or devices with a
cable connection to the vehicle in the car's in‐ Closing the glove compartment
terior.
Fold cover closed.
Locking the glove compartment

NOTICE
The glove compartment can be locked with an
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can dam‐ integrated key. This prevents access to the glove
age the dashboard. There is a risk of damage to compartment.
property, among other potential damage. Do
not use anti-slip pads. After the glove compartment is locked, the vehi‐
cle key can be handed over without the
246
Storage compartments CONTROLS
integrated key, for instance when the vehicle is Safety information

parked by valet parking.
Warning
Integrated key, refer to page 89.
Breakable objects, such as glass bottles or
glasses, can break in the event of an accident
or a braking or evasive maneuver. Broken glass
Driver's side glove can be scattered in the car's interior. There is a
compartment risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do
not use any breakable objects while driving.
Only stow breakable objects in closed storage
Safety information
compartments.
Warning
Folded open, the glove compartment protrudes
in the car's interior. Objects in the glove com‐
Storage compartment in
partment can be thrown into the car's interior the center console
while driving, for instance in the event of an ac‐
cident, braking or evasive maneuvers. There is There is a storage compartment in the center
a risk of injury. Always close the glove compart‐ console.
ment immediately after using it.
Storage compartment in
Opening the glove compartment the rear center console
The rear center console contains a storage com‐
partment.
Center armrest, front

General information
A storage compartment is located in the center
Pull the handle.
armrest between the seats.
Closing the glove compartment

Fold cover closed.
Compartments in the doors

General information
There are storage compartments in the doors.
247
CONTROLS Storage compartments
Opening the storage Overview

compartment
Two cup holders are located in the center con‐

Press the button. sole.
Closing the storage

compartment
Rear cup holder
Press cover down until it engages.
Safety information
Front cup holder Warning

Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may
Safety information damage the cup holders or be thrown about
the car’s interior in the event of an accident, an
evasive maneuver, or forceful braking. Spilled
Warning
liquids can distract from the traffic conditions
Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may and lead to an accident. Hot drinks can damage
damage the cup holders or be thrown about the cup holder or lead to scalding. There is a
the car’s interior in the event of an accident, an risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do
evasive maneuver, or forceful braking. Spilled not force objects into the cup holder. Use light‐
liquids can distract from the traffic conditions weight, shatterproof, and sealable containers.
and lead to an accident. Hot drinks can damage Do not transport hot beverages.
the cup holder or lead to scalding. There is a
risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do
not force objects into the cup holder. Use light‐
NOTICE
weight, shatterproof, and sealable containers.
Do not transport hot beverages. With an open cup holder, the center armrest
cannot be folded back up. There is a risk of
damage. Press back the covers before the cen‐
ter armrest is folded up.
248
Storage compartments CONTROLS
Opening and closing the cup

holder Warning
Improper use of the clothes hooks can lead to a
Opening the cup holder risk of objects flying about during braking and
1. Pull the center armrest forward at the loop. evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury and
risk of damage to property. Only hang light‐
2. Press the button to open the cup holder. weight objects, for instance clothing articles,
from the clothes hooks.
Closing the cup holder

Press both covers back inward in sequence and
fold the center armrest back.
Clothes hooks
General information
Two folding clothes hooks are provided on the
headliner in the rear of the vehicle. Press side‐
ways onto the edge to fold open.
Safety information
Warning
Clothing articles on the clothes hooks can ob‐
struct the view while driving. There is a risk of
accident. When suspending clothing articles
from the clothes hooks, ensure that they will
not obstruct the driver's view.
249
CONTROLS Cargo area
Cargo area
Vehicle features and
Warning
options Improperly stowed objects can shift and be
thrown into the car's interior, for instance in the
event of an accident or during braking and eva‐
sive maneuver. Vehicle occupants can be hit
and injured. There is a risk of injury. Stow and
secure objects and cargo properly.
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ NOTICE
served. Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage.
other potential damage. Make sure that no flu‐
Loading ids leak in the cargo area.
Safety information
Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit
Warning
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight
High gross weight can overheat the tires, dam‐ of occupants and cargo should never exceed
age them internally and cause a sudden tire XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
pressure loss. Driving characteristics may be
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
negatively impacted, reducing lane stability,
and passengers that will be riding in your ve‐
lengthening the braking distances and chang‐
hicle.
ing the steering response. There is a risk of ac‐
cident. Pay attention to the permitted load ca‐ 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
pacity of the tires and never exceed the and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs
permitted gross weight. 4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
Warning 1,400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbs pas‐
sengers in your vehicle, the amount of availa‐
Loose objects or devices with a cable connec‐
ble cargo and luggage load capacity is
tion to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones,
650 lbs (1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs)
can be thrown about the car's interior while
driving, for instance in the event of an accident, 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk of and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
injury. Secure loose objects or devices with a weight may not safely exceed the available
cable connection to the vehicle in the car's in‐
terior.
250
Cargo area CONTROLS
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in

Step 4.
Lashing eyes in the cargo
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
area
from your trailer will be transferred to your ve‐
hicle. Consult this manual to determine how General information
this reduces the available cargo and luggage Attach load securing aids, such as lashing straps,
load capacity of your vehicle. tensioning straps, draw straps or cargo nets, to
the lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Payload
Lashing eyes
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of

the occupants and the cargo. Depending on the equipment version, two lash‐
The greater the weight of the occupants, the ing eyes are located in the cargo area.
less cargo that can be transported. The lashing eyes are located under the cargo
floor panel, refer to page 254.
Stowing and securing cargo
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the cargo.
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possible,
Multifunction hook
directly behind and at the bottom of the rear
passenger seat backrests. General information
▷ Very heavy cargo: stow as far forward as pos‐
sible, directly behind and at the bottom of the
rear passenger seat backrests. When the rear
seat is not occupied, secure each of the outer
safety belts in the opposite buckle.
▷ Fold down the rear seat backrests completely
to stow large cargo.
▷ Do not stack cargo above the upper edge of
the backrests.
▷ Small and light cargo: secure with ratchet A multifunction hook is located on the right side
straps or, depending on the equipment, with in the cargo area.
a cargo net or draw straps.
▷ Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo
straps.
251
CONTROLS Cargo area
Safety information Through-loading system

Warning Principle
Improper use of the multifunction hooks can The cargo area can be enlarged by folding down
lead to a risk of objects flying about during the rear seat backrests.
braking and evasive maneuvers, for example.
There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to General information
property. Only hang lightweight objects from
the multifunction hooks. Only transport heavy The rear seat backrests can be folded down from
luggage in the cargo area if it has been appro‐ the cargo area. The center section can be sepa‐
priately secured. rately folded down from the rear.
Safety information
Storage compartment on Warning
the right side Danger of jamming with folding down the back‐
rests. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
A storage compartment is available on the right to property. Make sure that the area of move‐
side of the cargo area. ment of the rear backrest and the of the head
restraint is clear prior to folding down.
Storage compartment on
the left side Warning
If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unsecured
General information cargo can be thrown about the car’s interior;
A storage compartment is located on the left for instance, in the event of an accident, braking
side in the cargo area. or an evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the rear seat backrest is locked
after folding it back.
Opening the storage
compartment
Warning
The stability of the child restraint system is lim‐
ited or compromised with incorrect seat setting
or improper installation of the child seat. There
is a risk of injury or danger to life. Make sure
that the child restraint system fits securely
against the backrest. If possible, adjust the
backrest tilt for all affected backrests and cor‐
rectly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats
Pull the cover. and backrests are securely engaged or locked.
If possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
straints or remove them.
252
Cargo area CONTROLS
locked rear seat backrest moves forward

NOTICE slightly.
Vehicle parts can be damaged when folding
down the rear backrest. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property, among other potential dam‐
age. Make sure that the area of movement of
the rear backrest including head restraint is
clear when folding down.
Folding down the rear seat

backrest from the cargo area 6. Fold the rear seat backrest forward.
1. Unlock the belt lock of the center safety belt
in the rear using the latch plate of another
safety belt.
2. Insert the upper buckle tongue, arrow 1, into
the gap of the belt feed.
Folding back the backrest

Return the rear seat backrest to the seat position
and engage it.
3. Insert the lower buckle tongue, arrow 2, into Folding down the center section
the specially designated fixture on the rear
1. Fold down the center head restraint.
shelf.
2. Pull lever and fold the center section forward.
4. Push the corresponding head restraint down
as far as it will go.
5. Pull the corresponding lever in the cargo area
to release the rear seat backrest. The un‐
253
CONTROLS Cargo area
Cargo floor panel Folded up position
Safety information
General information
Follow the information on securing the cargo.
Warning
The cargo floor panel can be removed to stow
unwieldy luggage. Improper use of the cargo area floor can lead to
a risk of objects flying about during braking and
Additional information: evasive maneuvers, for example. There is a risk
Load, refer to page 250. of injury and risk of damage to property.
▷ Do not use the cargo area floor to sepa‐
Opening the cargo floor panel rate the cargo area and vehicle interior in
1. To open the cargo floor panel, grasp the han‐ the sense of a partition net.
dle and lift it slightly. ▷ Only use the cargo area floor in the
folded-up position when the rear seat
backrests are folded up and locked.
▷ Fold down the cargo area floor before driv‐
ing off.
▷ Always secure cargo against shifting, us‐
ing straps, belts and lashing eyes, for in‐
stance.
Fold up the cargo floor panel

2. Fold the luggage floor panel together toward
the front.
Fold up the cargo floor panel and push it behind

the locks, arrow.
Removing the cargo floor panel

1. Open the cargo floor panel.
2. Pull the folded luggage floor panel straight to
the rear.
254
Cargo area CONTROLS
Inserting the cargo floor panel

1. Place the folded cargo floor panel flat into the
cargo area.
2. Push the cargo floor panel forward until it en‐
gages.
255
DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving
Things to remember when driving

Vehicle features and Engine, transmission, and axle
drive
options
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
cific and optional features offered with the series. Do not exceed the maximum engine and road
It also describes features and functions that are speed:
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due ▷ For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and
to the selected options or country versions. This 100 mph/160 km/h.
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ Avoid full throttle or kickdown under all circum‐
tems. When using these functions and systems, stances.
served.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be
Break-in increased.
Tires
General information
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufacturing
Moving parts need to begin working together
circumstances when tires are brand-new; they
smoothly.
achieve their full traction potential after a break-in
The following instructions will help you to ach‐ time.
ieve a long vehicle life and good efficiency.
Drive conservatively for the first
During break-in, do not use the Launch Control. 200 miles/300 km.
Safety information Brake system

Brake discs and brake pads only reach their full
Warning effectiveness after approx. 300 miles/500 km.
Due to new parts and components, safety and Drive moderately during this break-in period.
driver assistance systems can react with a de‐
lay. There is a risk of accident. After installing Following part replacement
new parts or with a new vehicle, drive conser‐ Observe the break-in procedures again, if com‐
vatively and intervene early if necessary. Ob‐ ponents mentioned above are replaced.
serve the break-in procedures of the respective
parts and components.
256
Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS
General driving notes Hot exhaust gas system
Closing the trunk lid Warning

High temperatures can occur underneath the
Safety information body, for instance caused by the exhaust gas
system, while driving. Contact with the exhaust
gas system can cause burns. There is a risk of
Warning
injury. Do not touch the hot exhaust gas sys‐
An open trunk lid protrudes from the vehicle tem, including the exhaust pipe.
and can endanger occupants and other road
users or damage the vehicle in the event of an
accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. In ad‐
Warning
dition, exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle in‐
terior. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage If combustible materials, such as leaves or
to property. Do not drive with the trunk lid open. grass, come in contact with hot parts of the ex‐
haust gas system, these materials can ignite.
There is a risk of fire and an injury hazard. Do
Driving with the trunk lid open not remove the heat shields installed and never
If driving with the tailgate open cannot be apply undercoating to them. Make sure that no
avoided: combustible materials can come in contact with
hot vehicle parts while driving, at idle or during
▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof. parking.
▷ Greatly increase the blower output.
▷ Drive moderately.
Mobile communication devices
Ice on window glass in the vehicle
NOTICE Warning
The window will be lowered slightly when pull‐ Vehicle electronics and mobile phones can in‐
ing on the door handle. In the event of frost, the fluence one another. There is radiation due to
window may freeze up and not be lowered. the transmission operations of mobile phones.
There is a risk of damage to property, among There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to
other potential damage. When pulling on the property. If possible, in the car's interior use
door handle, make sure that the window is low‐ only mobile phones with direct connections to
ered. If necessary, remove snow and ice from an external antenna in order to exclude mutual
the window. Do not open the door with force. interference and deflect the radiation from the
car's interior.
Aquaplaning
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can
form between the tires and road surface.
This phenomenon is referred to as aquaplaning.
It is characterized by a partial or complete loss of
257
contact between the tires and the road surface, tional noises have no effect on the performance
ultimately undermining your ability to steer and and operational reliability of the brake.
brake the vehicle.
Objects in the area around the
Driving through water pedals
General information Warning

When driving through water, follow the following:
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit the
▷ Deactivate Auto Start/Stop function. pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
▷ Drive through calm water only. There is a risk of accident. Stow objects in the
▷ Drive through water only if it is not deeper vehicle such that they are secured and cannot
than maximum 9.8 inches/25 cm. enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor mats
that are suitable for the vehicle and can be
▷ Drive through water no faster than walking safely attached to the floor. Do not use loose
speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h. floor mats and do not layer several floor mats.
Make sure that there is sufficient clearance for
Safety information the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are se‐
curely fastened again after they were removed,
NOTICE for instance for cleaning.
When driving too quickly through too deep wa‐
ter, water can enter into the engine compart‐ Driving in wet conditions
ment, the electrical system or the transmission.
In case of wet roads, exposure to road salt, in
heavy rain, gently press the brake pedal every
other potential damage. When driving through
few kilometers.
water, do not exceed the maximum indicated
water level and the maximum speed for driving Ensure that this action does not endanger other
through water. road users.
The heat generated during braking dries brake
discs and brake pads and protects them against
Braking safely corrosion.
In this way braking efficiency will be available
General information when you need it.
The vehicle is equipped with an Antilock Braking
System ABS as a standard feature. Hills
Perform emergency braking in situations that re‐
quire such. General information
Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid any Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear
obstacles with a minimum of steering effort. that requires least braking effort. Otherwise, the
Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from the brake system may overheat and reduce braking
hydraulic circuits indicate that the Antilock Brak‐ effect.
ing System ABS is in its active mode. You can increase the engine's braking effect by
In certain braking situations, the perforated brake shifting down, going all the way to first gear, if
discs can emit functional noises. However, func‐ needed.
258
Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS
Safety information
Roof-mounted luggage
rack
Warning
Light but consistent pressure on the brake
pedal can lead to high temperatures, brakes
General information
wearing out and possibly even brake system Roof racks are available as special accessories.
failure. There is a risk of accident. Avoid placing
excessive stress on the brake system. Safety information
Warning
Warning
When driving with a roof load, for instance with
In idle state or with the engine switched off, roof-mounted luggage rack, the vehicle's cen‐
safety functions, for instance engine braking ef‐ ter of gravity is higher, which increases the risk
fect, braking assistance and steering assis‐ of the vehicle tipping in critical driving situa‐
tance, may not be available. There is a risk of tions. There may be a risk of accident or risk of
accident. Do not attempt to drive in idle state or damage to property. Driving with roof load only
with the engine switched off. with activated Dynamic Stability Control.
Brake disc corrosion Roof drip rail with flaps

Corrosion on the brake discs and contamination The fixing points are located in the roof drip rail
on the brake pads are increased by the following above the doors.
circumstances:
▷ Low mileage.
▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all.
▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
▷ Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaning
agents.
Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause a
pulsating effect on the brakes in their response -
generally this cannot be corrected. Fold the cover outward.
Condensation water under the Mounting

parked vehicle Follow the installation instructions of the roof
When using the automatic climate control, con‐ rack.
densation water develops and collects under‐ Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained
neath the vehicle. for tilting and opening the glass sunroof.
Loading
Because roof-mounted luggage racks raise the
vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they
259
have a major effect on vehicle handling and

steering response.
Therefore, note the following when loading and
driving:
▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle
weights and the approved gross vehicle
weight.
▷ Be sure that adequate clearance is main‐
tained for tilting and opening the glass sun‐
roof.
▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.
▷ The roof load should not extend past the
loading area.
▷ Always place the heaviest pieces on the bot‐
tom.
▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, for instance
using ratchet straps.
▷ Do not let objects project into the opening
path of the trunk lid.
▷ Drive cautiously and avoid sudden accelera‐
tion and braking maneuvers. Take corners
gently.
Driving on racetracks
Warning
The vehicle is not designed for use in M Sport
or motor sport type competition. There is a risk
of accident. Do not use the vehicle for M Sport
or motor sport type competitions.
Higher mechanical and thermal loads during

racetrack operation lead to increased wear. Use
of the vehicle in M Sport or motor sport type
competition is an improper use of the vehicle and
may affect your warranty coverage. Please con‐
sult the “New Vehicle Limited Warranty” Booklet
for further information on warranty matters.
260
Saving fuel DRIVING TIPS
Saving fuel
Vehicle features and Close the windows and glass
sunroof
options
Driving with the glass sunroof and windows open
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ results in increased drag and raises fuel con‐
cific and optional features offered with the series. sumption.
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due Tires
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ General information
tems. When using these functions and systems, Tires can affect consumption in various ways, for
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ instance tire size may influence consumption.
served.
Check the tire pressure regularly
Reducing fuel consumption Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation
pressure at least twice a month and before start‐
ing on a long trip.
General information Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
The vehicle contains advanced technologies for sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
the reduction of consumption and emission val‐ tire wear.
ues.
Observe the correct tire inflation pressure as well
The fuel consumption depends on various fac‐ as the ECO tire inflation pressure, where applica‐
tors, such as driving style, road conditions, main‐ ble.
tenance or environmental factors.
Carrying out certain measures, such as a moder‐
Tire pressure specifications, refer to page 270.
ate driving style and regular maintenance, can in‐
fluence fuel consumption and the environmental
impact. Drive away without delay
Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while the
Remove unnecessary cargo vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right
away, but at moderate RPM.
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
This is the fastest way of warming the cold en‐
gine up to operating temperature.
Remove attached parts following
use
Proactive driving
Remove roof-mounted which are no longer re‐
Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel
quired following use.
consumption.
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aerody‐
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
namics and increase the fuel consumption.
By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehicle
driving ahead of you.
261
DRIVING TIPS Saving fuel
Avoid high RPM Have maintenance carried out

Driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel con‐ Have the vehicle maintained regularly to achieve
sumption and reduces wear. optimal vehicle efficiency and service life. BMW
If necessary, observe the vehicle's gear shift indi‐ recommends that maintenance work be per‐
cator. formed by a BMW service center.
Also refer to BMW Maintenance System.
Using coasting overrun mode
When approaching a red light, take your foot off
the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt.
ECO PRO
For going downhill take your foot off the acceler‐
ator and let the vehicle roll. Principle
The fuel supply is interrupted in coasting overrun ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves on
mode. consumption. For this purpose, the engine con‐
trol and comfort features, for instance the climate
control output, are adjusted.
Switch off the engine during
longer stops Steptronic transmission: under certain conditions
the engine is automatically decoupled from the
transmission in the D selector lever position. The
Switching off the engine
vehicle continues traveling with the engine idling
Switch off the engine during longer stops, for in‐ to reduce consumption. The D selector lever po‐
stance at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in sition remains engaged.
traffic jam.
In addition, context-sensitive information, ECO
PRO tips, are displayed to assist with an efficient
Auto Start/Stop function driving style.
The Auto Start/Stop function of the vehicle auto‐
The achieved extended range is displayed in the
matically switches off the engine during a stop.
instrument cluster as bonus range.
If the engine is switched off and then restarted
rather than leaving the engine running con‐ General information
stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are re‐
duced. Savings can begin within a few seconds The system includes the following
of switching off the engine. EfficientDynamics functions and
EfficientDynamics displays:
Switch off any functions that are ▷ ECO PRO bonus range.
not currently needed ▷ ECO PRO seat climate control.
Functions such as seat heating and the rear win‐ ▷ ECO PRO climate control.
dow defroster require a lot of energy and in‐ ▷ ECO PRO light and sight.
crease fuel consumption, especially in city and ▷ ECO PRO Limit.
stop-and-go traffic.
▷ Coasting driving condition.
Switch off these functions if they are not needed.
▷ Driving style analysis.
The ECO PRO driving mode supports the en‐
ergy conserving use of comfort features. These
functions are automatically deactivated partially
or completely.
262
Overview Activating/deactivating ECO PRO

functions
The following ECO PRO functions can be acti‐
vated/deactivated:
▷ "ECO PRO seat heating"
▷ "ECO PRO climate control"
▷ "ECO PRO light and sight"
Coasting
Efficiency can be optimized by disengaging the
Button
engine and coasting with the engine idling.
ECO PRO seat climate control

Activating ECO PRO
The activation of ECO PRO will reduce the out‐
Press the button. ECO PRO is displayed put of the seat heating.
ECO PRO climate control
Configuring ECO PRO Climate control is set to be efficient.
INDIVIDUAL This means, it is possible to deviate slightly from
the set temperature or to heat or cool down the
Via the Driving Dynamics Control car's interior more slowly, to economize on con‐
1. Activate ECO PRO. sumption.
2. "ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL"

ECO PRO light and sight
Via iDrive The output of exterior mirror heating and rear
window defroster is reduced.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings" Resetting the settings
3. "Driving mode" Reset ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL to the standard
4. "ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL" settings:
5. Select the desired setting. "Reset to ECO PRO STANDARD"
ECO PRO limit speed Displays in the instrument

▷ "ECO PRO speed": activate ECO PRO cluster
speed.
An ECO PRO tip is displayed if the speed of General information
the set ECO PRO limit is exceeded. When ECO PRO driving mode is activated, the
▷ "Notification at:" display switches to a special configuration.
Set the desired speed for the ECO PRO
speed.
263
ECO PRO bonus range ▷ The current consumption in relation to the

average consumption is displayed.
A modified driving style helps you
extend your driving distance. ▷ Pointer in the area of arrow 1: display of the
energy recovered by coasting or when brak‐
The range extension can be dis‐
ing.
played as the bonus range in the
instrument cluster. ▷ Pointer in the area of arrow 2: display when
accelerating.
The efficiency display includes the bonus range.
If the acceleration is inefficient, the area between
If the bonus range appears in gray, the current
the average consumption and the current con‐
driving style is inefficient.
sumption is colored red.
The display turns blue as soon as all conditions
In addition, the following information is displayed,
for efficient driving are met.
depending on the situation:
The intervals for resetting the bonus range de‐ ▷ Depending on the equipment: the total dis‐
pend on the settings of the trip data. tance driven while coasting.
▷ The total time that the engine has been
Consumption display switched off during automatic engine stops.
Instrument cluster with enhanced features: ▷ A gear shift indicator recommending the use
of a more efficient gear.
Indications on the Control

Display
General information
Information about the current effectiveness of
the ECO PRO functions can be displayed as en‐
ergy flow.
Displaying energy flow information
1. "CAR"
3. "Energy flow"
The following functions are displayed:
▷ Auto Start/Stop function.
▷ Energy recovery.
▷ Coasting.
A pointer in the consumption display informs
about the current driving style:
264
Coasting Operation via shift paddles
Principle
Principle
The coasting driving condition can be influenced
Under certain conditions the engine is automati‐ with the shift paddles.
cally decoupled from the transmission in the D
selector lever position. The vehicle continues
Activating/deactivating coasting via
traveling with the engine idling to reduce con‐
sumption. Selector lever position D remains en‐
shift paddles
gaged. 1. Shift to the highest gear by pulling the right
shift paddle.
This driving condition is referred to as coasting.
2. To activate coasting mode, actuate the right
As soon as the brake or accelerator pedal is de‐
shift paddle again.
pressed, the engine is automatically coupled to
the transmission again. To deactivate, actuate the left shift paddle.
General information Display

Coasting is a component of the ECO PRO driv‐
ing mode. Display in the instrument cluster
Coasting is automatically activated when ECO The coasting distance traveled is indicated
PRO driving mode is called via the Driving Dy‐ in coasting mode.
namics Control.
Indications on the Control Display
A proactive driving style helps the driver to use
the function often and supports the efficient ef‐ The coasting mode is displayed under energy
fect of coasting. flow while driving.
The distance traveled in coasting mode is dis‐
Functional requirements played in the trip data.
The function is available in the speed range from
approx. 16 mph/25 km/h to 100 mph/160 km/h.
The function is active if the following conditions
are met:
▷ The accelerator pedal is not depressed or the
accelerator pedal is released.
▷ Brake pedal not depressed or only slightly
depressed.
▷ The selector lever is in selector lever position Color code blue: coasting mode.
D.
▷ Engine and transmission are at operating
temperature.
Displaying energy flow information
1. "CAR"
▷ Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function,
ACC, not activated. 2. "Driving information"
3. "Energy flow"
265
System limits Display on the Control Display

The function is not available under one of the fol‐ The display of the Driving style analysis shows
lowing conditions. the efficiency of the Driving style.
▷ DSC OFF or TRACTION activated. The more efficient the driving style, the more
▷ Driving in the dynamic limit range and on bars are displayed in color and the faster the bo‐
steep uphill or downhill grades. nus range increases.
▷ Battery charge status temporarily too low or In contrast, a reduced number of bars will be dis‐
vehicle electrical system drawing excessive played with an inefficient driving style.
current.
Driving style analysis

Principle
The function helps develop an especially effi‐
cient driving style and to conserve fuel.
For this purpose, the driving style is analyzed.
The assessment is done in various categories
and is displayed on the Control Display.
This display will help you adjust your driving style
and save some fuel.
General information
The current trip is assessed.
To assist with an efficient driving style, ECO
PRO tips are displayed during driving.
The range of the vehicle can be extended by ad‐
justing your driving style.
This gain in range is displayed as a bonus range
in the instrument cluster and on the Control Dis‐
play.
This function is available in ECO PRO driving
mode.
Calling up the Driving style

analysis
1. "CAR"
3. "Driving style analysis"
266
267
MOBILITY Refueling
Refueling
options
NOTICE
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ With a driving distance of less than
cific and optional features offered with the series. 30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have
It also describes features and functions that are sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due sured anymore. There is a risk of damage to
to the selected options or country versions. This property, among other potential damage. Re‐
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ fuel promptly.
served.
NOTICE
Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfilling of the
Follow the following when fuel tank can damage the fuel system. Painted
surfaces may be damaged by contact with fuel.
refueling Escaping fuel can harm the environment. There
is a risk of damage to property, among other
General information potential damage. Avoid overfilling.
Follow the fuel recommendation prior to refuel‐
ing.
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle completely Fuel cap
into the filler pipe. Lifting up the filler nozzle dur‐
ing refueling causes:
Opening
▷ Premature switching off.
1. To open the fuel filler flap, press on the rear
▷ Reduced return of the fuel vapors. edge, arrow. The fuel filler flap opens.
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Make sure that the fuel cap is closed properly af‐
ter refueling, otherwise the emissions warning
light may light up.
Follow safety regulations posted at the filling sta‐
tion.
Fuel quality, refer to page 302.
268
Refueling MOBILITY
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise. Have fuel filler flap unlocked by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to

the fuel filler flap.
Closing
Warning
The retaining strap of the fuel cap can be jam‐
med and crushed during closing. The cap can‐
not be correctly closed. Fuel or fuel vapors can
escape. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam‐
age to property. Pay attention that the retaining
strap is not jammed or crushed when closing
the cap.
1. Fit the fuel cap and turn it clockwise until you

clearly hear a click.
2. Press on the fuel filler flap until it engages.
Emergency unlocking
It may be necessary in certain situations to un‐
lock the fuel filler flap manually, for instance with
an electrical fault.
269
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
Wheels and tires

Vehicle features and Tire pressure specifications
options In the tire inflation pressure table
The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 270, contains all tire inflation pressure
specifications for the specified tire sizes at the
ambient temperature. The tire inflation pressure
values apply to tire sizes approved by the manu‐
facturer of the vehicle for the vehicle type.
tems. When using these functions and systems, To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ please note the following:
served. ▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
▷ Maximum speed for driving.
Tire pressure On the Control Display
The current tire inflation pressure values and the
General information intended tire inflation pressure values for the
The tire characteristics and tire pressure influ‐ mounted tires can be displayed on the Control
ence the following: Display.
▷ The service life of the tires. To ensure that they are displayed correctly, the
▷ Driving safety. tire sizes must be stored in the system and must
have been set for the mounted tires.
▷ Driving comfort.
The current tire inflation pressure value is lo‐
▷ Fuel consumption.
cated on each tire.
Safety information The reference tire inflation pressure value is lo‐

cated in the lower area of the Control Display.
Warning Checking the tire pressure

A tire with too little or no tire inflation pressure
may heat up significantly and sustain damage. General information
This will have a negative impact on aspects of Tires heat up while driving. The tire pressure in‐
handling, such as steering and braking re‐ creases with the tire temperature.
sponse. There is a risk of accident. Regularly
check the tire inflation pressure, and correct it Tires have a natural, consistent tire pressure
as needed, for instance twice a month and be‐ loss.
fore a long trip. The displays of inflation devices may under-read
by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi.
270
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
Checking using tire inflation Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.

pressure specifications in the tire With Tire Pressure Monitor:
inflation pressure table The corrected tire inflation pressures are applied
1. Determine the intended tire inflation pressure automatically. Make sure that the correct tire set‐
levels for the mounted tires. tings have been made.
2. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four With tires that cannot be found in the tire pres‐
tires, using a pressure gage, for example. sure values on the Control Display, reset the Tire
3. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the actual Pressure Monitor TPM.
tire inflation pressure deviates from the in‐
tended tire inflation pressure. Tire inflation pressures up to
4. Check whether all valve caps are screwed 100 mph/160 km/h
onto the tire valves. For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for
The tire inflation pressure specifications in the optimum driving comfort, note the pressure val‐
tire inflation pressure table only relate to cold ues in the tire inflation pressure table and adjust
tires or tires at the same temperature as the am‐ as necessary.
bient temperature.
Only check the tire inflation pressure levels when
the tires are cold, i.e.:
▷ A driving distance of max. 1.25 miles/2 km
has not been exceeded.
▷ If the vehicle has not moved again for at least
2 hours after a trip.
Check the tire inflation pressure of the emer‐
gency wheel in the cargo area regularly, and cor‐
These pressure values can also be found on the
rect it as needed.
tire pressure label on the driver's door pillar.
Checking using the tire inflation Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.
pressure specifications on the
Control Display
1. "CAR"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
4. Check whether the current tire inflation pres‐
sure levels deviate from the intended tire
pressure value.
5. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the actual
tire inflation pressure deviates from the in‐
tended tire inflation pressure.
After correcting the tire pressure

With runflat tires:
271
Tire pressure values up to M235i xDrive

100 mph/160 km/h
Tire size Pressure specifications
228i, 228i xDrive in bar/PSI
Specifications in
Tire size Pressure specifications bar/PSI with cold
in bar/PSI tires
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
225/40 R 18 92 2.7 / 39 2.7 / 39
tires
H XL A/S
225/40 R 18 92
225/45 R 17 91 2.5 / 36 2.5 / 36 Y XL
H A/S 225/40 R 18 92
225/45 R 17 94 V XL M+S
Y XL
235/35 R 19 91 2.8 / 41 2.8 / 41
225/45 R 17 91 Y XL
H M+S
205/45 R 18 90
225/40 R 18 92 2.7 / 39 2.7 / 39 H XL M+S
H XL A/S
225/40 R 18 92 Tire inflation pressures at max.
Y XL speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
195/55 R 17 92
H XL M+S
Warning
225/40 R 18 92
In order to drive at maximum speeds in excess
V XL M+S
of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe, and, if
235/35 R 19 91 2.8 / 41 2.8 / 41 necessary, adjust tire pressures for speeds ex‐
Y XL ceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the relevant
205/45 R 18 90 table on the following pages. Otherwise, tire
H XL M+S damage and accidents could occur.
Emergency Speed up to a max. of For speeds over 100 mph/160 km/h and for opti‐
wheel: 50 mph / 80 km/h mum driving comfort, note the pressure values in
T 125/70 R 17 4.2 / 60 the tire inflation pressure table and adjust as nec‐
98 M essary.
Tire pressure values over

100 mph/160 km/h
228i, 228i xDrive

Without high-speed tuning feature
272
Tire size Pressure specifications Tire size Pressure specifications in

in bar/PSI bar/PSI
Specifications in Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold bar/PSI with
tires cold tires
225/45 R 17 91 2.7 / 39 2.7 / 39 225/45 R 17 94 2.8 / 41 2.8 / 41

H A/S Y XL
225/45 R 17 94 225/45 R 17 91
Y XL H M+S
225/45 R 17 91 225/40 R 18 92 3.0 / 44 3.0 / 44
H M+S Y XL
225/40 R 18 92 2.9 / 42 2.9 / 42 195/55 R 17 92
H XL A/S H XL M+S
225/40 R 18 92 225/40 R 18 92 3.3 / 48 3.3 / 48
Y XL V XL M+S
195/55 R 17 92
235/35 R 19 91 3.1 / 45 3.1 / 45
H XL M+S
Y XL
225/40 R 18 92
205/45 R 18 90
V XL M+S
H XL M+S
235/35 R 19 91 2.8 / 41 2.8 / 41
Emergency Speed up to a max. of
Y XL
wheel: 50 mph / 80 km/h
205/45 R 18 90 3.1 / 45 3.1 / 45 T 125/70 R 17 4.2 / 60
H XL M+S 98 M
Emergency Speed up to a max. of
wheel: 50 mph / 80 km/h M235i xDrive
T 125/70 R 17 4.2 / 60 Without high-speed tuning feature
98 M
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
With high-speed tuning feature
Specifications in
bar/PSI with
cold tires
225/40 R 18 92 2.7 / 39 2.7 / 39

Y XL
273
Tire size Pressure specifications ZR tires: reinforced radial tire for speeds exceed‐
in bar/PSI ing 150 mph/240 km/h
225/40 R 18 92 3.0 / 44 3.0 / 44 Maximum tire load

H XL A/S
Maximum tire load is the maximum permissible
225/40 R 18 92 weight for which the tire is approved.
V XL M+S
Locate the maximum tire load on the tire sidewall
235/35 R 19 91 2.8 / 41 2.8 / 41 and the Gross Axle Weight Rating – GAWR – on
Y XL the certification label on the driver door B-pillar.
Divide the tire load by 1.1. It must be greater
205/45 R 18 90 3.1 / 45 3.1 / 45
than one-half of the vehicle’s Gross Axle Weight
H XL M+S
Rating – GAWR. Note, front vs. rear GAWR and
tire loads, respectively.
With high-speed tuning feature
Tire size Pressure specifications in Speed letter

bar/PSI
Designation Maximum speed
Specifications
in bar/PSI with Q up to 100 mph/160 km/h
cold tires
R up to 106 mph/170 km/h
S up to 112 mph/180 km/h

225/40 R 18 92 3.0 / 44 3.0 / 44
Y XL T up to 118 mph/190 km/h
225/40 R 18 92 3.3 / 48 3.3 / 48 H up to 131 mph/210 km/h

V XL M+S V up to 150 mph/240 km/h
235/35 R 19 91 3.1 / 45 3.1 / 45 W up to 167 mph/270 km/h
Y XL
205/45 R 18 90 Y up to 186 mph/300 km/h
H XL M+S (Y) above 186 mph/300 km/h
Tire Identification Number

Tire marking
DOT Code: DOT xxxx xxx 1921
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
Tire size
xxx: tire size and tire design
245/45 R 18 96 Y
1921: tire age
245: nominal width in mm
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the
45: aspect ratio in %
U.S. Department of Transportation.
R: radial tire code
18: rim diameter in inches
96: load bearing capacity
Y: speed code letter
274
Tire age Traction

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
Recommendation AA, A, B, and C.
Regardless of the tire tread depth, replace tires Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop
at least every 6 years. on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfa‐
Manufacture date ces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may
You can find the manufacture date of the tire on have poor traction performance.
the tire sidewall. The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and
Designation Manufacture date
does not include acceleration, cornering, hydro‐
DOT … 1921 19th week 2021 planing, or peak traction characteristics.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Temperature

Quality grades can be found where applicable on The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
maximum section width. generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a
E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Temperature
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
A
high temperature can cause the material of the
tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces‐
DOT Quality Grades sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
Treadwear The grade C corresponds to a level of perform‐
Traction AA A B C ance which all passenger car tires must meet un‐
der the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
Temperature A B C
No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Fed‐ of performance on the laboratory test wheel than
eral Safety Requirements in addition to these the minimum required by law.
grades.
Warning
Treadwear
The temperature grade for this tire is estab‐
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
lished for a tire that is properly inflated and not
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐
excessive loading, either separately or in com‐
ernment test course. E.g., a tire graded 150
bination, can cause heat buildup and possible
would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as well
tire failure.
on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon
the actual conditions of their use, however, and
RSC – Run-flat tires
may depart significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service practices and Run-flat tires, refer to page 278, are labeled with
differences in road characteristics and climate. a circular icon containing the letters RSC marked
on the sidewall.
275
M+S Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as

well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can
Winter and all-season tires with better cold
cause serious damage to wheels, tires and sus‐
weather performance than summer tires.
pension parts. This is more likely to occur with
low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning
Tire tread between the wheel and the road. Be careful to
avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, es‐
pecially if your vehicle is equipped with low-pro‐
Summer tires file tires.
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than Indications of tire damage or other vehicle mal‐
0.12 in/3 mm, otherwise there is an increased functions:
risk of aquaplaning. ▷ Unusual vibrations.
▷ Unusual tire or running noises.
Winter tires
▷ Unusual handling such as a strong tendency
Do not drive with a tire tread of less than
to pull to the left or right.
0.16 in/4 mm, as such tires are less suitable for
winter operation. Damage can be caused by the following situa‐
tions, for instance:
Minimum tread depth ▷ Driving over curbs.
▷ Road damage.
▷ Tire pressure too low.
▷ Vehicle overloading.
▷ Incorrect tire storage.
Safety information
Warning
Wear indicators are distributed around the tire Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pressure,
circumference. These wear indicators have the which can lead to loss of vehicle control. There
legally required minimum height of is a risk of accident. If tire damage is suspected
0.063 in/1.6 mm. while driving, immediately reduce speed and
stop. Have wheels and tires checked. For this
The positions of the wear indicators are marked purpose, drive carefully to the nearest dealer’s
on the tire sidewall with TWI, Tread Wear Indica‐ service center or another qualified service cen‐
tor. ter or repair shop. Have vehicle towed or trans‐
ported as needed. Do not repair damaged tires,
but have them replaced.
Tire damage
General information
Inspect your tires regularly for damage, foreign
objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
276
Safety information
Warning
Tires can become damaged by driving over ob‐ Warning
stacles, e.g., curbs or road damage, at high
Wheels and tires which are not suitable for your
speed. Larger wheels have a smaller tire cross-
vehicle can damage parts of the vehicle, for in‐
section. The smaller the tire cross-section, the
stance due to contact with the body due to tol‐
higher the risk of tire damage. There may be a
erances despite the same official size rating.
risk of accident and risk of damage to property.
There is a risk of an accident. The manufac‐
If possible, avoid driving over objects or road
turer of your vehicle strongly suggests that you
conditions that may damage tires, or drive over
use wheels and tires that have been recom‐
them slowly and carefully.
mended by the vehicle manufacturer for your
vehicle type.
Changing wheels and tires

Warning
Mounting and wheel balancing Incorrect wheel/tire combinations will impair the
Have mounting and wheel balancing carried out vehicle's handling characteristics and a variety
by a dealer’s service center or another qualified of system functions, such as the Antilock Brak‐
service center or repair shop. ing System (ABS) or Dynamic Stability Control.
There is a risk of accident. To maintain good
handling and vehicle response, use only tires
Approved wheels and tires with a single tread configuration from a single
manufacturer. The manufacturer of the vehicle
General information recommends that you use wheels and tires that
The following properties are recommended and have been recommended by the vehicle manu‐
approved by the manufacturer of the vehicle for facturer for your vehicle type. Following tire
the approved wheels and tires per vehicle type damage, have the original wheel/tire combina‐
and special equipment: tion remounted on the vehicle as soon as pos‐
▷ Wheel and tire combinations. sible.
▷ Rim designs.
▷ Tire sizes. Recommended tire brands
▷ Tire brands.
You can ask a manufacturer service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop
about the approved wheels and tires for the vehi‐
cle and the special equipment.
For each tire size, the manufacturer of the vehi‐

cle recommends certain tire brands. The tire
277
brands can be identified by a star on the tire Changing runflat tires

sidewall.
When changing from run-flat tires to standard
tires, it must be ensured that the vehicle contains
New tires a compact spare tire ("donut") or tire mobility kit.
Further information is available from a dealer's
Tire traction is not optimal due to production-re‐
lated circumstances when tires are brand-new.
or repair shop.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Rotating wheels between axles
Different wear patterns can occur on the front
Retreaded tires
and rear axles depending on individual driving
conditions. The tires can be rotated in pairs be‐
Warning tween the axles to achieve even wear. Further in‐
Retreaded tires can have different tire casing formation is available from a dealer's service cen‐
structures. With advanced age the service life ter or another qualified service center or repair
can be limited. There is a risk of an accident. shop. After rotating, check the tire pressure and
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐ correct, if needed.
ommend the use of retreaded tires.
Storing tires
The manufacturer of the vehicle does not rec‐
ommend the use of retreaded tires. Tire pressure
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐
Winter tires sure indicated on the tire sidewall.
General information Storage

Winter tires are recommended for operating on ▷ Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry and dark
winter roads. place.
Although so-called all-season tires with M+S ▷ Always protect tires against all contact with
identification provide better winter traction than oil, grease, and solvents.
summer tires, they usually do not provide the ▷ Do not leave tires in plastic bags.
same level of performance as winter tires.
▷ Remove dirt from wheels or tires.
Maximum speed of winter tires
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher Runflat tires
than the permissible speed for the winter tires,
then attach a label showing the permissible maxi‐
mum speed in the field of vision. The label is Principle
available from a dealer's service center or an‐ Run-flat tires permit continued driving under re‐
other qualified service center or repair shop. stricted conditions even in the event of a com‐
With winter tires mounted, observe and do not plete tire pressure loss.
exceed the permissible maximum speed.
278
General information ▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by

setting the parking brake.
The wheels consist of tires that are self-support‐
ing, to a limited degree, and possibly special ▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels
rims. are in the straight-ahead position and engage
the steering wheel lock.
The reinforcement of the sidewall allows the tire
to remain drivable to a restricted degree in the ▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the ve‐
event of a tire pressure loss. hicle and ensure that they remain outside the
hazardous area in a safe place, such as be‐
Follow the instructions for continued driving with
hind a guardrail.
a flat tire.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an
Safety information appropriate distance.
Warning Tire repair set

The vehicle handles differently when a run-flat
tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for in‐ Principle
stance, reduced lane stability when braking,
With the tire repair set, minor tire damage can be
braking distances are longer and the self-steer‐
sealed temporarily to enable continued driving.
ing properties will change. There is a risk of ac‐
cident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. General information
▷ To enable continued driving, liquid sealant is
pumped into the tire, which hardens and
Identification seals the damage from the inside.
▷ Follow the instructions on using the tire repair
set found on the compressor and sealant
bottle.
▷ Use of the tire repair set may be ineffective if
the tire puncture measures approx. 4 mm or
more.
▷ Contact a dealer's service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop if the
tire cannot be made drivable.
The tires are marked on the tire sidewall with ▷ Do not remove foreign bodies that have pe‐
Run-flat System Component RSC. netrated the tire. Remove foreign objects only
when they are visibly protruding from the tire.
▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant bot‐
Repairing a flat tire tle and apply it to the steering wheel.
▷ The use of a sealing compound can damage
Safety measures the wheel electronics. In this case, have the
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible from electronics checked and replaced at the next
passing traffic and on solid ground. opportunity.
▷ Turn on the hazard warning system. ▷ The compressor can be used to check the
tire inflation pressure.
279
Overview 3 Tire pressure display

4 Reduce tire inflation pressure button
Storage
5 On/off switch
6 Compressor
7 Connector/cable for socket
8 Connection hose
Safety measures
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible from
passing traffic and on solid ground.
The storage for the tire repair set is provided in ▷ Turn on the hazard warning system.
the cargo area behind the left side panel. ▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by
setting the parking brake.
Sealant bottle ▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels
are in the straight-ahead position and engage
the steering wheel lock.
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the ve‐
hicle and ensure that they remain outside the
hazardous area in a safe place, such as be‐
hind a guardrail.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an
appropriate distance.
▷ Sealant bottle, arrow 1.

Filling the tire with sealing
▷ Filler hose, arrow 2.
compound
Observe expiration date on the sealant bottle. Safety information
Compressor DANGER
sufficient, harmful exhaust gases can enter into
the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollu‐
tants which are colorless and odorless. In en‐
closed areas, exhaust gases can also accumu‐
late outside of the vehicle. There is danger to
life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure suf‐
ficient ventilation.
1 Sealant bottle unlocking

2 Sealant bottle holder
280
4. Screw the filler hose of the sealant bottle

NOTICE onto the tire valve of the nonworking wheel.
The compressor can overheat during extended
operation. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty, among other potential damage. Do not run
the compressor for more than 10 minutes.
Filling
1. Shake the sealant bottle.
5. With the compressor switched off, insert the

connector into the power socket in the vehi‐
cle interior.
2. Pull filler hose completely out of the cover of

the sealant bottle. Do not kink the hose.
6. With standby state or drive-ready state

switched on, switch on the compressor.
3. Slide the sealant bottle into the holder on the

compressor housing, ensuring that it en‐
gages audibly.
Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutes to fill

the tire with sealing compound and achieve a tire
inflation pressure of approx. 2.0 bar.
While the tire is being filled with sealing com‐
pound, the tire inflation pressure may sporadi‐
cally reach approx. 5 bar. Do not switch off the
compressor in this phase.
281
Checking and adjusting the tire 4. Insert the connector into the power socket in
inflation pressure the vehicle interior.
Checking
1. Switch off the compressor.
2. Read the tire pressure on the tire pressure
display.
To continue the trip, a tire inflation pressure of at
least 2 bar must be reached.
Removing and stowing the sealant

5. With standby or drive readiness turned on,
bottle turn on the compressor and let it run for a
1. Unscrew the filler hose of the sealant bottle maximum of 10 minutes.
from the tire valve. When the tire pressure does not reach at
2. Press the red unlocking device. least 2 bar, contact a manufacturer service
3. Remove the sealant bottle from the compres‐ center or another qualified service center or
sor. repair shop.
4. Wrap and store the sealant bottle in suitable When a tire pressure of at least 2 bar is
material to avoid contamination of the cargo reached, see Minimum tire inflation pressure
area. is reached.
6. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐
Minimum tire inflation pressure is pressor from the tire valve.
not reached 7. Pull the connector out of the power socket in
1. Pull the connector out of the power socket in the vehicle interior.
the vehicle interior. 8. Stow the tire repair set in the vehicle.
2. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to distrib‐
ute the sealing compound in the tire. Minimum tire inflation pressure is
3. Screw the connection hose of the compres‐ reached
sor directly onto the tire valve stem. 1. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐
pressor from the tire valve.
2. Pull the connector out of the power socket in
the vehicle interior.
3. Stow the tire repair set in the vehicle.
4. Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to
ensure that the sealing compound is evenly
distributed in the tire.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
If possible, do not drive at speeds less than
12 mph/20 km/h.
282
Adjustment Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor again.

1. Stop at a suitable location. Replace the faulty tire and the sealant bottle of
2. Screw the connection hose of the compres‐ the tire repair set promptly.
sor directly onto the tire valve stem. Additional information:
▷ Run-flat tires, refer to page 291.
▷ Tire pressure monitor, refer to page 284.
Tire chains
Safety information
Warning
3. Insert the connector into the power socket in
the vehicle interior. With the mounting of tire chains on unsuitable
tires, the tire chains can come into contact with
vehicle parts. There may be a risk of accident
or risk of damage to property. Only mount tire
chains on tires that are designated by their
manufacturer as suitable for the use of tire
chains.
Warning
4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to at least Insufficiently tight tire chains may damage tires
2.0 bar: and vehicle components. There may be a risk
of accident or risk of damage to property. Make
▷ Increase tire pressure: with standby or sure that the tire chains are always sufficiently
drive readiness turned on, turn on the tight. Re-tighten as needed according to the
compressor and let it run for a maximum tire chain manufacturer's instructions.
of 10 minutes.
▷ Reduce tire inflation pressure: press the
button on the compressor. Fine-link tire chains
5. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐ The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
pressor from the tire valve. the use of fine-link tire chains. Certain types of
6. Pull the connector out of the power socket in fine-link tire chains have been tested by the
the vehicle interior. manufacturer of the vehicle and recommended
as road-safe and suitable.
7. Stow the tire repair set in the vehicle.
Information regarding suitable tire chains is avail‐
able from a dealer’s service center or another
Continuing the trip
Do not exceed the permissible maximum speed
of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
283
Use take over the actual tire inflation pressures as the

target pressures.
Use only in pairs on the front wheels, equipped
with the tires of the following size: When operating the system, also note the infor‐
mation found in the Tire inflation pressure chap‐
▷ 195/55 R 17.
ter.
▷ 205/45 R 18.
The wheel size and rim offset are located on the
Tire inflation pressure, refer to page 270.
inside of the wheel.
Follow the tire chain manufacturer's instructions.
Safety information
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after
mounting tire chains, as doing so may result in
incorrect readings. Warning
Do not reset the Tire Pressure Monitor after The display of the target pressures is not a
mounting tire chains, as doing so may result in substitute for the tire inflation pressure details
incorrect readings. on the vehicle. Incorrect entries in the tire set‐
tings can lead to incorrect target tire inflation
When driving with tire chains, briefly activate Dy‐
pressure values. In this case, it cannot be guar‐
namic Traction Control DTC to optimize the
anteed that the notification of a tire pressure
drive power.
loss will be reliable. There is a risk of injury and
risk of damage to property. Ensure that the tire
Maximum speed with tire chains sizes of the mounted tires are displayed cor‐
Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h when rectly and match the details on the tires and on
using tire chains. the vehicle.
Tire pressure monitor Functional requirements

The following conditions must be met for the
Principle system; otherwise, reliable message of a tire
pressure loss is not assured:
The Tire Pressure Monitor monitors the tire
pressure and issues a warning if the tire pressure ▷ After each tire or wheel change, the system
has dropped. detects and updates the mounted tires and
displays them after a short trip on the Control
General information Display.
Sensors in the tire valves measure the tire infla‐ Enter the information about the mounted
tion pressure and tire temperature. tires in the tire settings when the system
does not automatically detect the tires.
The system detects the mounted tires automati‐
cally. The system displays the predefined nomi‐ ▷ The Tire Pressure Monitor does not activate
nal pressure values on the Control Display and until after driving for a few minutes:
compares these values to the actual tire pressure ▷ After a tire or wheel replacement.
values. ▷ After a reset, for tires with special appro‐
If tires are being used that are not specified on val.
the tire inflation pressure details on the vehicle, ▷ After changing the tire setting.
such as tires with special approval, the system
▷ For tires with special approval:
needs to be actively reset. The system will then
284
▷ After a tire or wheel replacement, a reset 9. Select the maximum road speed that will be
was performed with the correct tire infla‐ used with the tires.
tion pressure. 10. "Save tire settings"
▷ After the tire inflation pressure was ad‐ The measurement of the current tire inflation
justed to a new value, a reset was per‐ pressure is started. The measurement progress
formed. is displayed.
▷ Wheels with wheel electronics.
Status display
Tire settings
Current status
General information The system status can be displayed on the Con‐
The information about the mounted tires can be trol Display, e.g., whether or not the system is ac‐
entered in the tire settings if the system does not tive.
automatically detect the tires.
1. "CAR"
The tire sizes of the mounted tires can be gath‐
2. "Vehicle status"
ered from the tire inflation pressure details on the
vehicle or directly on the tires. 3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
The tire details do not need to be re-entered The current status is displayed.
when the tire pressure is corrected.
For summer and winter tires, the tire details en‐ Current tire pressure
tered last are stored. After a tire or wheel re‐ The current tire pressure is displayed for each
placement, the settings of the tire sets used last tire.
can be selected. The current tire inflation pressures may change
during driving or depending on the outside tem‐
Changing settings perature.
1. "CAR"
2. "Vehicle status" Current tire temperature
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor" Depending on the model, the current tire tem‐
peratures are displayed.
4. "Tire settings"
The current tire temperatures may change while
5. "Tire selection" driving or due to the outside temperature.
6. "Manual"
7. "Tire type" Target pressure
▷ "Summer" The target pressure for the tires on the front and
▷ "Winter/All-year" rear axles is displayed.
8. Select the tire type that is mounted on the The specified target pressures take the influence
rear axle. of driving and outside temperature on the tire
temperature into account. The appropriate target
For tires with special approval: pressure is always displayed, independent of the
"Other tires". weather situation, tire temperatures and travel
Observe further proceeding in the perform a times.
reset section. The displayed target pressure may change and
may differ from the tire inflation pressure details
285
on the door pillar of the driver's door. The tire in‐ 3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
flation pressure can thus be corrected to the 4. Make sure that correct tire settings have
value of the displayed target pressures. been made.
The target pressure is immediately adjusted if Tire settings, refer to page 285.
the vehicle load status is changed in the tire set‐
5. Turn on drive-ready state and do not drive
tings.
off.
Tire conditions 6. Reset tire pressure: "Perform reset".

7. Drive away.
General information The wheels are displayed in gray and the follow‐
Tire and system status are indicated by the color ing is displayed "Resetting tire pressure…".
of the wheels and a text message on the Control After a travel time of several minutes, the set tire
Display. inflation pressures are accepted as the prede‐
Any existing messages may not be deleted if the fined tire inflation pressures. The reset is com‐
target pressure is not reached after the tire infla‐ pleted automatically while driving.
tion pressure is corrected. After a successfully completed reset, the wheels
on the Control Display are shown in green and
All wheels green the following is displayed: "Reset successful."
▷ The system is active and bases warnings on You may interrupt this trip at any time. When you
the target pressures. continue the reset resumes automatically.
▷ For tires with special approval: the system is
active and bases warnings on the tire inflation Messages: for tires without
pressures stored during the last reset. special approval
One to four yellow wheels General information

A flat tire or major tire pressure loss has occurred A low tire inflation pressure may cause the DSC
in the indicated tires. Dynamic Stability Control to be switched on.
Gray wheels Safety information

It may not be possible to identify tire pressure
losses. Warning
Possible causes: A damaged regular tire with low or missing tire
▷ Malfunction. inflation pressure impacts handling, such as
▷ During tire inflation pressure measurement, steering and braking response. Run-flat tires
after confirmation of the tire settings. can maintain limited stability. There is a risk of
accident. Do not continue driving if the vehicle
▷ For tires with special approval: a reset is per‐
is equipped with normal tires. Follow the infor‐
formed for the system.
mation on run-flat tires and continued driving
with these tires.
For tires with special approval:
perform a reset
1. "CAR"
2. "Vehicle status"
286
If a tire inflation pressure check is If there is a significant tire pressure

required loss
Message Message
An icon with a Check Control message appears A yellow warning light is illuminated in
on the Control Display. the instrument cluster.
Icon Possible cause
In addition, an icon with the affected tire appears
Inflation was not carried out according in a Check Control message on the Control Dis‐
to specifications, for instance when the play.
tire has not been sufficiently inflated or
Icon Possible cause
in the case of a natural steady tire pres‐
sure loss. There is a flat tire or a major tire pres‐
sure loss.
Measure
Check the tire pressure and correct as needed. Measure
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
If the tire inflation pressure is too Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
low vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with nor‐
Message
mal tires or run-flat tires.
A yellow warning light is illuminated in Run-flat tires are labeled with a circular icon
the instrument cluster. containing the letters RSC marked on the tire
sidewall.
In addition, an icon with a Check Control mes‐
sage appears on the Control Display. Run-flat tires, refer to page 278.
3. Read the description on What to do in case of
Icon Possible cause
a flat tire.
There is a tire pressure loss. Actions in the event of a flat tire, refer to
page 289.
Measure Messages: for tires with special

1. Reduce the vehicle speed. Do not exceed a
approval
speed of 80 mph/130 km/h.
General information
2. At the next opportunity, for instance at a filling
station, check the tire inflation pressure in all A low tire inflation pressure may cause the DSC
four tires and correct if necessary. Dynamic Stability Control to be switched on.
287
Safety information If the tire inflation pressure is too

low
Warning
Message
A damaged regular tire with low or missing tire
inflation pressure impacts handling, such as A yellow warning light is illuminated in
steering and braking response. Run-flat tires the instrument cluster.
can maintain limited stability. There is a risk of
accident. Do not continue driving if the vehicle
sage appears on the Control Display.
is equipped with normal tires. Follow the infor‐
mation on run-flat tires and continued driving Icon Possible cause
with these tires.
There is a tire pressure loss.
No reset was performed for the sys‐
If a tire inflation pressure check is tem. The system issues a warning
required based on the tire inflation pressures
stored during the last reset.
Message
An icon with a Check Control message appears Measure
on the Control Display. 1. Reduce the vehicle speed. Do not exceed a
Icon Possible cause speed of 80 mph/130 km/h.
2. At the next opportunity, for instance at a filling
Inflation was not carried out accord‐
station, check the tire inflation pressure in all
ing to specifications, e.g., the tire has
four tires and correct if necessary.
not been sufficiently inflated.
3. Reset the system.
The system has detected a wheel
change, but no reset was done.
If there is a significant tire pressure
The tire inflation pressure has fallen loss
below the level of the last reset.
No reset was performed for the sys‐ Message
tem. The system issues a warning
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
based on the tire inflation pressures
In addition, an icon with the affected tire appears
Measure in a Check Control message on the Control Dis‐
1. Check the tire pressure and correct as play.
needed. Icon Possible cause
2. Perform a system reset.
There is a flat tire or a major tire pres‐
sure loss.
No reset was performed for the sys‐
tem. The system issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures
288
Measure Runflat tires

Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ Safety information
vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with nor‐ Warning
mal tires or run-flat tires. The vehicle handles differently when a run-flat
Run-flat tires are labeled with a circular icon tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for in‐
containing the letters RSC marked on the tire stance, reduced lane stability when braking,
sidewall. braking distances are longer and the self-steer‐
Run-flat tires, refer to page 278. ing properties will change. There is a risk of ac‐
3. Read the description on What to do in case of
a flat tire.
Actions in the event of a flat tire, refer to
page 289. Maximum speed
You may continue driving with a damaged tire at
Actions in the event of a flat tire speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Normal tires Continued driving with a flat tire

1. Identify the damaged tire. Follow the following when continuing to drive
Check the tire pressure in all four tires, for in‐ with a damaged tire:
stance using the tire pressure display of a flat 1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
tire kit. vers.
For tires with special approval: when the tire 2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
pressure in all four tires is correct, the Tire
3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four
Pressure Monitor may not have been reset. In
tires at the next opportunity.
this case, perform the reset.
If tire damage cannot be found, contact a Possible driving distance with a
dealer’s service center or another qualified depressurized tire
The distance for which it may be possible to
2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or by drive safely varies depending on how the vehicle
changing the wheel. is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road conditions,
Use of sealing compound, for instance from the outside temperature. The driving distance may
flat tire kit, may damage the wheel electronics. be less but may also be more if an economical
Have the electronics replaced at the next oppor‐ driving style is used.
tunity. If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight
and used under favorable conditions, the dis‐
tance for which it may be safe to drive may be up
to 50 miles/80 km.
289
Vehicle handling with damaged tires Failure performing a reset

Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle Tires with special approval: the system will not
differently, potentially leading to conditions such function correctly if a reset was not performed,
as the following: for example a flat tire may be indicated although
▷ Greater likelihood of skidding of the vehicle. the tire inflation pressures are correct.
▷ Longer braking distances.
Malfunction
▷ Changed self-steering properties.
Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering Message
maneuvers or driving over obstacles, for instance
curbs or potholes. The yellow warning light flashes and is
then illuminated continuously. A Check
Final tire failure Control message is displayed. It may not
be possible to identify tire pressure losses.
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐
cate the final failure of a tire.
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the Measure
tire could come loose and cause an accident. ▷ A wheel without wheel electronics, such as
Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s serv‐ an emergency wheel, is mounted: have the
ice center or another qualified service center or wheels checked, if needed.
repair shop. ▷ Fault caused by systems or devices with the
same radio frequency: after leaving the area
System limits of the interference, the system automatically
becomes active again.
Temperature ▷ For tires with special approval: the system
The tire inflation pressure depends on the tire's was unable to complete the reset. Perform a
temperature. system reset again.
Driving or exposure to the sun will increase the ▷ Tire Pressure Monitor malfunction: have the
tire's temperature, thus increasing the tire infla‐ system checked by a manufacturer service
tion pressure. center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
The tire inflation pressure is reduced when the
tire temperature falls again.
Declaration according to NHTSA/
These circumstances may cause a warning FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure
when temperatures fall very sharply.
Monitoring System
Following a temperature-related warning, the tar‐
Each tire, including the spare (if provided) should
get pressures are displayed on the Control Dis‐
be checked monthly when cold and inflated to
play again after a short distance.
the inflation pressure recommended by the vehi‐
cle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire in‐
Sudden tire pressure loss flation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of
The system cannot indicate sudden serious tire a different size than the size indicated on the ve‐
damage caused by external circumstances. hicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pres‐
sure for those tires.) As an added safety feature,
your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pres‐
290
sure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates General information

a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of
The system detects tire pressure loss on the ba‐
your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord‐
sis of rotation speed differences between the in‐
ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi‐
dividual wheels while driving.
nates, you should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper In the event of a tire pressure loss, the diameter
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated and therefore the rotational speed of the corre‐
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to sponding wheel changes. The difference will be
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi‐ detected and reported as a flat tire.
ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi‐ The system does not measure the actual infla‐
cle's handling and stopping ability. Please note tion pressure in the tires.
that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility Functional requirements
to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-
The following conditions must be met for the
inflation has not reached the level to trigger illu‐
system; otherwise, reliable message of a tire
mination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
pressure loss is not assured:
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the ▷ After a tire or wheel replacement, an initializa‐
system is not operating properly. The TPMS tion was performed with the correct tire infla‐
malfunction indicator is combined with the low tion pressure.
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a ▷ After the tire pressure was adjusted to a new
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi‐ value, an initialization was performed.
mately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon Status display
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal‐
The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor FTM
function exists. When the malfunction indicator is
can be displayed, for instance whether the FTM
illuminated, the system may not be able to de‐
is active.
tect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of 1. "CAR"
reasons, including the installation of replacement 2. "Vehicle status"
or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that
3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Al‐
ways check the TPMS malfunction telltale after The status is displayed.
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your ve‐
hicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate Initialization required
tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to An initialization must be performed in the follow‐
function properly. ing situations:
▷ After the tire inflation pressure has been ad‐
Flat Tire Monitor FTM justed.
▷ After a tire or wheel replacement.
Principle
Performing initialization
The Flat Tire display detects a tire pressure loss
When initializing, the set tire inflation pressures
while driving and issues a warning if the tire pres‐
serve as reference values in order to detect a flat
sure has dropped.
291
tire. Initialization is started by confirming the tire Icon Possible cause

inflation pressures.
There is a flat tire or a major tire pres‐
Do not initialize the system when driving with tire
sure loss.
chains.
1. "CAR"
2. "Vehicle status"
Measure
3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
4. Turn on drive-ready state and do not drive vers.
off.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with nor‐
5. Start the initialization with: "Perform reset" mal tires or run-flat tires.
6. Drive away. Run-flat tires are labeled with a circular icon
The initialization is completed while driving, containing the letters RSC marked on the tire
which can be interrupted at any time. sidewall.
The initialization automatically continues when Run-flat tires, refer to page 278.
driving continues.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Messages
Normal tires
General information 1. Identify the damaged tire.
When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐ To do this, check the tire pressure in all four
bility Control is switched on, if needed. tires, for instance using the tire pressure dis‐
play of a flat tire kit.
Safety information
When the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor FTM may not
Warning have been initialized. In this case, initialize the
A damaged regular tire with low or missing tire system.
inflation pressure impacts handling, such as If identification of flat tire damage is not pos‐
steering and braking response. Run-flat tires sible, please contact a dealer’s service center
can maintain limited stability. There is a risk of or another qualified service center or repair
accident. Do not continue driving if the vehicle shop.
is equipped with normal tires. Follow the infor‐ 2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or by
mation on run-flat tires and continued driving changing the wheel.
with these tires.
Indication of a flat tire

A yellow warning light is illuminated in

sage appears on the Control Display.
292
Runflat tires Vehicle handling with damaged tires

Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle
Safety information differently, potentially leading to conditions such
as the following:
Warning ▷ Greater likelihood of skidding of the vehicle.
The vehicle handles differently when a run-flat ▷ Longer braking distances.
tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for in‐ ▷ Changed self-steering properties.
stance, reduced lane stability when braking,
Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering
braking distances are longer and the self-steer‐
maneuvers or driving over obstacles, for instance
ing properties will change. There is a risk of ac‐
curbs or potholes.
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐
Maximum speed cate the final failure of a tire.
You may continue driving with a damaged tire at Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the
speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h. tire could come loose and cause an accident.
Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s serv‐
Continued driving with a flat tire ice center or another qualified service center or
Follow the following when continuing to drive repair shop.
with a damaged tire:
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐

System limits
vers. The system could be delayed or malfunction in
the following situations:
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
▷ A natural, even tire pressure loss in all four
3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires will not be recognized. Therefore, check
tires at the next opportunity.
the tire inflation pressure regularly.
When the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
▷ Sudden serious tire damage caused by exter‐
is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have
nal circumstances cannot be recognized in
been initialized. In this case, initialize the sys‐
advance.
tem.
▷ The system has not been initialized.
Possible driving distance with a ▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road.
depressurized tire
▷ Sporty driving style: slip on traction wheels,
The distance for which it may be possible to high lateral acceleration (drifting).
drive safely varies depending on how the vehicle
▷ When driving with tire chains.
is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road conditions,
outside temperature. The driving distance may
be less but may also be more if an economical Changing wheels/tires
driving style is used.
If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight
and used under favorable conditions, the dis‐
General information
tance for which it may be safe to drive may be up When using run-flat tires or a flat tire kit, a wheel
to 50 miles/80 km. does not always need to be changed immedi‐
293
ately when there is a tire pressure loss due to a

flat tire. Warning
If needed, the tools for changing wheels are On soft, uneven or slippery ground, for example
available as accessories from a dealer’s service snow, ice, tiles, etc., the vehicle jack can slip
center or another qualified service center or re‐ away. There is a risk of injury. If possible,
pair shop. change the wheel on a flat, solid, and slip-re‐
sistant surface.
Safety information
Warning Warning
The vehicle jack is only provided for short-term The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting the vehi‐
lifting of the vehicle for wheel changes. Even if cle and for the jacking points on the vehicle
all safety measures are observed, there is a risk only. There is a risk of injury. Do not lift any
of the raised vehicle falling, if the vehicle jack other vehicle or cargo using the vehicle jack.
tips over. There is a risk of injury or danger to
life. When the vehicle is raised with the vehicle
jack, do not lie under the vehicle and do not Warning
switch on the drive-ready state. When the vehicle jack is not inserted into the
jacking point provided for this purpose, the ve‐
hicle may be damaged or the vehicle jack may
Warning slip when it is being cranked up. There is a risk
Supports such as wooden blocks under the ve‐ of injury or risk of damage to property. When
hicle jack reduce the capacity of the vehicle cranking up the vehicle jack, ensure that it is in‐
jack to bear weight. They have the potential to serted in the jacking point next to the wheel
exert too much strain on the vehicle jack, caus‐ housing.
ing it to tip over and the vehicle to fall. There is
a risk of injury or danger to life. Do not place
supports under the vehicle jack. Warning
A vehicle that is raised on a vehicle jack may fall
off of the jack if lateral forces are exerted on it.
Warning There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to
The jack, issued by the vehicle manufacturer, is property. While the vehicle is raised, do not ex‐
provided in order to perform a wheel change in ert lateral forces on the vehicle or pull abruptly
the event of a breakdown. The jack is not de‐ on the vehicle. Have a stuck wheel removed by
signed for frequent use; for example, changing a dealer’s service center or another qualified
from summer to winter tires. Using the jack fre‐ service center or repair shop.
quently may cause it to become jammed or
damaged. There is a risk of injury and risk of
damage to property. Only use the jack to attach
an emergency or spare wheel in the event of a
breakdown.
294
Securing the vehicle against Lug bolt lock

rolling
Principle
General information The wheel lug bolts have a special coding. The
The vehicle manufacturer recommends to addi‐ lug bolts can only be released with the adapter
tionally secure the vehicle against rolling away which matches the coding.
when changing a wheel.
Overview
On a level surface The adapter of the lug bolt lock is in the onboard
vehicle tool kit or in a storage compartment close
to the onboard vehicle tool kit.
Place wheel chocks or other suitable objects in

front and behind the wheel that is diagonal to the
wheel to be changed. ▷ Lug lock bolt, arrow 1.
▷ Adapter, arrow 2.
On a slight downhill gradient
Unscrewing
1. Attach the adapter to the lug lock bolt.
2. Unscrew the lug lock bolt.
3. Remove the adapter after unscrewing the lug
bolt.
Screwing on
1. Attach the adapter to the lug lock bolt. If nec‐
If you need to change a wheel on a slight down‐ essary, turn the adapter until it fits on the lug
hill grade, place chocks and other suitable ob‐ lock bolt.
jects, for instance rocks, under the wheels of 2. Screw on the lug lock bolt. The tightening
both the front and rear axles against the rolling torque is 101 lbs ft/140 Nm.
direction. 3. Remove the adapter and stow it after screw‐
ing on the lug bolt.
295
Preparing the vehicle Jacking up the vehicle

▷ Park the vehicle on solid and non-slip ground
at a safe distance from traffic. Warning
▷ Turn on the hazard warning system. Hands and fingers can be jammed when using
▷ Set the parking brake. the vehicle jack. There is a risk of injury. Com‐
▷ Engage a gear or move the selector lever to ply with the described hand position and do not
position P. change this position while using the vehicle
jack.
▷ As soon as permitted by the traffic flow, have
all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle
1. Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, arrow 1,
and ensure that they remain outside the haz‐
and grasp the vehicle jack crank or lever with
ardous area in a safe place, such as behind a
your other hand, arrow 2.
guardrail.
▷ Depending on the vehicle equipment, get
wheel change tools and, if necessary, the
emergency wheel from the vehicle.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle or port‐
able hazard warning light at an appropriate
distance.
▷ Secure the vehicle additionally against rolling.
▷ Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.
2. Insert the vehicle jack into the rectangular re‐
Jacking points for the vehicle cess of the jacking point closest to the wheel
jack to be changed.
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐

cated at the indicated positions.
296
3. Extend the vehicle jack by turning the vehicle Mounting a wheel

jack crank or lever clockwise.
Mount one emergency wheel only, as required.
1. Unscrew the lug bolts.

2. Remove the wheel.
3. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on
and screw in at least two lug bolts in a cross‐
wise pattern until hand-tight.
When non-original light-alloy wheels of the
vehicle manufacturer are mounted, the ac‐
companying lug bolts may have to be used as
4. Take your hand away from the vehicle jack as well.
soon as the vehicle jack is under load and 4. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts and
continue turning the vehicle jack crank or tighten all lug bolts well in a crosswise pat‐
lever with one hand. tern.
5. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands 5. Turn the vehicle jack crank counterclockwise
vertically and at a right angle beneath the to retract the vehicle jack and lower the vehi‐
jacking point. cle.
6. Remove the vehicle jack and stow it securely.
After the wheel change

1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The tighten‐
ing torque is 101 lbs ft/140 Nm.
2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the cargo area,
if necessary.
3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next op‐
6. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands portunity and correct as needed.
vertically and perpendicularly beneath the 4. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
jacking point after extending the vehicle jack. Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor again.
5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight
with a calibrated torque wrench.
6. Have the damaged tire replaced at the near‐
est dealer's service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
Emergency wheel
7. Crank the vehicle up, until the vehicle jack is Principle
with the entire surface on the ground and the
relevant wheel is maximum 1.2 inches/3 cm In the event of a flat tire, the emergency wheel
above ground. can be used in place of the wheel with the defec‐
tive tire. The emergency wheel is only intended
297
for temporary use until the defective tire/wheel 5. Remove the jacking point and the tool holder
has been replaced. on the left next to the emergency wheel.
6. Slide the emergency wheel to the left and re‐
General information move it.
Mount one emergency wheel only.
Also check the tire inflation pressure of the Inserting the emergency wheel
emergency wheel in the cargo area regularly, and 1. Insert the emergency wheel on the left and
correct it as needed. slide it to the right.
2. Where applicable, mount the holder and the
Safety information trailer hitch.
3. Attach the retaining plate or the cover.
Warning 4. Screw on and tighten the butterfly screw.
The emergency wheel has particular dimen‐ 5. Insert and secure the jacking point and the
sions. When driving with an emergency wheel, tool holder on the left next to the emergency
changed driving properties may occur, for in‐ wheel.
stance reduced lane stability when braking, lon‐ 6. Insert the cargo floor panel.
ger braking distance, and changed self-steering
properties in the limit area. There is a risk of ac‐
Overview
The emergency wheel and the wheel change

tools are located in the cargo area under the
cargo floor panel.
Removing the emergency wheel

1. Pull up and remove the cargo floor panel.
2. Unscrew the butterfly screw.
3. Remove the retaining plate or the cover.
4. Where applicable, remove the holder and the
trailer hitch.
298
Engine compartment MOBILITY
Engine compartment
Overview
1 Washer fluid reservoir 4 Jump-starting, positive battery terminal

2 Vehicle identification number 5 Jump-starting, negative battery terminal
3 Oil filler neck 6 Coolant reservoir, engine
299
MOBILITY Engine compartment
Hood
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when opening and
Safety information closing the hood. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of hood is clear
Warning during opening and closing.
Improperly executed work in the engine com‐
partment can damage vehicle components and
impair vehicle functions. There is a risk of an NOTICE
accident and damage to property. Have work in Folded-away wipers can be jammed when the
the engine compartment performed by a deal‐ hood is opened. There is a risk of damage to
er’s service center or another qualified service property, among other potential damage. Make
center or repair shop. sure that the wipers with the wiper blades
mounted are folded down onto the windshield
before opening the hood.
Warning
The engine compartment accommodates mov‐
ing components. Certain components in the NOTICE
engine compartment can also move with the When the hood is closed, it must engage on
vehicle switched off, for instance the radiator both sides. Pressing again can damage the
fan. There is a risk of injury. Do not reach into hood. There is a risk of damage to property,
the area of moving parts. Keep articles of cloth‐ among other potential damage. Open the hood
ing and hair away from moving parts. again and then close it energetically. Avoid
pressing again.
Warning
There are protruding parts, for instance locking Opening hood
hook, on the inside of the hood. There is a risk 1. Pull lever, arrow 1.
of injury. If the hood is open, pay attention to Hood is unlocked.
protruding parts and keep clear of these areas.
Warning
An incorrectly locked hood can open while driv‐
ing and restrict visibility. There is a risk of acci‐
dent. Stop immediately and correctly close the
hood.
2. After the lever is released, pull the lever again,

arrow 2.
Hood can be opened.
3. Be careful of protruding parts on the hood.
300
Engine compartment MOBILITY
Closing the hood
Energetically close the hood from approx.

20 in/50 cm.
The hood must engage on both sides.
301
MOBILITY Operating materials
Operating materials
options
CAUTION
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
cific and optional features offered with the series. harmful engine deposits or damage. Addition‐
It also describes features and functions that are ally, problems relating to drivability, starting and
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due stalling, especially under certain environmental
to the selected options or country versions. This conditions such as high ambient temperature
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ and high altitude, may occur.
tems. When using these functions and systems, If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ ommend switching to a high quality gasoline
served. brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐
ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐
gine deposits, it is highly recommended to pur‐
Fuel recommendation chase gasoline from Top Tier retailers.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
General information may result in the need for additional mainte‐
Depending on the region, many filling stations nance.
sell fuel that has been customized to winter or
summer conditions. Fuel that is available in win‐
ter, for instance helps make a cold start easier. NOTICE
Even small quantities of the wrong fuel or
Gasoline wrong fuel additives can damage the fuel sys‐
tem and engine. Furthermore, the catalytic
General information converter is permanently damaged. There is a
For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should risk of damage to property, among other poten‐
be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content. tial damage. Do not refuel or add the following
in the case of gasoline engines:
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐
taining metal must not be used. ▷ Leaded gasoline.
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of 25 %, ▷ Metallic additives, for instance manganese
i. e. E10 or E25, may be used for refueling. or iron.
Ethanol should meet the following quality stan‐ Do not press the Start/Stop button after refuel‐
dards: ing with the wrong fuel. Contact a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
US: ASTM 4806–xx
repair shop.
CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx
xx: comply with the current standard in each
case.
302
Operating materials MOBILITY
Engine oil
NOTICE
Fuel that does not comply with the minimum
quality can compromise engine function or
General information
cause engine damage. There is a risk of dam‐ The engine oil consumption is dependent on
age to property, among other potential dam‐ your driving style and driving conditions.
age. Do not fill with fuel that does not comply Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level af‐
with the minimum quality. ter refueling by taking a detailed measurement.
The engine oil consumption can increase in the
following situations, for instance:
NOTICE ▷ Sporty driving style.
Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel system and ▷ Break-in of the engine.
the engine. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
▷ Idle operation of the engine.
erty, among other potential damage. Do not
use fuels with a higher ethanol content than ▷ With use of engine oil types that are classified
recommended. Do not refuel with fuels con‐ as not suitable.
taining methanol, e.g. M5 to M100. Different Check Control messages appear on the
Control Display depending on the engine oil
level.
Recommended gas quality
BMW recommends AKI 91. Safety information
M Performance model:
BMW recommends AKI 93. NOTICE
Refuel with this gasoline to achieve the rated An engine oil level that is too low causes en‐
performance and consumption values. gine damage. There is a risk of damage to
property, among other potential damage. Im‐
Minimum fuel grade mediately add engine oil.
BMW recommends AKI 89.
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rating,
the engine may produce knocking sounds when NOTICE
starting at high external temperatures. This has Too much engine oil can damage the engine or
no effect on the engine life. the catalytic converter. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property, among other potential dam‐
age. Do not add too much engine oil. When too
much engine oil is added, have the engine oil
level corrected by a dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop.
303
Electronic oil measurement Detailed measurement
General information Principle

The electronic oil measurement has two measur‐ The engine oil level is checked when the vehicle
ing principles: is stationary and displayed via a scale.
▷ Monitoring. If the engine oil level is outside its permissible
operating range, a Check Control message is
▷ Detailed measurement.
displayed.
When making frequent short-distance trips or
using a sporty driving style, for instance when General information
taking curves aggressively, regularly perform a
During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐
detailed measurement.
creased somewhat.
Monitoring Functional requirements

Principle ▷ Vehicle is parked in a horizontal position.
The engine oil level is monitored electronically ▷ Steptronic transmission: selector lever in se‐
while driving and can be shown on the Control lector lever position N or P and accelerator
Display. pedal not depressed.Selector lever in selec‐
tor lever position N or P and accelerator pedal
If the engine oil level is outside its permissible
not depressed.
operating range, a Check Control message is
displayed. ▷ The drive-ready state is switched on by
pressing the Start/Stop button.
A red indicator light indicates that the en‐
▷ Engine is running and is at operating temper‐
gine oil pressure is too low.
ature.
Functional requirements Performing a detailed measurement

A current measured value is available after ap‐ 1. "CAR"
prox. 30 minutes of normal driving. 2. "Vehicle status"
Displaying the engine oil level
4. "Engine oil measurement"
1. "CAR"
5. "Start measurement"
2. "Vehicle status"
The engine oil level is checked and displayed via
a scale.
The engine oil level is displayed.
Adding engine oil
System limits
When making frequent short-distance trips or General information
using a sporty driving style, it may not be possi‐
Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐
ble to calculate a measured value. In this case,
played in the instrument cluster. The quantity to
the measured value for the last, sufficiently long
be added is indicated in the message shown on
trip is displayed.
Only add suitable types of engine oil.
304
Safely park the vehicle and switch off drive-ready Opening, refer to page 300.
state before adding engine oil. 2. Open the lid counterclockwise.
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
Safety information
Warning
Operating materials, for instance oils, greases,
coolants, fuels, can contain harmful ingredients.
There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Follow
the instructions on the containers. Avoid the
contact of articles of clothing, skin or eyes with 3. Add engine oil.
operating materials. Do not refill operating ma‐ 4. Close the lid.
terials into different bottles. Store operating
materials out of reach of children. Engine oil types to add
General information
NOTICE
The engine oil grade is critical for the life of the
An engine oil level that is too low causes en‐ engine.
gine damage. There is a risk of damage to
Only add with the types of engine oil which are
property, among other potential damage. Im‐
listed.
mediately add engine oil.
Safety information
NOTICE
NOTICE
Too much engine oil can damage the engine or
the catalytic converter. There is a risk of dam‐ Oil additives can damage the engine. There is a
age to property, among other potential dam‐ risk of damage to property, among other poten‐
age. Do not add too much engine oil. When too tial damage. Do not use oil additives.
much engine oil is added, have the engine oil
level corrected by a dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop. NOTICE
Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunctions in
the engine or damage it. There is a risk of dam‐
Overview age to property, among other potential dam‐
The oil filler neck is located in the engine com‐ age. When selecting an engine oil, make sure
partment. that the engine oil has the correct oil specifica‐
Additional information: tion.
For an overview, refer to page 299.
Suitable engine oil types
Adding engine oil
Add engine oils that meet the following oil rating
1. Opening the hood.
standards:
305
Gasoline engine fied service center or repair shop change the en‐
gine oil.
BMW Longlife-14 FE+.
BMW Longlife-17 FE+.
Alternative engine oil types

If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is not
available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an engine oil
with the following oil rating can be added:
Oil specification
API SL.
API SM. Coolant

API SN.
General information
Coolant consists of water and coolant additive.
Viscosity grades
Not all commercially available additives are suita‐
When selecting an engine oil, make sure that the
ble for the vehicle. Do not mix additives of differ‐
engine oil has a suitable viscosity grade. The
ent colors. Observe the water - additive mixture
suitable viscosity grade is indicated on a label in
ratio of 50:50. Information about suitable addi‐
the engine compartment.
tives is available from a dealer’s service center or
Viscosity grades another qualified service center or repair shop.
SAE 0W-20.
Safety information
More information about suitable oil specifications
and viscosity grades of engine oils can be re‐ Warning
quested from a dealer’s service center or another With the engine hot and the cooling system
qualified service center or repair shop. open, coolant can escape and lead to scalding.
There is a risk of injury. Only open the cooling
Engine oil change system with the engine cooled down.
NOTICE
Warning
Engine oil that is not changed in timely fashion
can cause increased engine wear and thus en‐ Additives are harmful and incorrect additives
gine damage. There is a risk of damage to can damage the engine. There is a risk of injury
property. It is recommended that you do not and risk of damage to property. Do not allow
exceed the service intervals indicated in the ve‐ additives to come into contact with skin, eyes
hicle. or articles of clothing. Use suitable additives
only.
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you
have a dealer's service center or another quali‐
306
Coolant level Opening, refer to page 300.

3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
General information counterclockwise to allow any excess pres‐
Depending on the motorization, there are up to sure to dissipate, then open it.
two coolant reservoirs in the engine compart‐ 4. Open the coolant reservoir lid.
ment. Check and add the coolant levels on a reg‐ 5. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to
ular basis. the specified level; do not overfill.
The coolant level is indicated using minimum 6. Close the lid.
and maximum markings in the filler neck of the
7. Have the cause of the coolant loss eliminated
coolant reservoir.
as soon as possible.
Depending on the engine installation, the coolant
reservoir is located on the right side or the left
Disposal
side of the engine compartment.
Additional information: Comply with the relevant environmental
protection regulations when disposing of
For an overview, refer to page 299. coolant and coolant additives.
Checking the coolant level

1. Let the engine cool down.
Washer fluid
Opening, refer to page 300. General information
3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly All windshield washer jets are supplied from one
counterclockwise to allow any excess pres‐ tank.
sure to dissipate, then open it.
Use a mixture of tap water and windshield
4. Open the coolant reservoir lid. washer concentrate. If desired, a windshield
5. The coolant level is correct if it lies between washer concentrate containing antifreeze can be
the minimum and maximum marks in the filler used.
neck. Recommended minimum fill quantity:
0.2 US gal/1 liter.
Safety information
Warning
Some types of antifreeze can contain harmful
substances and are flammable. There is a risk
of fire and an injury hazard. Follow the instruc‐
tions on the containers. Keep antifreeze away
6. Close the lid.
from ignition sources. Do not refill operating
materials into different bottles. Store operating
Adding coolant materials out of reach of children.
1. Let the engine cool down.
307
United States: the washer fluid mixture ratio is Overview

regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual
states; do not exceed the allowable washer fluid
dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow the usage
instructions on the washer fluid container.
Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Concentrate
or the equivalent is recommended.
Warning
Washer fluid can ignite and catch fire on con‐ The washer fluid reservoir is located in the en‐
tact with hot engine parts. There is a risk of in‐ gine compartment.
jury or risk of damage to property. Only add
washer fluid when the engine is cooled down.
Next, fully close the lid of the washer fluid res‐ Malfunction
ervoir. The use of undiluted windshield washer concen‐
trate or alcohol-based antifreeze can lead to in‐
correct readings at temperatures below
NOTICE +5 ℉/-15 ℃.
Silicon-containing additives in the washer fluid

for the water-repelling effect on the windows
can lead to damage to the washing system.
other potential damage. Do not add silicon-
containing additives to the washer fluid.
NOTICE
Mixing different windshield washer concen‐
trates or antifreeze can damage the washing
among other potential damage. Do not mix dif‐
ferent windshield washer concentrates or anti‐
freeze. Follow the information and mixture ra‐
tios provided on the containers.
308
Maintenance MOBILITY
Maintenance
Vehicle features and General information
options Information on service notifications can be dis‐
played on the Control Display.
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ Additional information:
cific and optional features offered with the series. Service notifications, refer to page 154.
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due Service data in the vehicle key
Information on the service notifications is contin‐
uously stored in the vehicle key. The service
center can read this data out and suggest a
maintenance scope for the vehicle.
served.
Therefore, hand the service advisor the vehicle
key with which the vehicle was driven most re‐
BMW maintenance system cently.
The maintenance system provides service notifi‐ Storage periods

cations and thereby provides support in main‐ Storage periods during which the vehicle battery
taining road safety and the operational reliability was disconnected are not taken into account.
of the vehicle.
If this occurs, have a dealer's service center or
In some cases, scopes and intervals of the main‐ another qualified service center or repair shop
tenance system may vary according to the coun‐ update the time-dependent maintenance proce‐
try version. Replacement work, spare parts, fuels dures, such as checking brake fluid and, if neces‐
and lubricants, and wear materials are calculated sary, changing the engine oil and the microfilter/
separately. Further information is available from a activated-charcoal filter.
dealer's service center or another qualified serv‐
ice center or repair shop.
Maintenance Booklet for
Condition Based Service US Models
CBS Please consult your Maintenance Booklet for ad‐
ditional information on the performance of serv‐
Principle ice and maintenance work.
Sensors and special algorithms take into account The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
the driving conditions of the vehicle. CBS uses that maintenance and repair be performed by a
these to provide maintenance recommendations. service center or another qualified service center
or repair shop. Records of regular maintenance
The system makes it possible to adapt the
and repair work should be retained.
amount of maintenance corresponding to your
user profile.
309
MOBILITY Maintenance
Socket for OBD Onboard Emissions

Diagnosis ▷ The warning light lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have the
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
General information
▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir‐
Devices connected to the OBD socket trigger
cumstances:
the alarm system when the vehicle is locked. Re‐
move any devices connected at the OBD socket This indicates that there is excessive misfiring
before locking the vehicle. in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys‐
Safety information tem checked immediately; otherwise, serious
engine misfiring within a brief period can seri‐
ously damage emission control components,
NOTICE
in particular the catalytic converter.
The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an intri‐
cate component intended to be used in con‐
junction with specialized equipment to check
the vehicle’s primary emissions system. Im‐
proper use of the socket for Onboard Diagno‐
sis, or contact with the socket for Onboard Di‐
agnosis for other than its intended purpose,
can cause vehicle malfunctions and creates
risks of personal and property damage. Given
the foregoing, the manufacture of your vehicle
strongly recommends that access to the socket
for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to a dealer's
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop or other persons that have
the specialized training and equipment for pur‐
poses of properly utilizing the socket for On‐
board Diagnosis.
Position
Located on the driver's side is an OBD socket for

reading the vehicle data.
310
Replacing components MOBILITY
Replacing components
Vehicle features and Wiper blades
options
Safety information
NOTICE
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due The window may sustain damage if the wiper
to the selected options or country versions. This falls onto it without the wiper blade installed.
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ There is a risk of damage to property, among
tems. When using these functions and systems, other potential damage. Hold the wiper firmly
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ when changing the wiper blade. Do not fold or
served. switch on the wiper without a wiper blade in‐
stalled.
Vehicle tool kit

NOTICE
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the on‐ Folded-away wipers can be jammed when the
board vehicle tool kit is located: hood is opened. There is a risk of damage to
▷ In the cargo area behind the left side panel. property, among other potential damage. Make
sure that the wipers with the wiper blades
mounted are folded down onto the windshield
before opening the hood.
Replacing the wiper blades

1. To change the wiper blades, fold up the wiper
arms.
Fold-away position of the wipers, refer to
▷ Under the cargo floor panel. page 135.
2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.
311
MOBILITY Replacing components
3. Press the button, arrow 1, and turn the wiper Headlight glass
blade, arrow 2.
The inside of the headlight glass can fog up in
cool or humid weather. When driving with the
lights switched on, the condensation evaporates
after a short time. The headlight glass does not
need to be changed.
If despite driving with the headlights switched on,
increasing humidity forms, for instance water
droplets in the light, have the headlights
checked.
4. Pull out wiper blade to the front, arrow 3.

5. Insert the new wiper blade in reverse order of
Vehicle battery
removal until it locks in place.
6. Fold down the wipers. General information
The battery is maintenance-free.
More information about the battery can be re‐
Lights and bulbs quested from a dealer's service center or another
General information
Lights and bulbs make an essential contribution Safety information
to driving safety.
All headlights and lights are made using LED DANGER
technology. Contact with live components can lead to an
Some items of equipment use light-emitting di‐ electric shock. There is a risk of injury or danger
odes installed behind a cover as a light source. to life. Do not touch any components that are
These light-emitting diodes are related to con‐ under voltage.
ventional lasers and are officially designated as
Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends Warning
that you let a dealer's service center or another
Vehicle batteries that are not compatible can
qualified service center or repair shop perform
damage vehicle systems and impair vehicle
the work in case of a malfunction.
functions. There is a risk of an accident and
damage to property. Only vehicle batteries that
Safety information are compatible with your vehicle type should be
installed in your vehicle. Information on com‐
Warning patible vehicle batteries is available at your
dealer’s service center.
Intensive brightness can irritate or damage the
retina of the eye. There is a risk of injury. Do not
look directly into the headlights or other light
sources. Do not remove the LED covers.
312
Replacing components MOBILITY
Register the battery to the Charging the battery

vehicle Charge the battery only when the engine is off
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends and via the starting aid terminals in the engine
that you have a service center or another quali‐ compartment.
fied service center or repair shop register the ve‐ Additional information:
hicle battery to the vehicle after the battery has Starting aid terminals, refer to page 318.
been replaced. Once the battery has been regis‐
tered again, all comfort features will be available
Power interruption
without restriction and any Check Control mes‐
sages displayed which relate to comfort features After a power interruption, some equipment
will disappear. needs to be newly initialized or individual settings
updated, for example:
Charging the battery ▷ With Memory function: store the positions
again.
General information ▷ Time: update.
Make sure that the battery is always sufficiently ▷ Date: update.
charged to guarantee that the battery remains ▷ Glass sunroof: initialize the system.
usable for its full service life.
A discharged battery is indicated by a red Disposing of old batteries
indicator light.
Have old batteries disposed of by a deal‐
Charge the battery when acceleration is insuffi‐ er’s service center or another qualified
cient. service center or repair shop or take
them to a collection point.
The following circumstances can have a negative
effect on the performance of the battery: Maintain the filled battery in an upright position
for transport and storage. Secure the battery so
▷ Frequent short-distance drives. that it does not tip over during transport.
▷ The vehicle is not used for more than a
month.
Safety information
Fuses
General information
NOTICE
The fuses are located at different places in the
Battery chargers that charge the vehicle battery vehicle.
via sockets or cigarette lighters in the vehicle
may overload or damage the 12 V electrical
among other potential damage. Only connect
battery chargers for the vehicle battery to the
starting aid terminals in the engine compart‐
ment.
313
MOBILITY Replacing components
Safety information
Warning
Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload elec‐
trical lines and components. There is a risk of
fire. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse. Do
not replace a nonworking fuse with a substitute
of another color or amperage rating.
In the glove compartment

The fuses are located behind a cover in the glove
compartment on the front passenger side.
Push the holder down, arrow 1, and remove the

cover, arrow 2.
Information on the fuse layout, as well as the po‐

sitions of any other fuse boxes, is available on the
Internet: www.bmw.com/fusecard.
Replacing fuses
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you
have a dealer's service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop replace the
fuses.
314
Breakdown Assistance MOBILITY
Breakdown Assistance
Vehicle features and Warning triangle
options
served. The warning triangle is located on the inside of
the tailgate.
To remove, loosen the bracket.
Hazard warning flashers
First-aid kit
General information
Some of the articles have a limited service life.
Check the expiration dates of the contents regu‐
larly and replace any expired items promptly.
Storage
The button is located in the center console.
The red light in the button flashes when the haz‐
ard warning flashers are activated.
Storage for the first-aid kit is provided in the

compartment under the cargo area floor.
Fold up the cargo floor panel.
315
MOBILITY Breakdown Assistance
BMW Roadside Assistance mitted automatically. It may be necessary to ap‐

prove this on the Control Display.
Principle Teleservice Help

Contact the BMW Group Roadside Assistance if Depending on the country, Teleservice Help en‐
assistance is needed in the event of a break‐ ables an in-depth diagnosis of the vehicle by
down. BMW Roadside Assistance via wireless trans‐
mission.
General information You can launch Teleservice Help by requesting it
In the event of a breakdown, data on the vehi‐ through BMW Roadside Assistance.
cle's condition is transmitted to the BMW Road‐
side Assistance. 1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.
There are various ways of contacting BMW 2. Set the parking brake.
Roadside Assistance. 3. Control Display is switched on.
▷ Via a Check Control message. 4. Confirm Teleservice Help.
Supplementary text messages, refer to
page 147.
BMW Accident Assistance
▷ Calling with a mobile phone.
▷ Via the BMW app.
Principle
Functional requirements BMW Group Accident Assistance can be con‐
tacted if assistance is needed in the event of an
▷ Active ConnectedDrive contract, equipment accident.
with intelligent emergency call or BMW Con‐
nectedDrive services.
General information
If the vehicle sensors detect a minor to moder‐
▷ Standby state is switched on. ately severe accident, which did not trigger any
airbags, a Check Control message appears on
Starting manually the instrument cluster. In addition, a text mes‐
If the vehicle is equipped with Teleservices, sup‐ sage appears on the Control Display.
port is offered through Teleservice Diagnosis. When BMW Accident Assistance is activated,
data on the vehicle's condition is sent to BMW.
1. "APPS"
2. "Installed apps"
3. "BMW Assist"
▷ Active ConnectedDrive contract, equipment
4. If necessary, "BMW Roadside Assistance" with intelligent emergency call or BMW Con‐
A voice connection is established. nectedDrive services.
Teleservice Diagnosis ▷ Standby state is switched on.
Teleservice Diagnosis enables the wireless
transmission of detailed vehicle data that is im‐
portant for vehicle diagnosis. This data is trans‐
316
Starting BMW Accident For technical reasons, the Emergency Call can‐
Assistance not be guaranteed under unfavorable conditions.
If an accident is detected Overview

automatically
A text message relating to BMW Accident Assis‐
tance appears on the Control Display.
The connection can be established directly:
"Contact accident assistance"
The Check Control message for BMW Accident
Assistance can also be called up from the stored
Check Control messages for a certain length of
time.
SOS button.
Check Control, refer to page 146.
Starting manually ▷ Standby state is switched on.
BMW Accident Assistance can also be con‐ ▷ The Assist system is functional.
tacted independently of the automatic accident
▷ If the vehicle is equipped with intelligent
detection function.
emergency call: the integrated SIM card in
1. "APPS" the vehicle has been activated.
2. "Installed apps"
Automatic triggering
3. "BMW Assist"
Under certain conditions, for instance if the air‐
4. "BMW Accident Assistance"
bags trigger, an emergency call is automatically
Follow the displays on the Control Display. A initiated immediately after an accident of corre‐
voice connection is established. sponding severity. Automatic Collision Notifica‐
tion is not affected by pressing the SOS button.
Emergency Call Manual triggering

1. Tap the cover.
Intelligent emergency call 2. Press and hold the SOS button until the LED
in the area of the button illuminates green.
Principle
▷ The LED is illuminated green when an emer‐
In case of an emergency, an emergency call can gency call has been initiated.
be triggered automatically by the system or man‐
If a cancel prompt appears on the Control
ually.
Display, the emergency call can be aborted.
General information
Only press the SOS button in an emergency.
The Intelligent Assist system establishes a con‐
nection with the BMW Response Center.
317
If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle until Safety information

the voice connection has been established.
▷ The LED flashes green when a connection to
DANGER
the BMW Response Center has been estab‐
lished. Contact with live components can lead to an
electric shock. There is a risk of injury or danger
The BMW Response Center then makes
to life. Do not touch any components that are
contact with the occupants of the vehicle and
under voltage.
initiates further steps to help.
Even if you are unable to respond, the BMW
Response Center can take further steps to
Warning
help you under certain circumstances.
If the jumper cables are connected in the incor‐
For this purpose, data that serves to deter‐
rect order, sparking may occur. There is a risk
mine the necessary rescue measures, for in‐
of injury. Pay attention to the correct order dur‐
stance the current position of the vehicle
ing connection.
when it can be determined, is transmitted to
the BMW Response Center.
Even if the BMW Response Center is no lon‐
NOTICE
ger heard through the loudspeakers, the
BMW Response Center may still be able to In the case of body contact between the two
hear the occupants of the vehicle. vehicles, a short circuit can occur during jump-
starting. There is a risk of damage to property,
The BMW Response Center ends the emer‐
gency call.
no body contact occurs.
Malfunction
The function of the Emergency Request may be Preparation
impaired.
1. Check whether the battery of the other vehi‐
The LED in the area of the SOS button lights up cle has a voltage of 12 volts. The voltage in‐
for approximately 30 seconds. A Check Control formation can be found on the battery.
message is displayed.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehicle.
Have it checked by a dealer's service center or
3. Switch off any electrical components in both
another qualified service center or repair shop.
vehicles.
Jump-starting Starting aid terminals

The starting aid terminal in the engine compart‐
ment acts as the positive battery terminal.
General information
A special connection on the body in the engine
If the battery is discharged, the engine can be
compartment acts as the negative battery termi‐
started using the battery of another vehicle and
nal.
two jumper cables. Only use jumper cables with
fully insulated clamp handles. Additional information:
Overview of engine compartment, refer to
page 299.
Open the cover of the positive battery terminal.
318
Connecting the cables Tow-starting and towing

Before you begin, switch off all unnecessary
electronic systems/components, such as the
Safety information
radio, on the assisting and receiving vehicles.
1. Open the cover of the starting aid terminal.

Warning
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
jumper cable to the positive battery terminal,
or to the corresponding starting aid terminal
Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a
of the vehicle providing assistance.
3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end of systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.
the cable to the positive battery terminal, or
to the corresponding starting aid terminal of
the vehicle to be started. Steptronic transmission without
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative xDrive: transporting the vehicle
jumper cable to the negative battery terminal,
or to the corresponding engine or body General information
ground of assisting vehicle.
The vehicle must not be towed if the front
5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the neg‐ wheels are touching the ground.
ative battery terminal, or to the corresponding
engine or body ground of the vehicle to be Safety information
started.
NOTICE
Starting the engine
The vehicle can be damaged when towing the
Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
vehicle with a lifted rear axle. There is a risk of
1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and damage to property, among other potential
let it run for several minutes at an increased damage. Have vehicle transported only with
idle speed. lifted front axle or on a loading platform.
2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be
started in the usual way.
Pushing the vehicle
If the first starting attempt is not successful,
wait a few minutes before making another at‐ To remove a broken-down vehicle from the haz‐
tempt in order to allow the discharged battery ardous area, it can be pushed for a short dis‐
to recharge. tance.
3. Let both engines run for several minutes. For rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to
page 137.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse
order.
Check the battery and recharge, if needed.
319
Tow truck Tow truck
Your vehicle should be transported with a tow The vehicle should only be transported on a
truck with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed. loading platform.
NOTICE NOTICE
The vehicle can become damaged when lifting The vehicle can become damaged when lifting
and securing it. and securing it.
There is a risk of damage to property, among There is a risk of damage to property, among
other potential damage. other potential damage.
▷ Lift the vehicle using suitable means. ▷ Lift the vehicle using suitable means.
▷ Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow ▷ Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow
fitting, body parts, or suspension parts. fitting, body parts, or suspension parts.
Steptronic transmission with Towing other vehicles

xDrive: transporting the vehicle
General information
General information Switch on the hazard warning system, depend‐
The vehicle is not permitted to be towed. ing on local regulations.
If the electrical system has failed, clearly identify
Pushing the vehicle the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or a
To remove a broken-down vehicle from the haz‐ warning triangle in the rear window.
ardous area, it can be pushed for a short dis‐
tance. Safety information
For rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to
page 137. Warning
If the approved gross vehicle weight of the tow‐
ing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to be
towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it will not
be possible to control handling. There is a risk
of accident. Make sure that the gross vehicle
320
weight of the towing vehicle is heavier than the Tow fitting

vehicle to be towed.
General information
NOTICE
If the tow bar or tow rope is attached incor‐
rectly, damage to other vehicle parts can occur.
other potential damage. Correctly attach the
tow bar or tow rope to the tow fitting.
Tow bar
The screw-in tow fitting should always be carried
The tow fittings used should be on the same in the vehicle.
side on both vehicles.
The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front or
Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting the rear of the vehicle.
tow bar at an inclination, please follow the follow‐
The tow fitting is found in the onboard vehicle
ing:
tool kit.
▷ Free movement is limited going around cor‐
Observe the following notes when using the tow
ners.
fitting:
▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is
▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with the ve‐
secured with an inclination.
hicle.
Tow rope ▷ Turn the tow fitting at least 5 turns clockwise
and screw it in as far as it will go. If necessary,
Observe the following notes when using the tow
tighten with a suitable object.
rope:
▷ After use, unscrew the tow fitting counter-
▷ Use nylon ropes or straps, which will enable
clockwise.
the vehicle to be towed without jerking.
▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads
▷ Make sure the tow rope is not twisted when
only.
fastening.
▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, for in‐
▷ Check the attachment of the tow fitting and
stance do not lift the vehicle by the tow fit‐
tow rope in regular intervals.
ting.
▷ Do not exceed a towing speed of
▷ Check the attachment of the tow fitting in
30 mph/50 km/h.
regular intervals.
▷ Do not exceed a towing distance of
3 miles/5 km. Additional information:
▷ When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure Onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 311.
that the tow rope is taut.
321
Safety information
NOTICE
If the tow fitting is not used as intended, there
may be damage to the vehicle or to the tow fit‐
ting. There is a risk of damage to property,
among other potential damage. Follow the
notes on using the tow fitting.
Screw thread for tow fitting
Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to

push it out.
Tow-starting
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Start the engine by jump-starting, if possible.
Have the reasons for the starting difficulties cor‐
rected by a dealer’s service center or another
Jump-starting, refer to page 318.
322
Vehicle Care MOBILITY
Vehicle Care
Vehicle features and Distances and temperature
▷ Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃.
options
▷ Minimum distance from sensors, cameras,
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ seals: 12 inches/30 cm.
cific and optional features offered with the series. ▷ Minimum distance from glass sunroof:
It also describes features and functions that are 31.5 in/80 cm.
to the selected options or country versions. This Automatic washing systems or
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ car washes
Safety information
served.
NOTICE
Washing the vehicle Using a car wash with high pressure washers
may result in water penetration of window
General information areas. There is a risk of damage to property,
among other potential damage. Do not drive
Regularly remove foreign objects such as leaves
into high-pressure car wash systems.
in the area below the windshield when the hood
is raised.
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in win‐
NOTICE
ter. Intense contamination and road salt can
damage the vehicle. Improper use of automatic washing systems or
car washes can cause damage to the vehicle.
Steam cleaner and high pressure There is a risk of damage to property, among
other potential damage. Follow the following in‐
cleaner
structions:
Safety information ▷ Give preference to cloth car washes or

those that use soft brushes in order to
avoid paint damage.
NOTICE
▷ Do not drive through a car wash with
When cleaning with high pressure cleaners, guide rails higher than 4 in/10 cm to avoid
components can be damaged due to the pres‐ damage to the body.
sure or temperatures being too high. There is a
▷ Observe the tire width of the guide rail to
risk of damage to property, among other poten‐
avoid damage to tires and rims.
tial damage. Maintain sufficient distance and do
not spray too long continuously. Follow the op‐
erating instructions for the high pressure clean‐
ers.
323
MOBILITY Vehicle Care
▷ Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid damage to Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an ice
the exterior mirrors. scraper.
▷ Deactivate the wiper and, if necessary, rain
sensor to avoid damage to the window After washing the vehicle
wiper system. After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking effect can
be reduced. The heat generated during braking
Driving into a car wash with a
dries brake discs and brake pads and protects
them against corrosion.
Safety information Completely remove all residues on the windows,
to minimize loss of visibility due to smearing and
to reduce wiper noises and wiper blade wear.
NOTICE
Selector lever position P is automatically en‐
gaged when standby state is switched off. Vehicle care
other potential damage. Do not switch standby Vehicle care products
state off in car washes.
General information
General information BMW recommends using vehicle care and
In a car wash, the vehicle must be able to roll cleaning products from BMW. Suitable vehicle
freely. care products are available from a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
Some car washes do not permit persons in the
repair shop.
vehicle. The vehicle cannot be locked from the
outside when in selector lever position N. A sig‐
Safety information
nal sounds when an attempt is made to lock the
vehicle.
Additional information: Warning
Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to page 137. Cleansers can contain substances that are dan‐
gerous and harmful to your health. There is a
Driving out of a car wash risk of injury. When cleaning the interior, open
the doors or windows. Only use products in‐
Ensure that the vehicle key is in the car.
tended for cleaning vehicles. Follow the in‐
Turn on drive readiness. structions on the container.
Drive-ready state, refer to page 41.
Vehicle paintwork
Headlights General information
Do not rub wet headlights dry and do not use
Regular vehicle care contributes to driving safety
abrasive or acidic cleaning agents.
and value retention. Environmental influences in
Soak areas that have been dirtied, for instance areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐
from insects, with auto shampoo and wash off taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can affect
with water.
324
the vehicle paintwork. Tailor the frequency and Safety information

extent of your vehicle care to these influences.
Corrosive substances such as spilled fuel, oil, NOTICE
grease or bird droppings, must be removed im‐
mediately to prevent the finish from being altered Open hook and loop fasteners on articles of
or discolored. clothing can damage the seat covers and other
cloth upholstery in the vehicle. There is a risk of
Matte paintwork
damage. Ensure that any Velcro® fasteners are
Only use cleaning and care products suitable for closed.
vehicles with matte paintwork.
Leather care Caring for special components

Remove dust from the leather regularly, using a
cloth or vacuum cleaner. Light-alloy wheels
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime chafe When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral rim
in pores and folds, and lead to heavy wear and cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9. Do not
premature degradation of the leather surface. use abrasive cleaning agents or steam cleaners
above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufacturer's
To guard against discoloration, such as from
instructions.
clothing, clean leather and provide leather care
roughly every two months. Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents can
destroy the protective coating of adjacent com‐
Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐
ponents, such as the brake disc.
cause contamination on such surfaces is sub‐
stantially more visible. After cleaning, apply the brakes shortly to dry
them. The heat generated during braking dries
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and
brake discs and brake pads and protects them
grease will gradually break down the protective
against corrosion.
coating of the leather surface.
Chrome surfaces
Upholstery material care
Carefully clean Chrome surfaces, especially in
General information case of exposure to road salt, with plenty of wa‐
ter and added auto shampoo as needed.
Vacuum the upholstery regularly with a vacuum
cleaner.
Rubber components
If upholstery is very contaminated, for instance
Environmental influences can cause surface con‐
with beverage stains, use a soft sponge or micro‐
tamination of rubber parts and a loss of gloss.
fiber cloth with a suitable interior cleaner.
Use only water and suitable cleaning agents for
Clean the upholstery down to the seams using cleaning.
large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the ma‐
Treat especially worn rubber parts with rubber
terial vigorously.
care products at regular intervals. When cleaning
rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing
vehicle care products in order to avoid damage
or noises.
325
MOBILITY Vehicle Care
Fine wood parts Carpets and floor mats

Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐
nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a soft Warning
cloth.
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit the
pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
Kenaf There is a risk of accident. Stow objects in the
Only treat parts made of Kenaf fibers using suita‐ vehicle such that they are secured and cannot
ble care products. enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor mats
that are suitable for the vehicle and can be
Plastic components safely attached to the floor. Do not use loose
floor mats and do not layer several floor mats.
Make sure that there is sufficient clearance for
NOTICE
the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are se‐
Cleaning agents that contain alcohol or sol‐ curely fastened again after they were removed,
vents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty for instance for cleaning.
grease removers, fuel and such, can damage
plastic parts. There is a risk of damage to prop‐ The floor mats can be removed from the car's in‐
erty, among other potential damage. Clean with terior for cleaning.
a microfiber cloth. Dampen the cloth lightly with
If the floor carpets are very contaminated, clean
water, if needed.
with a microfiber cloth and water or a textile
cleaner. To prevent matting of the carpet, rub
Clean with a microfiber cloth.
back and forth in the driving direction only.
Dampen the cloth lightly with water, if needed.
Do not soak the headliner. Sensors and camera lenses
To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a cloth
Safety belts moistened with a small amount of glass deter‐
gent.
Warning
Chemical cleansers can destroy the safety belt
Displays, screens, and protective
webbing. Missing protective effect of the safety glass of the Head-up Display
belts. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.
Use only a mild soapy solution for cleaning the NOTICE
safety belts.
Chemical cleaning agents, moisture or fluids of
any kind can damage the surface of displays
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
and screens. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
thus have a negative impact on safety.
erty, among other potential damage. Clean with
Use only a mild soapy solution for cleaning the a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.
installed belt straps.
Safety belts should only be allowed to retract if
they are dry.
326
NOTICE
The surface of displays can be damaged with
improper cleaning. There is a risk of damage to
property, among other potential damage. Avoid
pressure that is too high and do not use any
scratching materials.
Use a dry, clean antistatic microfiber cloth.

Clean the protective glass of the Head-up Dis‐
play using a microfiber cloth and commercially
available dish-washing soap.
Taking the vehicle out of service

When the vehicle is shut down for longer than
three months, special measures must be taken.
Further information is available from a dealer's
or repair shop.
327
REFERENCE Technical data
Technical data
General information
The technical data and specifications in the uring procedure. Detailed values can be found in
Owner's Manual are used as guidance values. the approval documents, on labels on the vehicle
The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this, or can be obtained from a dealer’s service center
for instance due to the selected optional equip‐ or another qualified service center or repair shop.
ment, country version or country-specific meas‐
Dimensions
The dimensions can vary depending on the The height of the vehicle can also differ, e.g. due
model version, equipment version or country- to tires and vehicle load.
specific measurement procedure.
BMW 2er Gran Coupé
Width with mirrors in/mm 81.9/2,081
Width without mirrors in/mm 70.9/1,800
Height in/mm 55.9/1,420
Length in/mm 178.5/4,534
Wheelbase in/mm 105.1/2,670
Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 37.4/11.4
328
Technical data REFERENCE
Weights
228i
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,420/2,005
Payload lbs/kg 950/431
Approved front axle weight lbs/kg 2,414/1,095
Approved rear axle weight lbs/kg 2,194/995
228i xDrive
Payload lbs/kg 955/433
Approved rear axle weight lbs/kg 2,304/1,045
M235i xDrive powered by BMW M
Payload lbs/kg 1,003/455
Approved rear axle weight lbs/kg 2,337/1,060
Capacities
BMW 2er Gran Coupé
Fuel tank, approx. US gal/liters 13.2/50.0
Observe further information on fuel quality, refer

to page 302.
329
REFERENCE Appendix
Appendix
General information
Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the vehi‐
cle are listed here.
Updates made after the

editorial deadline
The following chapters were updated in the
printed version of the Owner's Manual after the
editorial deadline for the Integrated Owner's
Manual in the vehicle had closed:
▷ Opening and closing: BMW Digital Key: gen‐
eral.
330
Appendix REFERENCE
331
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
Everything from A to Z
Index
A Android Auto preparation, connection to the ve‐
hicle 77
ABS Antilock Braking System 190 Android Auto preparation, smartphone integra‐
Acceleration Assistant, see Launch Control 140 tion 77
Accessories and parts 8 Antifreeze, see Washer fluid 307
ACC, see Active Cruise Control 198 Antilock Braking System ABS 190
Activated charcoal filter 232 Anti-slip control, see DSC 190
Active Blind Spot Detection 184 Anti-theft protection, lug bolt lock 295
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function Apple CarPlay preparation, connection to the ve‐
ACC 198 hicle 77
Active Guard Plus, see Intelligent Safety 174 Apple CarPlay preparation, smartphone integra‐
Active Guard, see Intelligent Safety 174 tion 77
Active PDC, see Emergency brake function 209 Approach control warning with City braking func‐
Adaptive brake assistant 190 tion 175
Adaptive chassis 223 Approach control warning with light braking func‐
Adaptive Light Control 165 tion 175
Adding engine oil types 305 Apps, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, En‐
Adding oil 304 tertainment, Communication 6
Additives, engine oil types 305 Aquaplaning 257
Adjusting contents, iDrive 48 Ashtray 241
Adjusting engine sound 223 Assistance when driving off, see Drive-off assis‐
Adjusting sound of the engine 223 tant 190
Adjustments, steering wheel 115 Assistance with breakdown 315
Airbags 170 Audio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En‐
Airbags, indicator and warning light 172 tertainment and Communication 6
Air circulation, see Recirculated-air AUTO H button, see Parking brake 129
mode 226, 231 Automatic activation, see Climate control
air conditioning, climate 229 rules 117
Air distribution, manual 227, 231 Automatic car wash 323
Air drying, see air conditioning 229 Automatic climate control 224, 228
Air flow, automatic climate control 227, 231 Automatic control, headlight 163
Air outlets, see Ventilation 232 Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior mirror 114
Air pressure, tires 270 Automatic deactivation, front-seat passenger air‐
Air quality 224 bags 173
Alarm system 100 Automatic headlight control 163
Alarm, unintentional 101 Automatic High Beam Assistant 166
All-season tires, see Winter tires 278 Automatic Hold, see Parking brake 129
All-wheel-drive, see xDrive 192 Automatic locking 99
Ambient light 169 Automatic Parking Assistant 214
Android Auto, connection to the vehicle 77 Automatic Recirculating Air Control 230
332
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
Automatic time setting 62 Brake system 256

Automatic transmission, see Steptronic trans‐ Braking, information 258
mission 135 Breakdown assistance 315
Automatic unlocking 99 Breaking in 256
Automating routines, BMW Intelligent Personal Break recommendation, see Fatigue alert 188
Assistant 54 Brightness, Control Display 64
AUTO program, automatic climate con‐ Button, central locking system 91
trol 226, 230 Buttons on the steering wheel 32
AUTO program, intensity 230 Button, SOS, see Intelligent emergency call 317
Auto Start/Stop function 124 Button, Start/Stop 124
Average consumption, see Trip data 158 Bypassing, see Jump-starting 318
Axle loads, approved 329
C
B
Cable for tow-starting/towing 321
Backrest curvature, see Lumbar support 108 Calendar day, see Date 62
Backrest, seats 106 California Proposition 65 Warning 8
Backrest tilt 107 Call, gesture control 56
Backrest, width 108 Camera-based assistance systems, see Intelli‐
Bandages, see First-aid kit 315 gent Safety 174
Bar for tow-starting/towing 321 Camera lenses, care 326
Battery, disposing of 313 Camera, rearview camera 211
Battery, vehicle 312 Cameras, see Sensors of the vehicle 37
Being towed, see Tow-starting and towing 319 CANCEL button, Active Cruise Control 198
Belts, see Safety belts 108 CANCEL button, cruise control 196
Blind spot collision warning 184 Can holder, front, see Cup holder, front 248
Blocking, power window, see Safety switch 103 Can holder, rear, see Cup holder, rear 248
Bluetooth connection 74 Care 323
Blu-ray, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Care, Head-up Display 326
Entertainment, Communication 6 Care, light-alloy wheels 325
BMW Accident Assistance 316 Care of displays, screens 326
BMW Assist, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Care, vehicle 324
Entertainment and Communication 6 Cargo 250
BMW Digital Key 86 Cargo area 250
BMW Gesture Control 55 Cargo area, enlarging 252
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant 51 Cargo, stowing and securing 251
BMW maintenance system 309 Cargo straps, see Lashing eyes in the cargo
BMW Roadside Assistance 316 area 251
Bonus range, ECO PRO 264 Caring Car, BMW Intelligent Personal Assis‐
Bottle holder, front, see Cup holder, front 248 tant 54
Bottle holder, rear, see Cup holder, rear 248 Car key, see Vehicle key 80
Brake assistant 190 Carpet, care 326
Brake assistant, adaptive 190 CarPlay, connection to the vehicle 77
Brake discs, see Brake system 256 Car seats, see Transporting children safely 118
Brake-in 256 Car wash 323
Brake pads, see Brake system 256 Car wash, automatic 323
333
Catalytic converter, see Hot exhaust gas sys‐ Closing with the smartphone, see BMW Digital
tem 257 Key 86
CBS Condition Based Service 309 Clothes hooks 249
Cell phone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Coasting 265
Entertainment and Communication 6 Coasting with engine decoupled, see Coast‐
Center armrest, front 247 ing 265
Center console 34 Coasting with idling engine 265
Central Information Display (CID), see Control Combination switch, see Turn signals 132
Display 46 Combination switch, see Washer/wiper sys‐
Central locking switch, see Central locking sys‐ tem 133
tem 91 Comfort Access 91
Central locking system 91 COMFORT, see Driving Dynamics Control 127
Central screen, see Control Display 46 Communication, see Owner's Manual for Naviga‐
Changes, technical, see For Your Own Safety 8 tion, Entertainment and Communication 6
Change, wheels and tires 277 Compact wheel, see Emergency wheel 297
Changing parts 311 Comparison of entries, see Entry comparison 44
Changing wheels 293 Compartments in the doors 247
Charging smartphone, see Wireless charging Compass 146
tray 243 Compatible devices, see Suitable devices 72
Charging tray for smartphones, see Wireless Compressor 280
charging tray 243 Concierge Service, see Owner's Handbook for
Chassis number, see Vehicle identification num‐ Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
ber 12 Condensation water under the parked vehi‐
Check Control 146 cle 259
Checking the engine oil level electronically 304 Condensation, windshield 227, 232
Children, seating position 118 Condition Based Service CBS 309
Children, transporting safely 118 Confirmation signal from the vehicle 99
Child restraint systems, mounting 119 Connect device 71
Child restraint systems, see Transporting chil‐ ConnectedDrive, see Owner's Manual for Navi‐
dren safely 118 gation, Entertainment and Communication 6
Child safety locks 123 Connecting electrical devices, see Sockets 242
Child seat, mounting 119 Connecting, mobile devices 71
Child seat mountings LATCH 120 Connections, Screen Mirroring 76
Child seats, see Transporting children Consumption display, ECO PRO 264
safely 118 Consumption display, widget in the instrument
Chrome-plated surfaces, care 325 cluster 144, 145
Chrome surfaces, care 325 Consumption, see Current consump‐
Cigarette lighter 241 tion 144, 145
Cigarette lighter, front 242 Consumption, see Trip data 158
Cleaning displays, screens 326 Contacts, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation,
Cleaning, Head-up Display 326 Entertainment, Communication 6
Clearance, water 258 Container for washer fluid 307
Climate control 224 Continued driving with a flat tire 289, 293
Climate control rules 117 Control Display 46
Closing with the Key Card 85 Control Display, brightness 64
Control display, pop-ups 64
334
Controller 47 Departure time, pre-conditioning 236

Control systems, driving stability 190 Departure time, pre-ventilation 234
Convenient closing, vehicle key 82 Destination distance, trip computer 145
Convenient opening, vehicle key 81 Destination input 6
Coolant 306 Device list 72
Coolant level 307 Diagnosis connection 310
Coolant temperature, see Engine tempera‐ Digital Key 86
ture 153 Digital Key, see BMW Digital Key 86
Cooling, maximum 226, 229 Dimensions 328
Cooling system 306 Dimmable exterior mirrors 114
Cornering light 166 Dimmable interior mirror 115
Corrosion on brake discs 259 Direct dial buttons, see Programmable memory
Cosmetic mirror 241 buttons 45
Cross traffic warning 221 Direction indicator, see Turn signals 132
Cruise control 196 Display, iDrive 43
Cruise control, active with Stop&Go func‐ Display in the windshield, see Head-up Dis‐
tion 198 play 160
Cruise control, see Active Cruise Control 198 Display lighting, see Instrument lighting 168
Cruise control with distance control, see Active Display, notifications, BMW Intelligent Personal
Cruise Control with Stop&Go function 198 Assistant 65
Cruise control without distance control, see Display panel, see Instrument cluster 142
Cruise control 196 Displays 142
Cruising range 154 Displays and symbols 7
Cup holder, front 248 Displays, ECO PRO 262
Cup holder, rear 248 Display speed limit, see Speed Limit Info 155
Current consumption 144, 145 Disposal, coolant 307
Customer service, see Owner's Manual for Navi‐ Disposal, vehicle battery 313
gation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Distance control, see PDC 207
Distance to destination, trip computer 145
D Door handle lighting, see Welcome lights 165
Drive-off assistant 190
Damage, tires 276 Drive-off assistant, see DSC 190
Dashboard 32 Drive power reduced, see Heavily discharged
Dashboard, see Instrument cluster 142 high-voltage battery 152
Data memory 10 Driver assistance, driving, see Intelligent
Data protection, settings 66 Safety 174
Data, see Deleting personal data 66 Driver assistance, parking, see Parking assis‐
Data, technical 328 tance systems 206
Date 62 Driver assistance, see Intelligent Safety 174
Daytime driving lights 165 Driver assistance systems 194
Daytime running lights 165 Drive readiness, see Operating condition of the
DCC, see Cruise control 196 vehicle 40
Defrosting, see Defrosting windshield 227, 232 Drive-ready state, engine start 41
Defrosting, windshield 227, 232 Driver profiles 67
Deleting personal data 66 Driver profile, setup 67
Departure schedule, see Pre-ventilation 233 Driver profiles, welcome screen 67
335
Driving 124 Emergency unlocking, transmission lock 139

Driving Assistant, see Intelligent Safety 174 Emergency unlocking, trunk lid 97
Driving comfort 223 Emergency wheel 297
Driving Dynamics Control 127 Energy recovery 144, 145
Driving instructions, breaking in 256 Energy savings, see Gear shift indicator 155
Driving mode, ECO PRO 262 Engine, automatic Start/Stop function 124
Driving mode, see Driving Dynamics Con‐ Engine compartment 299
trol 127 Engine coolant 306
Driving notes, general 257 Engine idling when driving, see Coasting 265
Driving out of parking space 218 Engine oil, adding 304
Driving stability control systems 190 Engine oil change 306
Driving, Start/Stop button 124 Engine oil filler neck 304
Driving style analysis, ECO PRO 266 Engine oil temperature 153
Driving through water 258 Engine oil types to add 305
Driving tips 257 Engine start, see Drive-ready state 41
DSC Dynamic Stability Control 190 Engine start, see Jump-starting 318
DTC Dynamic Traction Control 192 Engine stopping, see Drive-ready state 41
Dynamic damping, see Adaptive chassis 223 Engine temperature 153
Dynamic Stability Control 190 Entering a destination, see Owner's Handbook
Dynamic Stability Control DSC 190 for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐
Dynamic Traction Control DTC 192 tion 6
Entering an address, navigation, see Owner's
E Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Com‐
munication 6
ECO PRO 262 Entertainment, see Owner's Manual for Naviga‐
ECO PRO, bonus range 264 tion, Entertainment and Communication 6
ECO PRO, driving style analysis 266 Entertainment, selection list in the instrument
ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL, see Driving Dynamics cluster 157
Control 127 Entry comparison 44
ECO PRO, see Driving Dynamics Control 127 Equipment, interior 238
Efficiency display, widget in the instrument clus‐ Error indicators, see Check Control 146
ter 144, 145 ESP Electronic Stability Program, see DSC 190
Efficient4x4, see xDrive 192 Exchange, wheels and tires 277
Electronic oil measurement 304 Exhaust gas system 257
Electronic Stability Program ESP, see DSC 190 Exhaustion warner 188
E-mail, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Exhaust, see Exhaust gas system 257
Entertainment, Communication 6 Exterior lighting during unlocking 81
Emergency brake function when parking, Active Exterior lighting with the vehicle locked 82
PDC 209 Exterior mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor 114
Emergency braking, see PostCrash - iBrake 188 Exterior mirror, automatic dimming feature 114
Emergency call 317 Exterior mirrors 113
Emergency service, see BMW Accident Assis‐ Exterior mirrors, malfunction 114
tance 316 External start, see Jump-starting 318
Emergency service, see BMW Roadside Assis‐ Eyelet for towing 321
tance 316 Eyes, see Lashing eyes in the cargo area 251
Emergency unlocking, fuel filler flap 269
336
F Front-seat passenger airbags, indicator light 173

Front seats 106
Factory settings, see reset vehicle data 64 Fuel 302
Failure message, see Check Control 146 Fuel cap 268
Fan, see Air flow 227, 231 Fuel filler flap 268
Fastening safety belts, see Safety belts 108 Fuel filler flap, unlocking manually 269
Fatigue alert 188 Fuel gauge 151
Fault indicators, see Check Control 146 Fuel quality 302
Filler neck for engine oil 304 Fuel recommendation 302
Filter, see Interior filter 224 Fuel tank, see Filling capacity 329
Filter, see Microfilter 228 Fuses 313
Fine wood parts, care 326
First-aid kit 315 G
First Steps, see Setup Wizard 67
Flat tire, changing wheels 293 Garage door opener, see Integrated Universal
Flat tire, continued driving 289, 293 Remote Control 238
Flat tire, Flat Tire Monitor TPM 291 Gasoline 302
Flat tire message, FTM 292 Gasoline quality 303
Flat tire message, Tire Pressure Monitor 287 Gear change, Steptronic transmission 135
Flat Tire Monitor TPM 291 Gear shift indicator 155
Flat tire, repairing 279 General driving notes 257
Flat tire, see Tire Pressure Monitor 284 General settings 62
Flat tire warning light, FTM 292 Gesture Control 55
Flat tire warning light, see Tire Pressure Moni‐ Gestures, see BMW Gesture Control 55
tor 287 Glare shield, see Sun visor 241
Flooding, driving through 258 Glass sunroof, electric 103
Floor carpet, care 326 Glass sunroof, initialize the system 105
Floor mats, care 326 Glopal Positioning System, navigation 6
Fold-away position, wiper 135 Glove compartment 246
Foot brake 258 G-meter, widget in the instrument cluster 144
Forward collision mitigation, see Intelligent GPS, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for
Safety 174 Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
For Your Own Safety 8 Gross vehicle weight, approved 329
Front airbags 170
Front collision mitigation 175 H
Front collision mitigation, see Forward Collision
Warning 175 Handbrake, see Parking brake 129
Front collision mitigation, see Pedestrian Warn‐ Hand-held transmitter, alternating code 239
ing 178 Hands-free device, see Owner's Handbook for
Front fog lights 168 Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Front fog lights, replacing, see Lights and Hazard warning system 315
bulbs 312 Head airbag 171
Front lights, replacing, see Lights and bulbs 312 Headlight control, automatic 163
Front passenger airbags 173 Headlight flasher 132
Front passenger airbags, automatic deactiva‐ Headlight glass 312
tion 173 Headlights, care 324
337
Headlights, replacing, see Lights and bulbs 312 Inductive charging, smartphone, see Wireless
Head restraints and seats 106 charging tray 243
Head restraints, front 110 Inflation pressure, tires 270
Head restraints, rear 112 Inflation pressure warning TPM, tires 291
Head-up Display 160 Information 6
Head-up Display, care 326 Initialization, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 291
Head-up Display, store position, see Memory Input, iDrive 43
function 116 Instrument cluster 142
Heated steering wheel 115 Instrument lighting 168
Heated steering wheel, climate control rules 117 Instrument panel, see Instrument cluster 142
Heavy cargo, stowing 251 Integrated key 89
Height, vehicle 328 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle 14
High-beam Assistant 166 Integrated Universal Remote Control 238
High beams 132 Intelligent emergency call 317
High beams/low beams, see High-beam Assis‐ Intelligent Personal Assistant 51
tant 166 Intelligent Safety 174
Hills 258 Intended use 8
Hill start assistant, see Drive-off assistant 190 Intensity, AUTO program 230
Holder for beverages, front 248 Interior equipment 238
Holder for beverages, rear 248 Interior filter 224
HomeLink, see Integrated Universal Remote Interior lights 168
Control 238 Interior lights during unlocking 81
Homepage, see Internet 6 Interior lights with the vehicle locked 82
Hood 300 Interior mirror, automatic dimming feature 115
Horn 32 Interior mirrors 114, 115
Hotel function, see Valet parking mode 97 Interior motion sensor 101
Hot exhaust gas system 257 Internet hotspot 75
Hour, see Time 62 Internet page 6
Humidity in the headlight, see Headlight Interval indicator, see Service notifications 154
glass 312
J
I
Jacking points for the vehicle jack 296
iBrake - PostCrash 188 Jam protection system, glass sunroof 104
Ice, see Outside temperature 154 Jam protection system, windows 102
Ice warning, see Outside temperature 154 Joystick, Steptronic transmission 135
Identification marks, tires 274 Jump-starting 318
Identification number, see Vehicle identification Jump-starting terminals 318
number 12
iDrive 43 K
ID transmitter, see Vehicle key 80
Ignition key, see Vehicle key 80 Kenaf, care 326
Indicator light, front-seat passenger airbags 173 Key Card 85
Indicator lights 147 Keyless Go, see Comfort Access 91
Individual air distribution 227, 231 Key, mechanical 89
Individual settings, see Driver profiles 67 Key, see Vehicle key 80
338
Kickdown, Steptronic transmission 135 Low beams, automatic, see High-beam Assis‐
Knee airbag 171 tant 166
Low beams, operation 164
L Lower back support, see Lumbar support 108
Lug bolt lock 295
Label on recommended tires 277 Luggage rack, see Roof-mounted luggage
Lane departure warning 181 rack 259
Lane threshold, warning 181 Lumbar support 108
Language, setting 63
Lashing eyes in the cargo area 251 M
LATCH child seat mountings 120
Launch Control 140 Maintenance 309
Leather care 325 Maintenance recommendations 309
LED front fog lights, replacing, see Lights and Maintenance recommendations, see Condition
bulbs 312 Based Service CBS 309
LED headlights, replacing, see Lights and Maintenance, see Service notifications 154
bulbs 312 Maintenance system, BMW 309
Length, vehicle 328 Make-up mirror 241
Letters and numbers, entering 44 Malfunction, vehicle key 84
Light-alloy wheels, care 325 Managing devices 72
Light control, adaptive 165 Manual brake, see Parking brake 129
Lighter, cigarettes 241 Manual control, air distribution 227, 231
Lighting 163 Manual control, air flow 227, 231
Light in the exterior mirror, see Active Blind Spot Manual mode, Steptronic transmission 135
Detection 184 Manual operation, fuel filler flap 269
Light in the exterior mirror, see Cross traffic Manual Speed Limiter 194
warning 221 Map update, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐
Light replacement, see Lights and bulbs 312 tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
Lights 163 Marking, run-flat tire 278
Lights and bulbs 312 Matt paint, care 325
Light switch 163 Maximum cooling 226, 229
LIM button, see Manual Speed Limiter 194 Maximum speed, display, see Speed Limit
List, instrument cluster, see Selection lists 157 Info 155
List of all messages 64 Maximum speed, winter tires 278
List of all notifications 64 Media of the Owner's Manual 14
Load 251 Medical supplies, see First-aid kit 315
Loading 250 Memory function 116
Loading the cargo area, see Stowing cargo 251 Menu, instrument cluster, see Selection
Local time, see Time 62 lists 157
Locking, automatic 99 Menus, operating, iDrive 43
Locking, see Opening and Closing 80 Messages 64
Locking, settings 98 Messages, see Check Control 146
Locking the trunk lid, see Valet parking mode 97 Meters, see Instrument cluster 142
Locking, vehicle key 81 Microfilter 228, 232
Lock, lug bolts 295 Minimum tread depth, tires 276
339
Mobile communication devices in the vehi‐ Oil change 306

cle 257 Oil filler neck 304
Mobile devices, managing 72 Oil level, checking electronically 304
Mobile phone, connecting 71 Oil service interval, see Service notifications 154
Mobile phone, see Owner's Manual for Naviga‐ Oil types to add, engine 305
tion, Entertainment and Communication 6 Old battery 313
Mobile Service, see BMW Accident Assis‐ Onboard literature, printed 14
tance 316 Onboard vehicle tool kit 311
Mobile Service, see BMW Roadside Assis‐ On-call service, see BMW Accident Assis‐
tance 316 tance 316
Mobility System, see Tire repair set 279 On-call service, see BMW Roadside Assis‐
MODE button, see Active Cruise Control 198 tance 316
Mode, ECO PRO 262 Opening and closing 80
Modifications, technical, see For Your Own Opening the trunk lid with no-touch activa‐
Safety 8 tion 93
Monitor, see Control Display 46 Opening with the Key Card 85
Mounting of child restraint systems 119 Opening with the smartphone, see BMW Digital
MP3 player, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Key 86
Entertainment, Communication 6 Operating concept, iDrive 43
M sports steering 193 Operating condition of the vehicle 40
Multifunction hook 251 Operation via voice 51
Multifunction steering wheel, buttons 32 Optional equipment, see Vehicle equipment 7
Multimedia, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Outside air, see Automatic Recirculating Air Con‐
Entertainment and Communication 6 trol 230
Outside temperature 154
N Overheating of the engine, see Engine tempera‐
ture 153
Navigation data, trip computer 145 Overwintering, see Long-term vehicle stor‐
Navigation, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, age 327
Entertainment and Communication 6 Owner's Manual, printed 14
Neck restraints, front, see Head restraints Owner's Manual via voice operation, BMW Intelli‐
front 110 gent Personal Assistant 53
Neck restraints, rear, see Head restraints
rear 112 P
Neutral cleaner, see Light-alloy wheels, care 325
Notifications 64 Paint, car care 324
Nylon rope for tow-starting/towing 321 Pair device 71
Pairing, mobile devices, see Connections 71
O Panic alarm, see Panic mode 100
Panic mode 100
OBD Onboard Diagnosis 310 Panoramic glass sunroof, see Glass sunroof 103
OBD, see OBD Onboard Diagnosis 310 Park Distance Control PDC 207
Obstacle marking, rearview camera 212 Parking aid, see PDC 207
Octane number, see Gasoline quality 303 Parking assistance systems 206
Odometer, see Trip data 158 Parking assistant 214
Oil, adding 304
340
Parking Assistant, driving out of parking Push-and-turn reel, see Controller 47

space 218
Parking Assistant for driving out of parking R
space 218
Parking Assistant, see Automatic Parking Assis‐ Racing track 260
tant 214 Radar sensors, see Sensors of the vehicle 37
Parking, Automatic Hold, see Parking brake 129 Radiator fluid 306
Parking brake 129 Radio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En‐
Parking lights 164 tertainment and Communication 6
Parts and accessories 8 Rain sensor 133
Passenger's side exterior mirror, tilt down, see Rear-end collision preparation 187
Automatic Curb Monitor 114 Rear-end collision warning, see Rear-end colli‐
Pathway lighting 165 sion preparation 187
Pathway lighting, switching on 83 Rear lights, replacing, see Lights and bulbs 312
Pathway lines, rearview camera 212 Rear seat backrests, folding down 252
Payload, technical data 329 Rearview camera 211
PDC Park Distance Control 207 Rear-view mirrors, exterior 113
Pedestrian Warning with braking function 178 Rear-view mirrors, interior 114, 115
Performance Control 223 Rear window defroster 227, 232
Personal Assistant 51 Recirculated-air filter, see Microfilter/activated-
Personal data, deleting 66 charcoal filter 232
Personal profile, see Driver profiles 67 Recirculated-air mode 226, 231
Personal settings 66 Recommended tire brands 277
Phone, connecting 71 Reduced drive power, see Heavily discharged
Physical units, see Set units of measurement 63 high-voltage battery 152
Plastic parts, care 326 Refueling 268
Pop-ups, control display 64 Remote control for audio, see Owner's Hand‐
Possible gestures, gesture control 56 book for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi‐
PostCrash - iBrake 188 cation 6
Power Display, instrument cluster 151 Remote control, see Vehicle key 80
Power failure 313 Remote control, universal 238
Power gauge, see Sport displays 159 Remote Engine Start, see Stationary climate
Power Meter, see Power Display 151 control 235
Power windows 102 Remote services, app, see Owner's Handbook
Pre-conditioning 235 for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐
Pressure test tire, see Tire Pressure Moni‐ tion 6
tor 284 Remote Software Upgrade 58
Pressure, tires 270 Renewal, wheels and tires 277
Pre-ventilation 233 Replacement, wheels and tires 277
Printed onboard literature 14 Replacing bulbs, see Lights and bulbs 312
Profiles, see Driver profiles 67 Replacing light diodes, see Lights and bulbs 312
Programmable memory buttons, iDrive 45 Replacing parts 311
Protective function, glass sunroof, see Jam pro‐ Replacing the battery, vehicle key 83
tection system 104 Reporting safety malfunctions 13
Protective function, windows, see Jam protec‐ RES CNCL button, Active Cruise Control
tion system 102 ACC 198
341
RES CNCL button, cruise control 196 Seats and head restraints 106
Reserve warning, see Range 154 Seats, front 106
Reset settings, vehicle 64 Securing, cargo 251
Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor 286 Selection list in the instrument cluster 157
Reset, vehicle data 64 Selector lever, Steptronic transmission 135
Reset, vehicle settings 64 Self-supporting tires, see Run-flat tires 278
Restricted Driving, see BMW Digital Key 86 Sensors, care 326
RESUME button, Active Cruise Control 198 Sensors of the vehicle 37
RESUME button, cruise control 196 Service and warranty 9
Retreaded tires 278 Service Center, see BMW Accident Assis‐
Reversing Assistant 219 tance 316
Roadside parking lights 164 Service Center, see BMW Roadside Assis‐
Rolling code hand-held transmitter 239 tance 316
RON, gasoline quality 303 Service notifications 154
Roofliner 35 Service notifications, see Condition Based Serv‐
Roof-mounted luggage rack 259 ice CBS 309
Rope for tow-starting/towing 321 Services, ConnectedDrive, see Owner's Manual
Route, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for for Navigation, Entertainment and Communica‐
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 tion 6
RSC Runflat System, see Runflat tire 278 SET button, Active Cruise Control 198
RTTI, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, En‐ SET button, cruise control 196
tertainment, Communication 6 Set clock 62
Rubber components, care 325 Set day, see Date 62
Run-flat tire 278 Set speed, see Active Cruise Control with
Stop&Go function 198
S Set system language, see Language 63
Set time, see Time 62
Safe braking 258 Setting, Control Display 64
Safe Share function, see BMW Digital Key 86 Settings, general 62
Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and front Settings, locking/unlocking 98
passenger seat 110 Settings, seats and head restraints 106
Safety belt reminder for the rear seats 110 Setup Wizard 67
Safety belts 108 Shift lights 152
Safety belts, care 326 Shift paddles on the steering wheel 135
Safety locks, doors, and windows 123 Shift point indicator, tachometer 152
Safety switch, windows 103 Side airbag 170
Safety systems, see Airbags 170 Side parking aid without Surround View 210
Safety systems, see Intelligent Safety 174 Side protection aid without Surround View, see
Saving fuel 261 Side parking aid 210
Screen Mirroring, connection 76 Signaling, horn 32
Screen, see Control Display 46 Signals when unlocking, see Confirmation sig‐
Screwdriver, see Onboard vehicle tool kit 311 nals from the vehicle 99
Sealing compound, see Tire repair set 279 Sitting safely 106
Seat heating 117 Sleep mode, see Operating condition of the ve‐
Seat heating, climate control rules 117 hicle 40
Seating position for children 118 Slide/tilt glass roof, see Glass sunroof 103
342
Slipperiness, see Outside temperature 154 Starting the engine, see Drive-ready state 41
Slippery road, see Outside temperature 154 Starting the engine with the Key Card 85
Smallest turning circle, vehicle 328 Stationary climate control via Remote Engine
Smartphone, connecting 71 Start 235
Smartphone Integration, Android Auto prepara‐ Stations, AM/FM, see Owner's Handbook for
tion 77 Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Smartphone Integration, Apple CarPlay prepara‐ Status control display, tires 286
tion 77 Status information, iDrive 44
Smartphone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Status of Owner's Manual 7
Entertainment and Communication 6 Status, vehicle 160
Smartphone, using via voice control 54 Steering column adjustment 115
Smoker's package 241 Steering wheel, adjusting 115
SMS, see Short messages, see Owner's Hand‐ Steering wheel, buttons 32
book for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi‐ Steering wheel heating 115
cation 6 Steering wheel heating, climate control
Socket for OBD Onboard Diagnosis 310 rules 117
Sockets, electrical devices 242 Steptronic Sport transmission, see Steptronic
Software Update, see Remote Software Up‐ transmission 135
grade 58 Steptronic Sport transmission with double
Software Upgrade, see Remote Software Up‐ clutch, see Steptronic transmission 135
grade 58 Steptronic transmission 135
SOS button, see Intelligent emergency call 317 Steptronic transmission with double clutch, see
Sound output, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐ Steptronic transmission 135
gation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Stopping the engine, see Drive-ready state 41
Spare tire, see Emergency wheel 297 Storage compartment, cargo area 252
Speech recognition 51 Storage compartment, center console 247
Speed Limit Assist 205 Storage compartments 246
Speed Limit Assistant 205 Storage compartments, locations 246
Speed Limit Device, Speed Limiter 194 Storage, tires 278
Speed limit display, see Speed Limit Info 155 Store Mirror position, see Memory function 116
Speed Limit Info 155 Store seat position, see Memory function 116
Speed warning 63 Store steering wheel position, see Memory func‐
Sport displays 159 tion 116
SPORT INDIVIDUAL, see Driving Dynamics Storing the vehicle 327
Control 127 Stowing, cargo 251
Sport program, Steptronic transmission 135 Straps for cargo, see Lashing eyes in the cargo
SPORT, see Driving Dynamics Control 127 area 251
Sports steering 193 Suitable devices 72
Stability control systems 190 Suitable mobile phones 72
Standard equipment, see Vehicle equipment 7 Summer tires, tread 276
Standby, see Operating condition of the vehi‐ Sun visor 241
cle 40 Supplementary Owner's Manuals 14
Start/stop, automatic function 124 Suspension settings, see Driving Dynamics Con‐
Start/Stop button 124 trol 127
Starting aid terminals 318 Switches, see Dashboard 32
Starting, see Drive-ready state 41
343
Switch for driving dynamics, see Driving Dynam‐ Tire pressure 270
ics Control 127 Tire Pressure Monitor 284
Symbols and displays 7 Tire Pressure Monitor, reset 286
SYNC program, automatic climate control 232 Tire repair set 279
System settings, see General settings 62 Tires and wheels 270
Tire sealant, see Tire repair set 279
T Tire settings 285
Tires, run-flat 278
Tachometer 151 Tire tread 276
Tail lights, replacing, see Lights and bulbs 312 Title, gesture control 56
Taking the vehicle out of service 327 Tone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Enter‐
Tank capacity 329 tainment and Communication 6
Technical changes, see For Your Own Safety 8 Tool 311
Technical data 328 Torque indicator electric motor, see Sport dis‐
Telephone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, plays 159
Entertainment and Communication 6 Torque indicator, see Sport displays 159
Telephone, selection list in the instrument clus‐ Touchpad, Controller 49
ter 157 Tow bar 321
Teleservices, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐ Tow fitting 321
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6 Towing 319
Temperature, automatic climate con‐ Tow rope 321
trol 225, 229 Tow-starting 319
Temperature display electric motor, see Sport TPM Flat Tire Monitor 291
displays 159 Traction control 192
Temperature display, see outside tempera‐ TRACTION, driving dynamics 192
ture 154 Traffic bulletins, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
Temperature, engine oil 153 gation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Theft alarm system, see Alarm system 100 Transmission lock, electronic unlocking 139
Thigh support 107 Transmission, see Steptronic transmission 135
Tilt alarm sensor 101 Transporting children safely 118
Tilt, backrest 107 Tread, tires 276
Tilt down, passenger's side exterior mirror, see Trip computer, see Trip data 158
Automatic Curb Monitor 114 Trip data 158
Time 62 Triple turn signal activation 132
Time of arrival, trip computer 145 Trip odometer, see Trip data 158
Time of day, see Time 62 Trunk, emergency unlocking 97
Time setting, automatic 62 Trunk lid 96
Tire brands, recommended 277 Trunk lid, emergency unlocking 97
Tire chains 283 Trunk lid, see Trunk lid 96
Tire change 277 Trunk lid, vehicle key 82
Tire damage 276 Trunk, see Cargo area 250
Tire identification marks 274 Turning circle lines, rearview camera 212
Tire inflation pressure 270 Turning circle, vehicle 328
Tire inflation pressure monitoring, see TPM 291 Turn signal, indicator light 149
Tire inflation pressure monitor TPM 291 Turn signal, replacing bulbs, see Lights and
Tire marking 274 bulbs 312
344
Turn signals, high beams, headlight flasher 132 Vehicle status 160
Vehicle storage 327
U Vehicle washing 323
Ventilation 232
Ultrasonic sensors, see Sensors of the vehi‐ Ventilation, see Pre-ventilation 233
cle 37 Venting, see Ventilation 232
Unintentional alarm, avoiding 101 Vent, see Ventilation 232
Units of measurement 63 Version Software, see Remote Software Up‐
Units, see Set units of measurement 63 grade 58
Universal remote control 238 Video, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En‐
Unlock button, Steptronic transmission 135 tertainment and Communication 6
Unlocking, automatic 99 VIN, see Vehicle identification number 12
Unlocking, see Opening and Closing 80 Voice command response 51
Unlocking, settings 98 Voice control 51
Unlocking, vehicle key 81 Voice control, gesture control 56
Unwarranted alarm, see Avoiding unintentional Voice control, see BMW Intelligent Personal As‐
alarms 101 sistant 51
Updates made after the editorial deadline 7 Voice control system 51
Upgrade, see Remote Software Upgrade 58 Volume, gesture control 56
Upholstery material care 325
Upper retaining strap, top tether 122 W
USB connection 78
USB port, position in vehicle 243 Wake word 52
Used battery, disposing of 313 Warning against cross traffic 221
Use, intended 8 Warning function, rear-end collision 187
Warning light in the exterior mirror, see Active
V Blind Spot Detection 184
Warning light in the exterior mirror, see Cross
Valet parking mode 97 traffic warning 221
Vanity mirror 241 Warning lights 147
Vehicle battery 312 Warning messages, see Check Control 146
Vehicle breakdown, see Breakdown assis‐ Warning triangle 315
tance 315 Warranty 8
Vehicle, breaking in 256 Warranty Booklet 8
Vehicle care 324 Washer fluid 307
Vehicle care products 324 Washer nozzles, windshield 134
Vehicle data, reset 64 Washer system 133
Vehicle equipment 7 Washing the vehicle 323
Vehicle identification number 12 Washing, vehicle 323
Vehicle key 80 Water on roads 258
Vehicle key, additional 83 Water, see Condensation water under the parked
Vehicle key, integrated key 89 vehicle 259
Vehicle key, loss 83 Website, see Internet 6
Vehicle key, malfunction 84 Weights 329
Vehicle key, replacing the battery 83 Welcome light during unlocking 81
Vehicle paint, care 324 Welcome lights 165
345
Welcome screen, driver profiles 67

Wheel base, vehicle 328
Wheels and tires 270
Wheels and tires, exchange 277
Widgets, iDrive 44
Widgets, instrument cluster 143, 144
Width, vehicle 328
Wi-Fi connection 75
WiFi connection, see WLAN connection 75
Wi-Fi hotspot 75
Window, defrosting 227, 232
Windows, powered 102
Windshield, defrosting 227, 232
Windshield washer fluid, see Washer fluid 307
Windshield washer nozzles 134
Windshield wiper, see Wiper system 133
Winter storage, see Long-term vehicle stor‐
age 327
Winter tires 278
Winter tires, tread 276
Wiper blades, replacing 311
Wiper fluid, see Washer fluid 307
Wiper, fold-away position 135
Wiper, see Washer/wiper system 133
Wiper system 133
Wireless charging, smartphone, see Wireless
charging tray 243
Wireless charging tray for smartphones 243
WLAN connection 75
Wood parts, care 326
Wordmatch principle, see Entry comparison 44
Wrench, see Onboard vehicle tool kit 311
xDrive 192
346
*BL5A37F2400A*
01405A37F24 ue

California Proposition 65
Warning
For vehicles sold in California:

The Ultimate
Driving Machine®
BMW DRIVER'S GUIDE APP.

Your customized information about the vehicle in an app.
Optimized for smartphones & tablets. Can be used offline.
*BL5A37F2400A*
01405A37F24 ue

2022 BMW 2 Series Gran Coupe Owners Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

2022 BMW 2 Series Gran Coupe Owners Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2022 BMW 2 Series Gran Coupe Owners Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

LINK:

CONTENT & A-Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F24 - VI/21

After a vehicle software update – such as, a Remote Software Upgrade –

© 2021 Bayerische Motoren Werke

After a software update in the

Symbols and displays Vehicle equipment and

▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Event Data Recorder EDR Vehicle identification

Right nameplate iDrive

Reporting safety defects

Windshield To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle

For Canadian customers

Owner's Manual media

Media at a glance Supplementary Owner's Manuals

Scrolling through the Owner's

Opening via iDrive

1. Press the button.

Opening when a Check Control

2. Press the button on the vehicle key.

Comfort Access Opening the trunk lid with no-touch

Grasp the handle of a vehicle door completely.

Locking the vehicle

Touch the grooved surface on the handle of a

▷ Press and hold the button on the ve‐

Depending on the setting, the doors may also Driver's door

Displays, control elements

1 Light switch element

Buttons on the Controller

Go to the main menu.

Go to the Media/Radio menu.

Go to the Communication menu.

Go to destination input menu for navi‐

Go to the previous display.

Go to the Options menu.

Activating the voice control system

Say the command.

Ending voice control

Set-up and use

Electrically adjustable seats Adjusting the exterior mirrors

1 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt 1 Adjusting

Adjusting the steering wheel

1. Fold the lever down.

For equipment specification with M sport seat:

Memory function Button Function

Press once: changes the sta‐

2. Press the button. The writing on the Changeover of waveband/satel‐

Buttons and functions Select point of interest categories from the

Connecting a mobile phone Dialing a number

1. "COM" Establish the connection via the additional tele‐

A control number is displayed.

Steptronic transmission: parking

Auto Start/Stop function

A selector lever lock prevents the inadvertent Steptronic transmission, Sport

Releasing the selector lever lock

Activate the Sport program/manual mode:

Turn signal, high beams,

▷ Blinking: press the lever past the resistance